^sS^^^^^^P^^^ 
 
 $e 
 
 ^^^s 
 
7l 
 
 -Vw 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2008 with funding from 
 
 Microsoft Corporation 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/elementsofgermanOOjagerich 
 
H. O. G. von JAGEMANN'S WORKS. 
 
 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN SYNTAX. With 
 special reference to Prose Composition, vi ■+- 1 70. 
 i2mo. 
 
 MATERIALS FOR GERMAN PROSE COMPO- 
 SITION. With Notes and Vocabulary. {Shortly.) 
 
 FOUQUE'S UNDINE. Eine Erzahlung von 
 Friedrich Baron de la Motte Fouque. With an 
 Introduction, Notes, and Vocabulary, x-f 220 pp. 
 i2mo. 
 
 GOETHE'S DICHTUNG UND WAHRHEIT. 
 First Three Books. With Introduction and Notes. 
 (In preparation. ) 
 
 Henry Holt & Co., Publishers, New York. 
 
ELEMENTS 
 
 OF 
 
 GERMAN SYNTAX 
 
 WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO 
 
 PROSE COMPOSITION" 
 
 H. C. G. von JAGEMANN 
 
 Assistant Professor of German 
 in Harvard University 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 
 
 F. W. CHRISTERN 
 Boston : CARL SCHOENHOF 
 

 Copyright, 1892 
 
 BT 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 It has been the author's aim to present the most important 
 characteristics of German syntax from the point of view of the 
 English language. Completeness has not been intended ; on the 
 contrary, it has seemed desirable to exclude, on the one hand, 
 everything which is quite natural and self-understood and offers no 
 serious difficulty to the pupil, and, on the other hand, all uncommon 
 forms and constructions, both English and German. The author 
 can hardly expect that his judgment has been uniformly correct in 
 this matter. If, however, the directions contained in the following 
 pages enable the student to find at least one correct and fairly 
 idiomatic German rendering for every ordinary construction in 
 simple English prose, the purpose of the book has been accom- 
 plished. Those who have had experience in teaching German Com- 
 position will probably agree that the subject is difficult enough to 
 justify the relatively limited scope of the book. — In a few cases, 
 things which may appear to present no special difficulties have 
 been included, in order to explain more difficult points connected 
 with them ; and it has also seemed desirable to include certain 
 constructions which, while not of frequent occurrence in the best 
 English prose, are yet very common in familiar discourse, and will, 
 therefore, surely be attempted in German, as soon as the pupil be- 
 gins to express his own thoughts. 
 
 Furthermore, it has seemed best to include a certain amount of 
 lexicological material, especially such as relates to the use of in- 
 definite pronouns, modal auxiliaries, adverbs, prepositions and 
 
 (iii) 
 
 797966 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 conjunctions — matters which, for the purpose of writing German, 
 are of as vital consequence as some things purely syntactical. In 
 a few particulars, notably regarding the order of words, and some 
 things connected with that subject, the author has ventured to 
 depart from the traditional treatment. In other respects, the little 
 book claims no originality. 
 
 Cambridge, Mass., May 1892. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 The references are to paragraphs. 
 
 Articles, 1-13; definite article, 2-7; indefinite article, 8-13. 
 
 Nouns, 14-16; titles, 16. 
 
 Adjectives and Participles, 17-23; comparative and superlative, 
 19-23. 
 
 Pronouns, 24-53 ; form of direct address, 27 ; substitutes for pronouns, 
 28; the pronoun e§, 29 ; reflexives, 30; possessives, 31; demonstra- 
 tives, 32; determinatives, 33; relatives, 34; interrogatives, 35; in- 
 definites, 36-53. 
 
 Numbers and Cases, 54-81 ; singular and plural, 54-55 ; nominative, 
 56; genitive, 57-62 ; dative, 63-73; accusative, 74-81. 
 
 Verbs, 82-128; transitives and intransitives, 83; impersonals, 84; 
 auxiliaries, 85-95; perfect and pluperfect, 87; future and conditional, 
 88-90; passive, 91-95; modal auxiliaries, 96-105 ; tenses, 106-110; 
 subjunctive, 111-118; optative subjunctive in independent sentences, 
 112; in dependent clauses, 113; subjunctive in indirect discourse, 
 114-116; potential subjunctive, 117-118; infinitive, 119-122; par- 
 ticiples, 123-126; verbal nouns in ~ing } 127-128. 
 
 Adverbs, 129-136. 
 
 Prepositions, 137-138. 
 
 Conjunctions, 139-141. 
 
 The most important English Adverbs, Prepositions, and Con- 
 junctions, in Alphabetical Order, with their German 
 Equivalents, 142-211. 
 
 Word Order, 212-246; normal order, 214-233; interrogative or em- 
 phatic order, 234-235 ; dependent order, 236-241 ; periods, 242-246. 
 
 Appendix : The most common adjectives, participles and verbs, requir- 
 ing in German, constructions different from the English. Adjectives 
 and Participles, p. 157; Verbs, p. 161. 
 
 (v) 
 
Brtfcles. 
 
 1. The use of the articles, in English, is more or less 
 idiomatic; compare, for instance, 'in church/ 'in school/ 
 c in college/ 'in town/ 'in congress/ 'in parliament/ 'in 
 jail/ ' in prison/ with ' in the university/ ' in the academy/ 
 'in the city/ 'in the legislature/ 'in the senate/ 'in the 
 penitentiary/ The use of the articles, in German, is also 
 quite idiomatic, and it is, therefore, necessary to learn a 
 great many expressions individually. A large number of 
 such will be given in connection with the treatment of 
 prepositions. The following rules are not exhaustive and 
 admit of exceptions. 
 
 DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 2. The definite article is generally used before the 
 
 names of the seasons, months and days of the week : 
 
 In summer 3m (for in bem) <Sotnmer 
 
 February was very cold 2)er gcbruar tear feljr fait 
 
 On Monday 2tm (for cm bem) Sftontag 
 
 3. The definite article is used with proper names — - 
 
 a. When preceded by adjectives : 
 
 Little William 2)er Heine Sityefa 
 
 Modern Greece £>a8 Ijeuttge ©rtedjenlanb 
 
 b. To indicate the case, when the name itself cannot be, 
 or is not, inflected : 
 
 At the time of Phidias 3ur 3cit be$ $ljibia« 
 
 a) 
 
2 DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 c. Often, in familiar discourse : 
 
 Heine is my favorite poet £)er §eine ift mem iHebtinggbid)ter 
 
 Fritz has broken his arm 2)er gri^ \)at ben s #rm gebrodjen 
 
 d. Feminine names of countries (i. e. all in -ct and bte 
 
 ©d)tt)et§ Switzerland) are always preceded by the definite 
 
 article : 
 
 I am coming from Turkey 3d) fommc an% ber Xiirfet 
 
 He travelled in Switzerland (Sr reifte in ber @djroet$ 
 
 4. 1. The definite article is used with nouns employed 
 in a general sense : 
 
 Poetry is the most perfect ex- 2)ie 2)id)tung ift ber uollfommeufte 
 pression of human feeling toSbrucf be§ menfdjUdjen ©ef iifyleS 
 
 Kant's Criticism of Pure Reason $ant$ $rittf ber reinen SSernunft 
 
 Gold is heavier than lead 2)a$ ©otb ift fdjtnerer aU ba% 23tei 
 But 
 
 His shield was covered with gold @ein ©d)Ub roar mit ©olb bebecft 
 
 2. The definite article is often used before verbal nouns 
 in -eit ("infinitives used as nouns"), particularly when pre- 
 ceded by a preposition, when followed by a genitive, or 
 when the syntactical relations could not otherwise be 
 clearly indicated ; for examples see 128, 2. 
 
 3. The definite article is used distributively : 
 
 This cloth costs five marks a £>tefe8 £ud) foftet fxinf Tlaxt bie (Site 
 
 yard 
 He comes to see us twice a year (§r bef udjt un8 gtneimat t*a% 3af)r 
 
 {or tm 3aljre) 
 
 5. The definite article is often used in place of an 
 English possessive when the context leayes no doubt as to 
 who the possessor is; this is most frequently done in 
 speaking of the parts of the body and of clothing : 
 
INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 3 
 
 He broke his arm (5r brad) ben %xm 
 
 He entered with his hat in his (5r tarn fjeretn nut bem §ute in bcr 
 
 hand §cmb 
 
 He lost his life (Sr toertor ba8 ?eben 
 
 (See 71.) 
 
 6. As in English, the definite article is omitted before 
 a noun preceded by a genitive : 
 
 The friend of my brother 2)er greunb tneineS SBruberS 
 
 But 
 My brother's friend 2Mne8 SBruberS greunb 
 
 The king's son 2)e« tonigS ©ofni 
 
 (See 21, 3 6 and 58.) 
 
 7. The definite article is usually omitted after aH; 
 see 36, 1 
 
 INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 8. In English, the indefinite article a, an, is now so 
 different in form from the numeral one, that we may use 
 the former, without ever thinking that it was originally 
 the same as the numeral one, in cases where a suggestion 
 of such identity would lead to absurdity ; we may say, for 
 instance, "he entered the room with a sad countenance." 
 In German, the indefinite article is still identical with the 
 numeral adjective cin (see 47, 1), except in the matter of 
 emphasis; for this reason the use of the indefinite article 
 in cases like the above is far less common than in Eng- 
 lish, although it is difficult to formulate a definite rule. 
 Thus: 
 
 He was filled with a terrible (§r ttmrbe Don furdjtbarem 3 orne 
 
 hatred of his enemy gegen fetnen geinb erfiittt 
 
 I have a great desire to visit 3d) trage grogeS SBerlangen Sluftva* 
 
 Australia lien ^u befudjen 
 
 He entered the room with a sad (§r trat mit traurtgem ©eftdjte in$ 
 
 countenance dimmer 
 
4 INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 9. 1. After aU as, and in the predicate after neuter 
 verbs, the indefinite article is generally omitted before 
 nouns denoting condition, profession, rank, religion : 
 
 As a Lutheran he was offended $18 2utl)eraner fittjlte cr ftd) bur* 
 
 by these remarks biefe 93emerfungen beteibtgt 
 
 He is a teacher (Sr i(l 2el)rer 
 
 He became a soldier (5r rourbe ©otbat 
 
 2. The indefinite article is also omitted after ate in the 
 sense of for, as : 
 
 He used the dog as a messenger (Sr gebraudjtc ben £unb at8 53otcu 
 
 3. But the indefinite article should not be omitted 
 
 before a noun preceded by an adjective, unless adjective 
 
 and noun together form one term : 
 
 He is an efficient officer (§r ifl ein tudjttger Ofjtcier 
 
 She is a very fine singer ©ie iji etne cmSgegetdjnete ©argerin 
 
 But 
 
 He travelled about as a wander- (£r jog al8 roanbernber ©anger um* 
 
 ing singer Ijer 
 
 10. The indefinite article is omitted after of)ne: 
 A king without a kingdom (gin $onig ofyne $onigreitf) 
 
 11. The indefinite article is never used before toenige 
 few (see 41) ; it is superfluous before fyunbert hundred and 
 tcmfenb thousand: 
 
 A hundred and fifty volumes §nnbert unb fiinfgig S3a*nbe 
 
 12. Only manti) (44), fold) (53), tvdd) (35, 2 a) and tva$ 
 fur (35, 2 b) are allowed to stand before the indefinite 
 article and they are then uninflected; all common ad- 
 jectives must follow : 
 
 So vast a country ($in f grofjeS 2anb {or fo ein grogeS 
 
 2anb; see 53, 2. 
 As learned a man as Grimm (Sin fo geiefjrter 2ftcmn rote ©rimm 
 
TITLES. 
 
 13. Articles, as well as pronouns and adjectives, should 
 be repeated when qualifying several nouns of different 
 genders or numbers : 
 
 A knife and fork (Sin 9fteffer unb einc ©abet 
 
 Mouns, 
 
 >j li A noun in apposition should agree in case and 
 number with the noun or pronoun to which it belongs : 
 
 Charles V. was the son of Philip $arl V. (ber f?ilnfte) roar ber ©ofnt 
 the Fair, archduke of Austria, Wttty)8 be§ @d)onen, (SrgfyergogS 
 
 and the grandson of Maximil- oon Dfterreid), unb ber (Snfel 
 ian I., emperor of Germany 2JtoritmUang I. (be$ (Srften), 8ai* 
 
 fer8 toon 2)eutfdjlanb 
 
 I 15. From masculine nouns denoting nationality, re- 
 ligion, rank, profession, etc., feminines are formed by 
 means of the suffix -in (plur. tttlteit), and these should al- 
 ways be used in speaking of women : 
 
 Rosa Bonheur is a French Sftofa 23oiu)eur ijt eine fransojtfdje 
 artist $ ihtfiterm 
 
 TITLES. 
 
 16. 1. A title preceding a proper name may, or may 
 not, have the definite article ; but the article is usually 
 omitted before the title if the name is followed by an ad- 
 junct in apposition : 
 
 Captain Werner $ apitan SBerner, or ber $ apitan 
 
 SSerner 
 Emperor William $ aifer SBitljefm, or ber # aifer SBil- 
 
 Ijelm 
 King Frederick the Great $onig griebriti) ber ©rofce 
 
a 
 
 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 
 
 2. If preceded by the definite article, the title may, or 
 may not, be inflected ; the name remains uninflected : 
 The patients of Dr. Koch £>te ^atienten be8 2)oftor[8] Stod) 
 
 a. But §err, which in polite language frequently pre- 
 cedes other titles, is always inflected : 
 
 The house of Mr. Schulze 
 The children of the General 
 
 2)a8 £au8 be$ §errn ©djulje 
 S)ic Winter beg §errn ©enerale 
 
 3. If the title does not have the definite article, it re- 
 mains uninflected, while the proper name must be inflected : 
 
 The patients of Dr. Koch S)ie ?5atienten S)oftor $od)8, or 
 
 25oftor $od)3 ^attenten 
 The victories of King Frederick £)ie @iege $onig griebrtd)8 be8 
 the Second $m\\tn 
 
 Hbjectives ant> participles. 
 
 17. Adjectives and participles are inflected when used 
 
 1. attributively before nouns : 
 
 A rich country (Sin rettf)e# 2anb 
 
 The praying child 3)a8 betenbe $mb 
 
 A defeated general (Sin gefdjlagener gelbljerr 
 
 2. as nouns : 
 
 
 
 A German 
 
 
 (Sin 2>eutfd)er 
 
 This German 
 
 
 3>tefer 2)eutfd)e 
 
 Germans ! 
 
 
 ©eiitf djc ! 
 
 The Germans 
 
 
 S)ie ©entfdjen 
 
 A stranger 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Sin grember 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Sine grembc 
 
 All present 
 
 
 OTe ^nmefenben 
 
 No wounded 
 
 
 $eine SBerrounbeten 
 
 a. After ettt)a$ something, ni(f)t3 nothing and \va$ what, 
 
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 7 
 
 something, adjectives are treated like substantives in appo- 
 sition : 
 
 Something new (SttoaS 9?eue8 
 
 Nothing rare 9ttd)t8 ©elteueS 
 
 b. Use the neuter singular to denote that in general 
 which possesses the quality expressed by the adjective : 
 
 The beautiful, that which is 2>a8 ©d)one 
 
 beautiful 
 The sublime 2)a« (Srfjabene 
 
 18. Adjectives and participles remain uninflected 
 
 1. in the predicate : 
 
 The earth is round £>te (£rbe ifr runb 
 
 She is charming ©ie ift reigenb 
 
 He has lost his watch (gr fjat feme Uljr fcerloreu 
 
 My coat is torn SDfcein 9lo(f ift gerriffen 
 
 2. in apposition, except when preceded by the article : 
 
 All Germans, old and young Wit 3)eutfcf)en, alt uttb jung 
 
 Standing on the watchtower of 2(uf ber SBarte jeineS ©d)toffe§ fte= 
 
 his castle, he could see the l)enb, fonnte er ben geiub fyeran* 
 
 enemy approaching fommett fefjeit 
 
 Tired from his long march, he $on feinem langen 9ftarfd)e ermiibet, 
 
 lay down to rest legte er ftd) nieber urn au^uru^eu 
 
 But 
 
 Frederick the Great ftrtebridj ber ©rofje, see 16. 1 and 3. 
 
 3. as adverbs : 
 
 He writes well (Sr fdfyreibt gut 
 
 She sings charmingly @ie ftngt reigenb 
 
 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 19. The ordinary comparatives and superlatives in 
 -er and -jt (or eft) are to be used in all cases except when 
 a person or a thing is said to possess one quality in a 
 higher degree than another quality : 
 
8 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 She is more beautiful than her ®ie ift fdjoner al8 tfjre (Sdpueftet 
 
 sister 
 
 The most magnificent church in 2)te £rarf)tigfte $trd)e ini gan^en 
 
 the whole country 2anbe 
 J5u£ 
 
 This church is more magnificent £>iefe $ird)e ift tnefjr pradjttg a(8 
 
 than beautiful jd)5n 
 
 20. The rules for the inflection of adjectives as given 
 above apply also to comparatives ; to superlatives, how- 
 ever, only when used as nouns, or attributively before 
 nouns : 
 
 A larger tree Sin grofterer 23cwm 
 
 He writes more rapidly than I ($r fd)reibt frfjneller al$ id) 
 
 The greatest nonsense 2)cr grofjte Unftnn 
 
 That which is best 2)a§ 23efte 
 
 21. 1. Superlatives are used in English either rel- 
 atively, when a comparison is expressed or implied : she 
 of all the pupils played most beautifully, or absolutely, 
 without any expressed or implied comparison : she played 
 most beautifully for very beautifully. 
 
 2. As a rule, superlatives cannot be used absolutely in 
 German : instead of an absolute superlative, a positive pre- 
 ceded by an adverb expressing high degree, or a cor- 
 respondingly stronger adjective, should be used : 
 
 She played most beautifully ©te ftrielte fer)r fd)on, ronnberfd)oii, 
 
 au^gegeidjnet (exquisitely) 
 
 a. A few superlatives are used absolutely, especially 
 aHerltcbft charming ; see 22, 2 a and b, and 23. 
 
 3. Superlatives used relatively are, as a rule, preceded 
 by the definite article : 
 
 Most people 2)ie meiften 2ften(d)en 
 
COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 9 
 
 The article is not used before superlatives — 
 
 a. In the vocative : 
 
 Most noble lord ! (£betfter §err ! 
 
 This may also be regarded as an absolute superlative. 
 
 b. When the superlative is preceded by a genitive : 
 
 Schiller's greatest work €5d)iUer8 grofeteS SBerf 
 
 {See 6.) 
 
 22. Superlatives are not used in their uninflected form 
 in the predicate, in apposition, or adverbially, as com- 
 paratives and superlatives are. 
 
 1. In the predicate, after neuter verbs, two construc- 
 tions are possible : 
 
 a. The superlative with the definite article, in the 
 nominative : 
 
 This house is the largest 2)ie|e$ §au8 ift ba8 grdgte 
 
 This construction is most common when a thing is com- 
 pared with things of its own kind. 
 
 b. An adverbial phrase consisting of am and the in- 
 flected superlative: am cjroftten, literally at the largest: 
 
 This house is the most beautiful £>iefe8 §au3 ift am fdjonften 
 
 This construction is most common when a thing is 
 compared with things of another kind. 
 
 2. When a superlative is to be used adverbially, the 
 same construction is used : 
 
 She of all the pupils played most $>on alien ©djitferinnen foielte fie 
 beautifully am fd)5nfien 
 
y 
 
 10 PRONOUNS. 
 
 a. Instead of on with the dative, Quf with the ac- 
 cusative is sometimes used, generally in an absolute 
 sense : 
 
 He entertained us most agree- (Sr unterljtelt un8 auf8 angenefymfte 
 ably 
 
 I. Notice the following expressions : 
 
 f)ocf)ft highly, used absolutely : fyodjftenS at the most 
 
 she was a highly gifted girl roenigftenS, mtubeftenS, gum roenig* 
 
 fie roar cin Ijodjft begabteS Wlab* ften, gum minbeften at least 
 
 djen meiftenS mostly 
 
 23. Superlatives are frequently strengthened by pre- 
 fixing to them the genitive plural after of all. 
 
 The most beautiful woman of 2)ie atterjdjonfte grau 
 
 all 
 She sang most beautifully of all @ie fang am allerfdjonften 
 
 pronouns. 
 
 24. All kinds of pronouns must agree in number and 
 gender with the nouns for which they stand : 
 
 He tried to open the door, but (Sr fcerfud)te bie Zijiix gu offnen, abex 
 it was locked fie xoax toerjdjtoffen 
 
 25. If the grammatical gender of a noun denoting a 
 person is not the same as its natural gender, a pronoun 
 referring to such a noun more generally follows the 
 natural gender : 
 
 This poor maiden has lost her 2)ieje8 arme 2ftabd)en tjat ifyre (in- 
 mother stead of feine) 2Jhitter Derfof en 
 
 26. 1. A pronoun referring to a collective noun gen- 
 
FORM OF DIRECT ADDRESS. 11 
 
 erally follows the grammatical gender and number of the 
 
 noun, as does also the verb : 
 
 The people have lost their great 2)a$ SSolt fyat feinett grogen giifyrei 4 
 leader oerloren 
 
 2. But if a collective noun is followed by a plural 
 
 noun in apposition (59, t>), the pronoun must be in the 
 
 plural : k 
 
 A large number of people were Sine grogc Sftettge ?eute mugteu tfjre 
 compelled to leave their dwell- SSofymmgen Derlaffen 
 ings 
 
 FORM OF DIRECT ADDRESS. 
 
 27. 1. The natural form of address is the second person 
 singular in addressing one person : bit l)aft, bit 6ift, etc. ; 
 and the second person plural in addressing several per- 
 sons : i(]r fyabt, ifjr feib, etc. 
 
 2. The use of this form of address has been limited, 
 however, to those cases in which relatives, intimate friends, 
 very young persons, or (more rarely) inferiors in station, 
 are addressed ; in all other cases a conventional form is used 
 instead of the natural form of address. 
 
 3. This conventional form of address consisted formerly, 
 as it does now in English, in the use of the second person 
 plural in addressing either one or several persons: itjr 
 Ijabt, if)r fetb. This form was in use as late as the begin- 
 ning of the seventeenth century and is employed by 
 modern writers when dealing with former times except 
 when the natural form is used. 
 
 4. Later, the third person came to be used as the con- 
 ventional form of address, and at present the third person 
 
12 SUBSTITUTES FOR PRONOUNS. 
 
 plural is used in speaking either to one or several per- 
 sons, the pronoun being then capitalized : @te Ijabeu, ©ie 
 ftub, so that the use of the second person plural is now- 
 restricted to those cases in which several persons are 
 addressed each one of whom would be addressed by bit. 
 
 5. Whatever form of address be used, be careful to be 
 consistent: do not change from one form to another, make 
 the verb agree with its subject and use the right pos- 
 sessives for each personal pronoun : bit — bein, iljv — eiter, 
 ©ie — Sfjr. 
 
 6. In the address, only ©ie and its possessive Sf)t are 
 always capitalized ; other pronouns and possessives ordi- 
 narily only in letters. 
 
 SUBSTITUTES FOR PRONOUNS. 
 
 28. 1. For a personal pronoun, and, often, for a de- 
 monstrative pronoun, referring to a thing and governed by 
 a preposition, there is substituted a compound adverb con- 
 sisting of the adverbs ba (before vowels bar) or f)ter, and 
 the preposition in question ; barauf for cutf itjm, auf tf)r, auf 
 iljn, auf fie, auf e$, auf tfynen ; bamit for tntt iljm, ntit iln\ 
 mit ifjnen : 
 
 This pen is so poor that I can- 2)iefe geber ift fo fd)fecf)t, baft id) 
 not write with it ntd)t bamit fdjmben lann 
 
 2. Similarly, for a relative or interrogative pronoun, 
 governed by a preposition and referring to a thing, a com- 
 pound with too (before vowels tour) is often substituted: 
 toorauf for auf toetdjem, auf tocldjer, auf roeldjeu, auf toctdjc, 
 auf toetdjeS : 
 
THE PRONOUN C«. 13 
 
 The letter in which he wrote 2)er 93rief toorin er bie« fdjrteB tft 
 this is lost Derloren gegangen 
 
 THE PRONOUN e3. 
 
 29. The pronoun e£ is used 1) in a definite sense — 
 a. "When referring to a neuter noun : 
 
 The child is too small, it cannot £>a$ $inb ift gu tteitt, e3 fann nod) 
 
 yet walk nid)t getyen 
 
 I have not seen it for a long 3d) Ijabe e« tcuige tud)t gefefyen 
 
 time 
 
 1. With the verb fetn, to be, to express identity : 
 
 It is my brother (58 ift metn 93ruber 
 
 It is a slander (§3 ift eine SBertaumbiing 
 
 If the noun which follows (and which is really the 
 predicate) is in the plural, the verb is made to agree with 
 it in number : 
 
 They are Frenchmen (§8 ftnb (or fie finb, in case the sub- 
 
 ject has been clearly mentioned 
 before) grcmgofen 
 
 If the predicate is a pronoun, subject and predicate ex- 
 change parts and the verb agrees in number and person 
 with the new subject : 
 
 It is she @te ift e8 
 
 Is it you? SBtft bu c«? 
 
 c. When referring to an idea previously expressed, it 
 
 should be used in place of the English so, frequently used 
 
 for that purpose (see 189) : 
 
 He said that he had read the @r fagte, baft er ba$ SBurf) gelefen 
 
 book, but I do not believe it Ijatte, aber id) glaube e$ m'djt 
 
 Will he come 1 I hope so SBtrb er fommen? 3d) Ijoffe e8 
 
 d. To anticipate, as subject, or, more rarely, as object, 
 
14 REFLEXIVES. 
 
 the contents of a following substantive clause or an 
 infinitive with 311 : 
 
 It gives me great pleasure to (58 nmdjt mir grogeS $erguiigen 
 
 see you here ©ie fyier p jefyen 
 
 I am sorry that I was not at (5§ tljut mir leib, baft idj ntd)t ju 
 
 home §cmfe mar 
 
 I do not believe that he saw 3d) gfaube [e$] tudjt, baft er mid) 
 
 me gefefjen l)at 
 
 The citizens did not dare to op- 2)ie 23iirger toagten [e8] nid)t, bent 
 
 pose the enemy getnbe 2Biberftanb 311 leiften 
 
 My father does not wish me to Sftein $ater tt)Mtfd)t [eg] nid)t, baft 
 
 study medicine (see 122) id) 9ftebi$in ftubiere 
 
 I had forgotten to take my 3d) fyatte [e§J uergeffett, metnen 
 
 overcoat Ubeqiefyer mitntnefmien 
 
 When c£ would appear, however, as the subject of a 
 passive verb, it is commonly omitted if any other element 
 of the sentence stands before the verb : 
 
 I was told that you had accept- (E§ tnurbe mir gefagt (see 64), or 
 ed his offer mir rourbe gefagt, baft ©te fern 
 
 5uterbieten attgenommeu fatten 
 (See also 84, 4.) 
 
 2. As the indefinite subject of impersonal verbs; see 
 84. 
 
 3. As an "expletive," before the verb, when it is de- 
 sired to let the subject follow, like the English there ; see 
 192, 3 and 223. 
 
 REFLEXIVES. 
 
 K 
 
 30. 1. Ke member that in English the pronouns my- 
 self, thyself, himself etc., are used both as reflexive and as 
 emphatic pronouns, and are used for the nominative, da- 
 tive and accusative cases without change of form: he did 
 it himself (emphatic, nominative), / shall give myself the 
 
REFLEXIVES. 15 
 
 pleasure (reflexive, dative), he deceived himself (reflexive, 
 accusative), etc. 
 
 2. In German, the ordinary personal pronouns of the 
 first and second person also serve, in the dative and accu- 
 sative, as reflexives : 
 
 I shall give myself the pleasure 3d) roerbe mix ba% SBergniigen ma* 
 
 d)en 
 You have deceived yourself 2)u Ijaft bid) getaufdjt 
 
 3. In the third person, fid) serves as reflexive for both 
 dative and accusative, singular and plural, masculine, 
 feminine and neuter, and it must be used whenever sub- 
 ject and object are identical, even in cases where, in 
 English, the simple personal pronoun may be used : 
 
 The king called his ministers £)er $onig rtef jeine Sftinifter uut 
 
 around him * fid) 
 
 She has killed herself <Ste Ijat fid) gctotet 
 
 4. If the object of an infinitive is a personal pronoun 
 of the third person it should be rendered by the reflexive 
 fid), as a rule, only when referring to the logical subject 
 of the infinitive : 
 
 The physician advised him to 3)er 2tr$t riet ifym, ftd) einige Sftutje 
 allow himself some rest jit gbmten 
 
 Otherwise the simple personal pronoun should be 
 used : 
 
 He ordered the servant to bring (5r befall bem 2)iener, U)m ein paar 
 
 him some eggs Gner ;w brutgen 
 
 He ordered a castle to be built (Sr befafyl, ifym ein ©djtofj auf bem 
 
 for himself on the mountain SBerge gu banen 
 (120) 
 
 But after laffen, f)6ren, jeljen, in the construction ex- 
 
16 POSSESSIVES. 
 
 plained in 120, the reflexive should be used to refer to the 
 
 subject of the governing verb : 
 
 He had a castle built for him- (§r Ueg fid) ein ©cfytofj auf btm 
 
 self on the mountain S8crge bauen 
 
 He heard himself called (Sr Ijorte ftd) rufen 
 
 5. The personal pronouns used as reflexives, and the 
 reflexive fid), are also very often used in place of the recip- 
 rocal etnanber : 
 
 We have not seen each other 2Bir Ijaben un8 (or etnanber) Jauge 
 for a long time nid)t gefeljen 
 
 a. Whenever a misunderstanding might arise, etnanber 
 should be used, or gegenfetttg mutually should be added to 
 the reflexive : 
 They killed each other @ic toteten eincmber, or ftcf) gegen* 
 
 jeittg 
 
 6. The emphatic felbft may be used to re-enforce a 
 
 noun or a personal or reflexive pronoun without regard to 
 
 case, number or gender, but it can never take the place of 
 
 such a noun or pronoun : 
 
 He has done it himself (§r fyat e« felbfi getljcm 
 
 They can see it better than <Sie fonnen e$ beffer feljett alS toir 
 ourselves felbft 
 
 POSSESSIVES. 
 
 31. 1. The possessive adjectives are meitt my, belli, 
 thy, your, feilt his, its, if)r her, its, unfer our, etter your, 
 it)r their, Sf)V your. See 24-27. 
 
 2. The possessive pronouns' mine, thine, etc. (in contra- 
 distinction to the possessive adjectives my, thy, etc.) may 
 be rendered — 
 
 a. By ntetn, bein, etc. declined pronominally, i. e. as ad- 
 jectives are declined when not preceded by the definite 
 
DEMONSTRATIVES. 17 
 
 article or by another limiting word having the same end- 
 ings : masc. metner, fern, mchtc, neut. meineS, etc., 
 
 I. By the same words preceded by the definite article : 
 masc. ber metne, fern, bie meine, neut. ba3 meine, 
 
 c. By the adjectives metnig, beinig, etc., preceded by the 
 definite article : masc. bcr meinige f fern, bie meinige, neut. 
 ba$ meinige, etc. : 
 
 Your coat is warmer than mine 3)ein SRocf ift toarmrr ctt8 ineiner, 
 
 or ber metne, or ber meinige 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVES. 
 
 32. The demonstratives are btefer this, that, jener yon, 
 that, and ber this, that (gen. sing. masc. neut. beffen, fern, 
 bcrcn, plur. beren ; dat. plur. bcncn). 2)te[er is used when 
 referring to a nearer, jener when referring to a remoter 
 object; ber may be employed in either case. In the 
 genitive, however, biefer and jener are very rarely used, 
 except adjectively. In familiar discourse, ber frequently 
 takes the place of a personal pronoun of the third person, 
 particularly when emphasized : 
 
 This mountain is not as high Sttefer 23erg ift ntcfyt (o Ijod) tt)ie 
 
 as that one jener 
 
 I do not want that one 3)en raill id) nid)t 
 
 He is not my friend 2)er iji nid)t mem greunb 
 
 a. 3)ie|er and jener are never used merely as determina- 
 tives ; see the following paragraph. L 
 
 DETERMINATIVES. 
 
 33. 1. The determinatives are ber and berjenige ; they 
 are almost interchangeable, except that berjenige, being 
 longer, can bear the stronger emphasis. The latter is de- 
 
> 
 
 18 RELATIVES. 
 
 clined as though written in two words : nom. masc. ber^ 
 jenigc, fern, btejenige, neut. berjenige, gen. masc. be^jenigen, 
 etc. 
 
 2. These pronouns are used : 
 
 a. As antecedents to relative pronouns ; see 34, 1. The 
 personal pronouns of the third person are never used in 
 an indefinite sense as antecedents of relatives in place of 
 the above determinatives, as they are in the English he 
 who, they who, etc. 
 
 b. Before genitiver and before nouns preceded by prep- 
 ositions : 
 
 This house is larger than that 2>iefeS $>au§ ift cjroger alS baS (or 
 of my father, but smaller baSjenige) metneS 93ater8, abeu 
 than that on the hill ffeiner ati ba% {or baSjeiiige) auf 
 
 bem §iigel 
 
 c. 2)iefer or jener may be used under such circumstances 
 only with a distinct demonstrative force ; e. g. in the 
 above sentence the speaker might have said jene3 auf bent 
 §fige(, if he had actually pointed at the house. 
 
 RELATIVES. 
 
 34. 1. The relatives are ber and toetdjer. They are al- 
 most interchangeable, except that trjetcfjcr, being longer, 
 can bear the stronger emphasis. By means of the deter- 
 minatives bcr and berjenige, and the relatives ber and 
 ttetdjer, the English the one who, he who, may be expressed 
 in four different ways : 
 
 a. ber — ber, 
 
 b. ber — tuetd)er, 
 
 c. berjenige — ber f 
 
 d. berjenige — toetcfjer. 
 
fcELATTVES. 19 
 
 2. In the genitive, however, both singular and plural, 
 
 only ber can, as a rule, be used : 
 
 The man whose house was 2)er 9ftanu beffen $au§ geftern ab* 
 burned yesterday gebrcmnt ift 
 
 a. A relative pronoun in the genitive case should pre- 
 cede the governing noun : 
 
 The steeple on the top of which 2)er £liurm, auf beffen ®pifce @te 
 you see a flag is more than etne gatjne fefyen, ift iiber300 ^ujj 
 
 300 feet high t)od) 
 
 3. The pronoun toer may be used in the sense of he 
 who and its neuter ttni3 in that of that which, when no 
 antecedent is expressed : 
 
 He who believes such things Ser foldje ©adjen glanbt, geigt fefjr 
 
 shows very little intelligence tr>enig 53erftanb 
 
 I told my friend what I had 3d) eqaljlte metnem greunbe xva% 
 
 learned id) eifafyren tjatte 
 
 a. The neuter tva§ is generally used for tt)etd)e3 or ba$, 
 when the antecedent is an indefinite pronoun or an adjec- 
 tive used as a noun: 
 
 All is not gold that glitters (58 ift nid)t atleS ©olb tr>a8 gtan$t 
 
 The great things which he has 2)a§ ®roge, n?a8 er geleiftet fyat, 
 done are recognized by all nrirb Don jebermcutn anerfcmnt 
 
 b. As to whoever, whatever, etc., see 165, 3. 
 
 4. The antecedent should always be expressed when it 
 
 would naturally stand in a different case from that of the 
 
 relative : 
 
 He gave land to whoever wished (gr gob jebem, ber fid) in ber (£o(onie 
 to settle in the colony niebedaffen ttwUte, ?anb 
 
 Or when it would be governed by a preposition : 
 Terrified at what had happened (Srjdjrotfen iiber ba% \va% gefd)et)en 
 
20 INTERROGATIVES. 
 
 I am not responsible for what 3d) bin md)t bafiir (28, 1) oerant* 
 my friends have done roortltd), rociS nteine greunbe ge* 
 
 tfyau tjaben 
 
 5. A relative pronoun can never be omitted in German 
 
 as it often is in English : 
 
 The book I read yesterday was 2)a§ 23ud) ba$ (or roeldjeS) id) ge* 
 very interesting ftent la$, ttmr fefyr intereffant 
 
 6. After a relative pronoun in the nominative case, 
 which refers to a personal pronoun of the first or second 
 person, the nominative of this personal pronoun is repeated 
 and the verb is made to agree with it in person and num- 
 ber: 
 
 You who have deceived me 2)u ber bu mid) getciitfd)t fyaft 
 
 INTBRROGATIVES. 
 
 35. 1. The interrogatives are U>er who (neuter ttm£ 
 what, unchangeable), and lucldjer which one : 
 Who are you ? 2Ber finb ©ie ? 
 
 What are you doing there ? 2Ba8 tt)im ©ie ha ? 
 
 Which one of these two horses SSeldjeS Don biefen beiben ^Pfcrbcn 
 do you prefer ? giefyen ©ie Dor ? 
 
 2. Only tocldjer is used as an interrogative adjective : 
 
 Which horse do you prefer ? 2BeId)e8 *Pferb $te!)en ©te Dor? 
 
 With what writer are you most SBeldjeu ©djnftftetter fennen <Ste 
 familiar 1 am beften ? 
 
 a. In rhetorical questions, what a may be translated by 
 roetct) ein, toe(d) remaining then uninflected (see 12) : 
 What a mountain ! 2Beld) etn SBerg ! 
 
 I. What hind of is generally expressed by facto fur, 
 which expression remains unaffected by gender, number, 
 or case of its noun ; when \va$ is not preceded by a pre- 
 
INDEFINITES. 21 
 
 position, fur and the noun may be separated from it by 
 other elements of the sentence, subject, of course, to the 
 general rules for the arrangement of the sentence (see 
 212 ff.) : 
 
 What kind of a man is he ! 2Bct§ fur ein 9Jtami ift er, or ma« ift 
 
 er fiir em WHanix ? 
 The gardener inquired with 3)er ©civtner fragte, wit roa8 fiir 
 what kind of flowers he SBlumen er ben (Baal fdjmiicfen 
 should decorate the hall jolle 
 
 INDEFINITES. 
 
 36. All. 1. After all, bcr should not be used except 
 
 with demonstrative or determinative (32, 33) force ; when 
 
 it is omitted, all should be inflected like ber ; when it is 
 
 used, all may or may not be inflected : 
 
 All talking was useless 2tUe8 9teben tuar toergebttd) 
 
 All the water in the village was OTe§ SBaffer im 2)orfe mar tterbor* 
 
 spoiled ben 
 
 All the bridges were carried TOe Sriicfen tuareu com (Stfe fort- 
 
 away by the ice gertffen 
 
 All the pictures which I sent 5Ule (or aUe bie, or att bie) ©ematbe, 
 
 to the exnibition are sold bie id) auf bie 9Iu§fteUung gefanbt 
 
 l)abt, fmb Derfauft 
 
 2. When used in the sense of whole, entire, gan# should 
 
 be used : 
 
 All day £>en gangen £ag 
 
 All the year round 2>a8 gauje 3aljr Ijtnburrf) 
 
 3. The expression all of seems illogical from the Ger- 
 man point of view, since all cannot be a part of anything, 
 hence the genitive cannot be used : 
 
 We could not satisfy all of 28 ir fonnfen [fie] ntdjt afle befrie* 
 
 them big en 
 
 All of his relatives are opposed ©eine $erttmnbten fmb atte {or aUe 
 
 to it fetne SBerwanbten fiub) bagegeu 
 
22 INDEFINITES. 
 
 37. Any. 1. In interrogative, negative and conditional 
 clauses. 
 
 a. Not any should always be rendered by fein : 
 
 I do not know of any other 3d) roeifj feinen anbern SSeg 
 road 
 
 Not . . . anybody, any one. SWemanb (see 47, 2). 
 
 Not . . . anything. 9?tdjt8 (see 47, 2). 
 
 Not . . . anywhere. 9?irgenb3. 
 
 b. Otherwise, any may be translated by ein f or, more 
 
 emphatically, by irgcnb cut or irgenb tuetd) ; before nouns 
 
 in the plural it may be translated by irgenb lucfdj, or be 
 
 left untranslated ; before nouns denoting material it should 
 
 be left untranslated : 
 
 Do you know of any good SBiffen @ie emeu (or irgenb riant, 
 French teacher in this town 1 or irgenb roeldjen) gnten franco* 
 
 fifdjen £cfyrer r)ier? 
 Did you see any fine pictures ? §aben @ie [irgenb roeldje] fd)bne 
 
 23ilber gejeljen? 
 Did you buy any powder £aben @ie Quitter gefauft? 
 
 Anybody, any one. [Srgenb] jcmctnb (see 52, 2). 
 Anything. [Srgcnb] etoaS (see 52, 2). 
 Anywhere. Srgenbtoo. 
 
 2. = one as well as another, [irgenb] ein bettebtger, jeber 
 beltebige ; = every, jeber : 
 
 Take any one of these books ftimm [irgenb] ein bettebtgeS toon 
 
 biefen SBiidjern 
 Take any {i. e., which and as SRimm fooiele Don biefen 23iicf)em 
 
 manyas,you desire) of these atg bir beliebt 
 
 books 
 Anybody will tell you that you 3ebermcinn roirb bir fagen, ba6 bu 
 
 are mistaken Unrest Ijaft 
 
 I shall do anything to please 3d) roerbe aUeS ttum bid) gu befrie- 
 
 you bigen 
 
INDEFINITES. 23 
 
 You will find such men in any @old)c SRenfdjett tx»irfl bu uberatt 
 country ftuben 
 
 38. Both. 1. 93eibe is more often used than both (ex- 
 cept as mentioned below, 2) and it may frequently be em- 
 ployed to render the English two when preceded by the 
 article or a demonstrative : 
 
 The two enemies stood facing 2)ie betben getube ffonbett ctnanbev 
 each other gegeuiiber 
 
 a. Articles and pronouns are never allowed to precede 
 
 beibc, as they may the English loth: 
 
 Both your sisters Seine beiben ©djroeftem 
 
 Both these men 2)teje betben banner 
 
 2. In both . . . and do not translate both, except when 
 very emphatic ; then use fott)ol)( ct(3 [audj] : 
 
 Both the officers and soldiers 2)ie Offtciere unb bie (golbaten, or 
 
 foii>ol)f bie Offtciere al3 [cmd)] bie 
 jSofbaten 
 
 39. Each, Every. Ordinarily, jeber r inflected like ber: 
 
 Each one of them paid a fine of 3eber Don tfynen {see 59, 9) begarjtte 
 
 five marks fiinf Wlart ©tvafe 
 
 Every soldier received fifty 3eber ©olbat err)telt fiinfetg $atro- 
 
 cartridges it en 
 
 When no misunderstanding can arise, beibe may be 
 used in the sense of each of two, and aUe in the sense of 
 every one of a number: 
 
 Each one had a sword in his SBetbe fatten @d)tt»erter in ben §an- 
 
 hand beu 
 
 I visit my native town once 3d) befndje meine SBaterftctbt aUe 
 
 every year 3al)ve etnmal 
 
 Everybody. Scbermann, uninfected, except gen. -g. 
 Everything. Me3 (see 17, 2 a). 
 
24 INDEFINITES. 
 
 40. Either. \. = one or the other, enter (see 48, 1), 
 ber etne [toon beiben] : 
 
 Give me either of your horses ©eben <3ie mtr ein8 (or ba& eine) 
 
 3t)rer [beiben] ^ferbe 
 
 2. =one as well as the other, jeber, beibe, jeber Don beiben, 
 jomolit ber etne ali [and)] ber cmbere: 
 
 I shall be contented with 3d) bin mit iebem toon beiben ju» 
 
 either friebett 
 
 On either side stood trees %u] beiben @eiten ftanben 23anme 
 
 In either case 3n beiben fatten 
 
 3. Not . . . either, neither, leiner toon betben, toeber ber 
 
 etne nod) ber anbere : 
 
 I do not know either of these 3d) fenne feinen biefer [beiben] 
 men Sftanner, or roeber ben etnen nod) 
 
 ben anberen biefer banner 
 
 4. For the adverbs either and neither, see 164 and 177. 
 
 41. Few. SBentge is inflected like ber : 
 Few people SSentge £eute 
 
 With few soldiers 2Jttt roenigen ©olbaten 
 
 The indefinite article cannot be used before toentge 
 (see 11) : 
 
 With a few shillings 2Jftt toenigen @d)ittingen 
 
 Occasionally, euttge faentge some few is used. 
 
 42. Less. SBeniger, whether used as comparative of 
 IDenig little, or of tveniQC few, remains uninflected: 
 
 Berlin has fewer inhabitants Berlin Ijat toentger (5intool)ner aid 
 than Paris $ari« 
 
 43. Little. 1. = small, adj. ffein: 
 
 A little girl (Sin fleineS Sftabdjen 
 
INDEFINITES. 25 
 
 2. = a small quantity, wenig, usually uninflected : 
 I have but little money 3d) Ijabe nitv nienig ©etb 
 
 Never inflect ein toenig a little : 
 
 With a little wine 9fttt ein toenig 5D3ein 
 
 44. Many. Ordinarily, t)tetc : 
 
 Many persons 33iele 2ftenfd)en 
 
 In the singular, mcmd) is used in the sense of many a ; 
 it may be followed by ein, in which case it must remain 
 uninflected (see 12) ; or ein may be omitted, in which case 
 tnancf) is more commonly inflected like ber : 
 
 Many a fine horse Wland) ein fdjoneS $ferb, or ma\u 
 
 d)e8 fdjone $ferb, or maud) fcfyones 
 <Pferb 
 
 In the plural, mcutd) is inflected like ber; it then means 
 a number of, implying less than t)tete : 
 
 A number of scholars have 2Jtond)e (Mefyrte Ijaben bte 9ftd)ttg* 
 doubted the truth of this feit biefer £f)eorie begroeifelt 
 theory 
 
 45. More. 1. 9ftet)r, uninflected: 
 
 More courage Sftefyr 2Jhit 
 
 With more ships Wlit metjr @d)tffen 
 
 2. One more— another, nod) ein : 
 
 Give me one more slice of bread ©ieb tnir nod) ein ©tiicf 33rot 
 Two more ; many more $ftod) groei ; nod) oielc 
 
 But in comparisons and in negative sentences, rnehr 
 should be used : 
 
 He had two more ships than (£r fyatte groei <Sd)iffe tttefjr al8 fein 
 
 his enemy ^einb 
 
 Many more ; much more SSiclc meljr; Did mefjr 
 
26 INDEFINITES. 
 
 Also in negative sentences : 
 
 I do not wish any more bread 3d) tt)iinfd)e fetn 23rot meljr \ r 
 
 46. Much. SSiel is commonly uninflected; it may, 
 however, be inflected like ber, and should be so inflected 
 when used in the sense of many hinds of: 
 
 You drink too much water 2)u tvittfft gu Dtel 2Baffer 
 
 We had too much rain 2Bir fatten %\\ Diet $egen 
 
 With much patience 9Jftt triel ©ebutb 
 
 Many kinds of wine grow bet- SBieler 2Bem ttrirb mit bem filter 
 ter with age beffer 
 
 (See the adverb much, 176.) 
 
 Neither. See 40, 3. 
 
 47. No, none. 1. Sein, inflected like em (see 48, 1): 
 
 Is there no letter for me? None 3ft fetn 23rief fiir mid) ba? Reiner 
 
 2. Not any, not a when equal to no should also be 
 rendered by fetn : 
 
 I have not slept in a (or any) ©eit fed)8 Sftonaten fyabe id) in !ei* 
 
 bed for six months nem SBette gefd)tafeii 
 But 
 
 Did you not receive a letter §aben ©ie nid)t einen SBrief uon 
 
 from him ? (6Ae speaker has iljm bef ommen ? 
 in mind a certain letter) 
 
 Nobody. Sftiemanb, inflected like jemanb (see 52). 
 Nothing. 9?td)t» r uninflected (see 17, 2 a.). 
 Nowhere. SfttrcjenbS. 
 
 48. One. 1. The numeral adjective em is identical 
 with the indefinite article, hence its forms are in the 
 nominative masc. ettt, fern, cittf, neut. ettt. When used 
 pronominally (i. e. without a noun), or as a pure numeral, 
 its forms are masc. ettter, fem. etlte, neut. etttS : 
 
INDEFINITES. 27 
 
 One friend ; a friend (Sin greunb 
 
 One of my friends Cnner tneiner greunbe 
 
 One horse ; a horse Sin^Pferb 
 
 In the year four hundred and 3m 3al)re trierfyunbert unb einS 
 one 
 
 2. One, preceded by an adjective should be left un- 
 translated ; the distinctive endings of the adjective make 
 it unnecessary : 
 
 This one — that one Sttefer — jener 
 
 A new house was built on the (gin neueS §cm§ nntrbe auf berfelben 
 
 same spot where the old one ©telle gebaut, too ba% alte ge- 
 
 had stood ftanben l)atte 
 
 The only one 2)er (bte, ba§) einjige 
 
 3. SRan is used in the nominative as an indefinite pro- 
 noun in the sense of one, and also especially in many 
 cases in which the passive is used in English (see 94) : 
 
 One thinks or it is thought 2Jton gfaubt 
 
 In the other cases eincr (see 48, 1) should be used. 
 
 49. Other. 1. 9Inbcr, inflected like an ordinary ad- 
 jective ; the indefinite article is never attached to it : 
 
 The other party 2)ie anbere ^artei 
 
 In another direction 3n eiiter anberen 9ftd)tung 
 
 Some . . . others 2>ie eineu . . . bie anberen, or etnige 
 
 . . . anbere 
 Some ... or other 2)er eine ober anbere, or irgenb ein 
 
 2. In expressions like one after another the definite 
 
 article may be used before ein and should be used before 
 
 anber : 
 
 The four brothers died one 2)te toier S3riiber ftarben einer (or ber 
 after another eine) nad) bent anberen 
 
 3. The reciprocal one another, each other is to be ren- 
 dered by etnauber or by the reflexive pronouns ; see 30, 5. 
 
28 INDEFINITES. 
 
 In the sense of one more, nod) ein should be used (see 
 45,2): 
 
 Give me another slice of bread ©tb mir nod) ctn ©tiicf SBrot 
 
 50. Same. Unless the article is contracted with a pre- 
 ceding preposition, it is written with the various forms of 
 fetb in one word : 
 
 On the same day $m fetben Xage 
 
 In the same direction 3n berfelben $id)tung 
 
 With the same right 9fttt bemjelben Wtfytt 
 
 a. S>erfel6e is used more often than the English the same 
 as a substitute for a personal pronoun, to avoid repetition 
 or confusion. For an example see 187. 
 
 51. Several. (Stntge, or mefjrere, inflected regularly. 
 Neither can take the definite article ; the several may be 
 rendered by bie berfcfytebenen. 
 
 52. Some. 1. = a small quantity, tin toenig, or etttm3: 
 Please get me some water 93itte tyolen @ie mir em roenig (or 
 
 etroa*) SBaffcr 
 
 2. — one, a, ein f or, more emphatically, irgenb ein: 
 
 Some Frenchman mnst have (Sin (or irgenb ein) graitgofe imifi 
 painted this picture biefe§ 33Ub gcmalt fyaben 
 
 Somebody, some one. Semanb (gen. -c8, dat. and ace. 
 uninflected, or -cm, -Cit) f or, more emphatically, irgenb 
 jemanb. 
 
 Something. ©ttt)a§, (see 17, 2 a. and 84), or, more em- 
 phatically, irgenb tttocS. 
 Sometime. (Sinmat. 
 
 3. = a few, several, etntge, mefjrere ; ein paar : 
 
INDEFINITES. 29 
 
 Please get me some books to SBitte fyoten ©ie mir einige {or eiu 
 read paav) S8ilcf)er mm £efen 
 
 There -were some Frenchmen (58 roaren einige granjojen im £ote( 
 at the hotel 
 
 Some . . . others (£mtge . . . anbere, or tie einen . . . 
 
 bie onberen 
 
 Sometimes. Sftandjmaf. 
 
 4. = about, mtgefafjr: 
 
 There were some thirteen or (£8 toaren imgefafjr bret$efm ober 
 fourteen Frenchmen at the toieqeljn granjofen im §ote( 
 
 hotel 
 But 
 
 Some hundreds of Frenchmen (Sinige t)imbert gran^ofen 
 
 53. Such. 1. ©old) is inflected like an ordinary ad- 
 jective, but when it precedes another adjective, it may 
 remain uninflected, and when it precedes the indefinite 
 article (for unlike the English such it may also follow it, 
 see 12), it must remain uninflected : 
 
 Such nonsense ©otcfyer Unfmn 
 
 Such people <2o!d)e i*eute 
 
 Such good news ©otdje {or fold)) gute 9?ad)rtd)ten 
 
 Such a book ©old) em {or eiu fold) eg) 23ud) 
 
 2. Before the indefinite article or before an adjective, jo 
 may be used in place of fold) : 
 
 Such a poem <So em ©ebtdjt 
 
 Such a great man @o em groger SJtemt, or em fo grofjir 
 
 STOatm 
 Such good news 8o gute ^adjridfteit 
 
 (See 12). 
 
30 NOMINATIVE. 
 
 Bumbers anfc Cases* 
 
 SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 
 
 54. If each one of several subjects of a kind stands in 
 the same general and special relation toward one, and 
 only one, of a like number of objects also of a kind, the 
 object is generally put, distributively, in the singular, 
 while the subject is put, collectively, in the plural: 
 
 The soldiers presented arms 2)ie Ootbaten prafenttrteu ba8 ©e* 
 
 tt>el)r {each one only one rifle or 
 sword) 
 
 Many men lost their lives $iele Sftenfdjett Derloreu ba% (see 5) 
 
 £ebett 
 
 All took off their hats Wt nafymen ben §ut ab 
 
 We turned our backs on him 2Bir fefyrten ifym ben Sftiitfen gu 
 
 55. In expressing aggregate measurement, masculine 
 and neuter nouns are put in the singular, feminine nouns, 
 except SDiarf mark, in the plural : 
 
 This room is fifteen feet long 2)iefe« 3tnimer ift fiinfge^n ftug tang 
 
 and thirteen feet six inches unb bretgefyrt gug fed)$ 3°^ brcit 
 wide 
 
 I need ten pounds of flour 3d) braudje gefyn $funb 2ftel)l 
 
 In the German army a com- 3m beutfdjen §eeve t}<\t eine Com- 
 pany has two hundred and pagnie groetfyimbert unb futtfgtg 
 fifty men %Ra\m 
 
 This book costs six marks £iefe§ SBud) foftet fed)§ Sftarf 
 But 
 
 We marched twenty miles Sir mavfdjierten gtt>an$ig SDtalen 
 
 farther (/em.) roeiter 
 
 Similarly, in expressing the time of day, Uf)r remains 
 unvaried : 
 
 At ten o'clock Um 3ef)n UI)r; see 153, 6. 
 
 NOMINATIVE. 
 
 56. The nominative is used 1) to express the subject : 
 The bird sings 2)er SBogel fingt 
 
GENITIVE. 31 
 
 2. In the predicate with neuter verbs and with the 
 passive of verbs which take two accusatives in the active 
 (see 75) : 
 
 He became an excellent scholar C£r nwrbe etn DorjiigUdjer ©elcljrter 
 Maximilian I. was called the ^ajrtmilian bcr Gh'fte rourbe bcr 
 last knight lefcte fitter gcnamtt 
 
 a. After tocrben in the sense of he changed into, the con- 
 struction explained in 76, 1 should be used : 
 
 The swan became a beautiful Ter ©djroan ttntrbe ^n t\\[tx fcf)onen 
 maiden 3»ungfrau 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 57. The German genitive represents 1) the English 
 
 possessive : 
 
 My father's house 2fteine§ Waters §au8 
 
 2. Many of the relations expressed in English by the 
 preposition of: 
 
 The house of my father 2)a8 #au8 meine§ Waters 
 
 The king of the country 2)er $onig be8 £anbe8 
 
 The works of Shakespeare 3)ie SBerfe ©tjafefoeare'S 
 
 Many of his friends SSiele feiner greunbe 
 
 The singing of the birds £)er ©efcmg ber $ogel 
 
 The singing of these songs 2)a8 ©ingen btefer £ieber 
 
 58. Ordinarily, only genitives of proper names, and, 
 much less frequently, such of nouns denoting persons, are 
 placed before the governing noun ; in that case, as in Eng- 
 lish, the governing noun has no article : 
 
 Charles* father $arl8 $ater 
 
 This girl's mother 2)iefe8 SftabdjenS Gutter, or, more 
 
 commonly, bte gutter biefeS 
 
 2ftabdjcn8 
 
 59. The following uses of of require special atten- 
 tion: 
 
32 GENITIVE. 
 
 1. In formulae of rank or title, t)on is used : 
 
 The king of England 2)er $ bnig oon ©ngtanb 
 
 The mayor of Berlin 2)er SBiirgcrmeiftcv oon ^Berlin 
 
 2. A proper name is never subordinated to a generic 
 
 term, but is placed in apposition : 
 
 The city of Rome 2)ie @tabt $om 
 
 He received the name of Alex- ©r ertjielt ben 9?amen SHeranber 
 ander 
 
 3. The genitive may be used to denote a quality or 
 
 characteristic : 
 
 An American of German de- ©in toerifaner bentfdjer St&fimft 
 scent 
 
 A few such genitives are common in the predicate, after 
 
 neuter verbs, and one or two are used adverbially : 
 
 They were all of one opinion ©ie maren alle ciner Hnjtdjt, einer 
 
 9fteinung, eine§ ©tnnes 
 We were of good cheer, in good 2£ir roaren gnter SDinge, guter 
 
 humour 2anne 
 
 He had to return without hav- ©r mnfete nnoerridjtetcr ©adje (or 
 
 ing accomplished anything 2)tnge) gnriidfeljren 
 
 4. But more often, a quality or characteristic is expres- 
 sed by fcon with the dative; and to express material, either 
 Don or ctu<3 should be used: 
 
 A knife of the finest steel ©in Sfteffer t>om fetnften ©tat)Ie 
 
 A piece of the proper length (Sin ®tiicf oon ber rid) tig en £cinge 
 
 The jeweller made a little box $>er ©olbfdjmieb mad)te cin J? aftdjen 
 of ebony and silver cm$ ©benl)ol$ nnb @ilber 
 
 a. From most of the nouns denoting material, adjectives 
 are derived which may be used in place of the noun pre- 
 ceded by Don: 
 
 A shield of silver ©in filberner ©djitb 
 
 A dress of black silk ©in jd)tt)argfeibene8 $letb 
 
GENITIVE. 
 
 33 
 
 5. To denote origin from, or connection with, uon or 
 au$ should be used : 
 
 He came of a good family 
 
 Sr ftcunmte an8 gnter (see 8) ga* 
 
 milie 
 ^rofeffor §efmt)ot£ au8 Berlin ift 
 
 angefommen 
 
 ^rofeffou $etml)olfc in ^Berlin f)at 
 cine hridjttge Sntbecfnng gemadjt 
 
 Professor Helmholtz of Berlin 
 has arrived 
 But 
 
 Professor Helmholtz of Berlin 
 has made an important dis- 
 covery 
 
 r 6. After a noun denoting measure, definite or indefinite, 
 the thing measured does not generally stand in the geni- 
 tive, but remains uninflected : % 
 
 A pound of gold (Sin *Pfunb ©olb 
 
 A piece of glass (Sin @tiicf ©taS 
 
 A bottle of wine Sine Stefdje 2Bein 
 
 A large number of people Sine 9ftenge 2eute 
 
 a. If the second noun be preceded by an adjective, it 
 may, but need not, be put in the genitive : 
 
 A pound of fine gold Sin s J3fimb feinen ©otbe§ 
 
 7. In familiar discourse, Don with the dative is quite 
 
 frequently used for the genitive : 
 
 Many of our soldiers SBiele toon nnferen ©otbaten, for the 
 
 more dignified oiete unferer <®oU 
 baten 
 S)te fdjonfte Don alien (see 23) 
 
 2>ie Umgegenb con Berlin 
 Sin greunb Don tnetnem $ater, for 
 the more dignified ein greunb 
 meineS SaterS 
 
 a. This must be done when, for rhetorical reasons, the 
 genitive is to be separated from the governing noun or 
 pronoun : 
 
 The most beautiful woman of 
 
 all 
 The vicinity of Berlin 
 A friend of my father's {see 
 
 below, 13) 
 
34 GENITIVE. 
 
 Of his friends some believed $on feinen greunben ijielten tf)n 
 him innocent, some guilty etnige fiir fd|itlbig, anbere fie un= 
 
 fdjulbig. 
 
 b. As a rule, fcon with the dative should be substituted 
 
 for a partitive genitive of a relative pronoun : 
 
 I met ten soldiers, five of whom 3d) begegnete $el)n @olbaten, t»on 
 were wounded benen fiinf (34, 2 a) tterronnbet 
 
 roaren 
 But 
 I met a company of soldiers 3d) begegnete etne (Sompagnie @ol-- 
 whose captain was wounded baten, (see above, 6) beren (pos- 
 
 sessive genitive) £>auptmanit tter= 
 ttmnbet roar 
 
 8. In dates the name of the month follows the ordinal 
 numeral without sign of inflection : 
 
 The fourth of July £)cr merte 3nii 
 
 (See 80, 1). 
 
 9. The genitives of personal pronouns should not be 
 used except when dependent on certain verbs and adjec- 
 tives requiring a genitive for an object (61, 62) ; otherwise 
 uon should be used : 
 
 I remember you 3d) erinnere mid) eurer 
 
 But 
 
 One of you (Shier r»on end) 
 
 Some of them (Stnige Don ifynen 
 
 10. Instead of a genitive, Don with the dative, or some 
 other construction, should be used, whenever neither the 
 ending of the word itself, nor that of any qualifying word 
 before it, would mark it as a genitive : 
 
 The children of men who have 2)ie $inber uon 2JJatmern bie fiir tin* 
 
 died for their country SSaterlanb geftorben ftnb 
 
 I remember him 3d) erinnere mid) fetner 
 
 But 
 
 I remember nothing 3d) erinnere mid) an nid)t8 
 
GENITIVE. 35 
 
 11. The construction of one genitive depending on an- 
 other should ordinarily be avoided. This may be done in 
 various ways, especially by the use of Don, with the dative, 
 or by that of an adjective : 
 
 The rumor of Macbeth's wicked 2)a8 ©enid)t Don 2Kacbetf)3 bofen 
 deeds Xfjaten, rather than ba$ ©eriidjt 
 
 ber bofen £b,aten ^JJtecbettjS 
 
 Every part of the king's do- 3eber ^Begirt be8 foniglidjen ©e* 
 minion bteteS 
 
 12. Very often a compound noun may be used instead 
 of a noun with a dependent genitive : 
 
 The minister of war 2)er $rieggminifter 
 
 A manufacturer of cigars Sin Qugarrenfabrifcuit 
 
 13. The so-called "double possessive" should be ren- 
 dered by the simple genitive : 
 
 A friend of my father's (Sin grcunb meineg SBaterS 
 
 A friend of mine (Sin greunb Don mir (see above, 9), 
 
 or, better, einer (see 48, 1) meinev 
 
 greunbe 
 
 14. Whenever of is synonymous with about, it should 
 be translated by uon (with dat.) or iiber (with ace.) : 
 
 We spoke of him 2Bir fprad)en Don tfjtn, or iiber ifjn 
 
 This chapter treats of Frede- £)iefe8 $ctpttel fyanbelt Oon grtebrid) 
 rick the Great bem ©rogen 
 
 60. The genitive is used to denote time, generally more 
 or less indefinite, in certain fixed expressions : 
 
 In the morning [2)e«] 2Jtorgen8 
 
 In the evening [3)e£] 3Ibenb§ 
 
 At night [3)e$] 9hd)t8 (irregular, from bie 
 
 Madjt) 
 On Sunday [Def| ©onntagS ; similarly [be$] 
 
 2ftontag«, etc. 
 
36 GENITIVE. 
 
 One (or some) day (SineS £age3 ; similarly one fore- 
 
 noon, etneS SBormittagS, etc. 
 One (or some) morning (SineS SftorgenS 
 
 One (or some) evening (SineS 2lbenb8 
 
 a. Instead of this genitive a suitable preposition may, 
 of course, be used : 
 
 In the morning 31m SRorgen 
 
 In the evening s #m 3lbenb 
 
 In the night 3n ber 9£ad)t 
 
 &. Definite time is expressed by the accusative or by a 
 
 preposition (see 80, 1) : 
 
 On the evening before his de- 2)en (or am) 2tbenb Dor feiner %h» 
 parture reife 
 
 61. A number of adjectives take a genitive as a comple- 
 ment : he was worthy of this distinction er Wax biefer 2lu3~ 
 jeirf)mtng Umrbtg. The most common of them are : 
 
 bebiirftig needing funbig knowing 
 
 bemuftt conscious ntiibe tired 
 
 eingebenf mindful, also tmetn* fatt sated; tired 
 
 gebenf jdjulbig guilty, also unftfjulbig 
 
 fafjig, capable, also unfal}ig fidjev sure 
 
 frol) glad teittjaftig partaking 
 
 geraaljr aware t)erbcid)tig suspected 
 
 getotj} sure tterlnfiig losing 
 
 geroofyit accustomed uotl full 
 
 tnnc (properly an adverb) aware, roert worthy, also unroert 
 
 particularly inne roerben be- toitrbig worthy, also unroiirbig 
 
 come aware iibevbriifftg weary, disgusted 
 
 a. Some of these adjectives admit also of other con- 
 structions and these constructions must be used in the 
 cases stated 59, 10; see Appendix A. 
 
 62. A number of verbs take a genitive as an object. 
 
GENITIVE. 37 
 
 1. Some verbs take a genitive as a direct object ; most of 
 them also admit of other constructions (see Appendix B) 
 and these constructions must be used in the cases stated 
 59, 10. The most common of them are : 
 
 ad)tert heed gebenfen remember, mention 
 
 bcburfen need gentejjen enjoy 
 
 begefyren desire tjarren wait for 
 
 brand) en need Pffegen take care of 
 
 evmcuigeln be in want of fcbonen spare 
 ertoaf)neu mention 
 
 Thus: 
 
 He remembered the services (Sr gebadhte ber 2)ienfie f bie ber grofic 
 
 which the great statesman ©taatsmann feinem SBaterlanbe 
 
 had rendered to his country geleiftet fyatte 
 
 This passage requires some 2>iefe ©telle bebarf roeiterer (Srfla= 
 
 further explanation rung 
 
 Spare him @d)one feiner 
 
 2. As in English, a number of verbs take a genitive in 
 
 addition to a direct object in the accusative. Usually 
 
 the direct object is a person, the remoter object, in the 
 
 genitive, a thing : 
 
 They convicted him of murder <2>te iiberfiibrten if)it be§ 9ftorbe8 
 I assured him of my personal 3d) t>erfid)ertc it)n metner perfon* 
 respect Udjen ©odjadjtung 
 
 In the passive construction, the accusative, of course, 
 
 becomes a nominative, the genitive remains : 
 
 He was deprived of his in- (£r rourbe feineS (SinfhiffeS beraubt 
 fluence 
 
 Such verbs are those of accusing, convicting, convincing, 
 
 depriving, admonishing, assuring and a few others : 
 
 anffagen accuse entbinben release 
 
 berauben deprive enttjeben deliver, remove 
 
 befdjulbigen accuse entlaffen discharge, dismiss 
 
38 I)ATIVE. 
 
 entfefeen depose iiberfyeben relieve 
 
 enttoofjnen disaccustom toerftdjent assure 
 
 freijprecfjrn, loSfpredjen acquit anirbigert consider worthy 
 
 iiberfufyren, iiberraeifen convict getfyen accuse 
 
 3. A number of verbs, reflexive in German, but corres- 
 ponding in meaning to English common transitive or neu- 
 ter verbs, may take a genitive as an object in addition to 
 their regular reflexive object: 
 
 I remember the passage per- 3d) ertttnere mid) bcr ©telle ganj 
 
 fectly well genait 
 
 He was ashamed of his conduct (£r fdjdmte fid) fetneS 23etragen$ 
 
 He boasted of his knowledge (Sr riitjmte fid) fritter tfemttnig be« 
 
 of French grattgofifdjeu 
 
 Such verbs are, among others : 
 
 ftd) amteljnten take an interest in ftd) entfmnen remember 
 
 ftdj bebtenen make use ftd) erbarmen take pity on 
 
 fid) befletftigen (befletften) apply ftd) erimtent remember 
 
 one's self fid) erroefyren resist 
 
 ftd) bentadjtigen take possession fid) erfreuen be glad, enjoy 
 
 ftd) entau&ertt get rid ftd) freuen rejoice 
 
 fid) etttljaUen abstain fid) riifjmen boast 
 
 ftd) enttebigen get rid fid) fdjdmen be ashamed 
 
 fid) eutfdjlagett part with ftd) roetgent refuse 
 
 a. Some of these verbs admit also of other constructions 
 (see Appendix B), and these constructions must be used 
 in the cases stated 59, 10. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 63, The indirect object is expressed in English either 
 by the simple objective case : he gave the driver the 
 money ; or, whenever it does not immediately follow the 
 verb, by means of the preposition to : he gave the money 
 to tM driver. In German the dative is used in either 
 case, as its distinctive endings allow it to take any posi- 
 
DATIVE. 39 
 
 tion in the sentence without injury to the sense : er gab 
 bent jiutjdjcr ba$ @elb, or er gab ba$ ©elb bem Sutler. 
 
 a. Be careful not to mistake the indirect object for the 
 direct or vice versa. In doubtful cases try to put to be- 
 fore the object ; if you can do so, either by a re-arrange- 
 ment of the sentence or otherwise, it is the indirect ob- 
 ject and should be translated by the German dative. 
 
 b. Whenever it is possible to dispense with to, either by 
 a re-arrangement of the sentence or otherwise, the simple 
 dative should be used in German : 
 
 He lent his pencil to his neigh- (£r liel) feinem 9iad)baru feincn 
 
 bor = he lent his neighbor 93feiftift 
 
 his pencil 
 
 He showed his house to his (Sr geigte feinen neuen greunben feiu 
 
 new friends = he showed his §au§ 
 
 new friends his house 
 
 The king gave [to] him his 2>er $onig gab ifym feine $rone unb 
 
 crown and his sword jein <&d}mxt 
 
 c. Whenever it is not possible to dispense with to, 
 either by a re-arrangement of the sentence, or otherwise, 
 a suitable preposition should be used ; see 199. 
 
 64. In English the indirect object of an active verb is 
 often made the subject of a passive verb ; this cannot be 
 c(one in German and the dative must remain a dative : 
 
 The king gave him permission Der $omg gab tfym (Srlaubuife = 
 
 = he was given permission iljm rourbe t)om ,f om'g (Srtanbuig 
 
 by the king gcgeben 
 
 He did as the general had com- Sr ttjat ttrie iljm ber ©enerat befof)* 
 
 manded him = he did as he leu fyatte = er tt)at Wit ifmt noit 
 
 had been commanded by the bem ©eneral befofyfen ttiorben Wax 
 general 
 
 He was told (§3 ttmvbe iljm gefagt 
 
 As I was told Sie ntir gefagt rourbe (29, 1 d). 
 
40 DATIVE. 
 
 65. The following verbs, corresponding to English tran- 
 sitive verbs (83), are regarded as intransitive in German 
 and take, therefore, a dative as their sole object : 
 
 cmtttJortrn answer gefaflnt please 
 
 b:gegncn meet fyelfcn help 
 
 bcmfcn thank nal)en {also jtdj nafyevn) approach 
 
 bicnen serve ratett advise 
 
 broken threaten fdjaben injure 
 
 fcljleit be wanting, ail - fdjmeidjeln flatter 
 
 fo!gen follow - trouen trust - 
 
 gefyordjen obey trouen defy 
 
 66. A number of verbs take a dative of the person and 
 an accusative of the thing, the latter often a neuter pro- 
 noun: 
 
 He has given me permission (£r fyat e§ mir erlaubt, lit. 'he has 
 
 permitted it to me ' 
 
 The accusative may be replaced by an infinitive with 
 
 gil, or by a subordinate clause introduced by bctfc : 
 
 He commanded him to be (gr gebot (befarjl) ifjm ©tilljdjtneigen, 
 silent or fttll gu fd)tt>etgen, or baft cr ftill 
 
 fdjtneigen folle 
 Such verbs are : 
 
 befefylen, gebteten order, bctnfen, cerbcmfen he indebted 
 
 for, erlauben permit, fcergeben, uerjeifjen pardon, forgive. 
 
 67. The dative may be used after verbs denoting deliv- 
 ering, sending, transmitting, writing, etc., but a preposi- 
 tion is often used for greater emphasis : 
 
 The courier delivered the des- 3)er Courier iibergab bie 2>epefdjen 
 patches to the ambassador bem ©efanbten, or an ben (Sefanb* 
 
 ten; see 199> 1 b. 
 
 68. After fagen say, 511, with the dative, should be used 
 when the words actually said are quoted or referred to ; 
 
DATIVE. 
 
 41 
 
 when merely their general meaning is of importance, the 
 simple dative is sufficient : 
 
 (§r fagte git feinem 33ruber: „idj ttuH 
 anftatt beiner f)ingel)en" 
 
 (Sr fagte tt)m, er roiirbe fytngeljen 
 
 3d) fyaht biefe SBorte nie gu ifym ge* 
 fagt 
 
 3d) l)abe e« bir gefagt 
 
 He said to his brother : "I will 
 
 go in your place" 
 He said to him he would go 
 I have never said these words 
 
 to him 
 I told you so 
 
 69. After verbs of removal the dative is used to express 
 
 the English from : 
 
 He stole my watch from me dx flaf)l tntr bie (mcine) lU)r 
 
 The policeman took the pistol 2>er ^otigift ncu)m U)m bie ^tftofe 
 away from him to eg . 
 
 70. The dative is used after many verbs compounded 
 
 (see 130) with ctt>, an, auf, au£, bei, ein, entgegen, nadj, 
 
 unter, uor, timber, jit and the inseparable prefix ent~ : 
 
 Let us go to meet him ?agt un§ ifjm entgegengefyen 
 
 The ambassador submitted the 3)er ©efanbte unterbreitetc btn 33e- 
 
 report to the king 
 
 The youth resisted all tempta- 
 tions 
 
 I have complied with his wish 
 
 ridjt bem $omge 
 3)er 3ungUng hnberftcmb alien SSer- 
 
 fudjungen 
 34 bin feinem SBnnfdje nad)gefom* 
 men N 
 See Appendix B. 
 
 71. The dative often takes the place of an English pos- 
 sessive genitive or possessive adjective qualifying a noun 
 which is then usually preceded by the definite article : 
 
 He has broken his arm 
 
 He hurled a stone at the head 
 
 of his enemy 
 He threw himself at the feet 
 
 of the angel 
 The town was decorated in his 
 
 honor 
 
 dx Ijctt ftd) ben $rm gebrodjen 
 
 (£v ujctrf feinem getnbe einen (Stein 
 
 an ben $opf 
 dx marf ftd) bem (Snget gu giifjen 
 
 3)te @tabt Wax if)tn gu ©Ijien ge- 
 fdjmiicft 
 
x 
 
 42 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 72. The dative may often be used after a transitive 
 verb accompanied by a direct object, to express the Eng- 
 lish for (" dative of interest ") : 
 
 He bought a horse for his son (£r faufte feinem ©o^ne em $ferb 
 
 a. This dative ("of interest"), particularly of personal 
 pronouns, is often used with weakened force when it is 
 not absolutely essential to the context : 
 
 I have bought a house 3d) fyctbe mir em §cmS gefcmft 
 
 The king took a wife 3)er $ onig nafym fief) erne grau 
 
 73. The dative is used with many adjectives the English 
 
 equivalents of which are followed by to (see Appendix A; 
 
 also 231, 2 and 3) : 
 
 He remained faithful to her (§r blieb tf)r treu 
 
 The weather was favorable to 2)a8 Setter mar unferem Untentetj* 
 our undertaking men giinftig 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 74. The accusative is used, as in English, to express the 
 direct object : 
 
 She wrote a letter ©ie fdjrieb eiuen 53rief 
 
 75. The verbs of naming, calling, etc., take two accusa- 
 tives in the active and two nominatives in the passive 
 voice : 
 
 He called me his friend (£r naunte mid) f eiuen greunb; 
 
 see 56, 2 
 
 76. 1. The verbs of choosing, electing, appointing, etc., 
 which in English take two accusatives, take only one in 
 German, namely the direct object; the other accusative 
 (the factitive predicate) must be translated by the prepo- 
 sition ju with the noun in the dative, preceded in the 
 
ACCUSATIVE. 43 
 
 singular by the article, which is always contracted with 
 the preposition, or by a possessive adjective : 
 
 The people elected him presi- £>a8 SBolf ermcUjlte il)n gum $rafU 
 
 dent benteit 
 
 The king appointed him his 2)er $ bnig erucmnte ifyn gu feinem 
 
 counsellor Sftatgeber 
 
 Similarly in the passive : 
 
 He was chosen leader Gsr murbe gum giit)rcr ermafylt 
 
 2. With the verbs of considering, declaring, etc., the 
 
 factitive predicate is expressed by means of a (3 or fur 
 
 with the accusative : 
 
 He regarded it as a disgrace <£x fal) e« aU (or fiir) eiuc @d)anbe 
 
 an 
 
 In the passive, the nominative is used after ate, the 
 
 accusative after fur : 
 
 He was considered an honest (£r umrbe al$ eiu et)rlid)er 9ftann (or 
 man fiir einen eljrlidjen 2ftann) ange* 
 
 fefyett 
 
 77. Setjren teach, takes two accusatives : 
 
 He taught me French Grr lefyrte mid) granjbftfdj 
 
 78. A few adjectives which formerly took a genitive, 
 
 may now take an accusative, more commonly that of a 
 
 pronoun : 
 
 I have had enough of it 3d) bin e8 (originally a genitive) 
 
 (art 
 I am contented with it 3d) bin e8 gufrteben 
 
 I am tired of this work 3d) bin btefe Arbeit miibe 
 
 79. 1. The accusative is used to denote measure : 
 
 The piece of steel was one foot 3>a§ ©tiicf @tat)l {see 59, 6) mar 
 and six inches long and one einen ^n6 unb fed)8 5°^ (see 55) 
 
 inch thick lang unb einen 3°H Met 
 
44 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The ticket cost one thaler 2)a8 billet foftete einen Scaler 
 
 That fellow is not worth 2)er $erl ift feinen ©djug ^ufocr 
 powder and shot tnert 
 
 2. Similarly the accusative is often used after verbs of 
 motion to denote the distance or the extent of the motion, 
 or the way, particularly when the verb is qualified by one 
 of the adverbs batjer, batjin, enttang along, Ijerab, fytnab 
 down, I)crauf r Ijinauf up, fjerunter, Jjhuinter down, rjtnburclj 
 through (130—134) : 
 
 He had to ride five miles be- (Sr mufete fiinf 3fteiieu reiteit, el)e er 
 
 fore he met any one irgenb jemanbem begegnete 
 
 We marched along a tedious Sir $ogen ettte langttetltge (Strafie 
 
 road bafyin 
 
 The stone rolled down the £)er ©tern rollte ben 33erg fyinab 
 
 mountain 
 
 He could hardly ascend the (Sr fonitte faum Me Xxtppe fytnauf* 
 
 stairs ftetgen 
 
 a. Sometimes, a verb of motion may be understood, 
 
 without being expressed : 
 
 Along the road we noticed 2>en 2Beg enttang bemerften unr 
 many signs of the enemy's t»iete $ln$etd)en t>on ber glud)t be$ 
 flight getnbeS 
 
 80. 1. While more or less indefinite time may be ex- 
 pressed by the genitive (see 60), definite time is generally 
 expressed by the accusative ; instead of the accusative, a 
 suitable preposition may often be used : 
 
 He was at my house this 2)tefen Sftorgen (or fyeute Sftorgenj 
 
 morning Wax er bei nttr 
 
 I shall go to Berlin next week, 9Md)fte 2Sod)e, ben erften SJccirg (or 
 the first of March am erften 9)?ar$) gefye id) nad) 
 
 Berlin 
 Cambridge, October 21, 1891 (£ambrtbge, ben 21. (pronounce tin* 
 
 unb^nangtgften) October 1891 ; 
 see 59, 6 
 
TRANSITIVES AND INTRANSITIVES. 45 
 
 2. Duration of time is also expressed by the accus- 
 ative (see 166, I, 6) : 
 
 He slept the whole night dx fd)Uef bte ganje 9?atf)t 
 
 We were on the ocean for five 2Bir roaren fitnf 2Bod)cn cmf ber 
 weeks ©ee 
 
 a. Such an accusative is often re-enforced by an adverb 
 
 following it : 
 
 He had eaten nothing for three (5r Ijatte brei £age lemg {or fjinbuvcf)) 
 days md)t8 gegeffen 
 
 81. The accusative is sometimes used absolutely, 
 when qualified by a past participle or by an adverbial 
 phrase : 
 
 He entered the room with his 2)ctt §ut in ber §anb trat er tn8 
 
 hat in his hand gimmer 
 
 At the table sat a man, his %m £tfcf)e fag ein SJcantt, ben $opf 
 head resting on his hands in bie §finbe geftufct 
 
 IDerbs, 
 
 f 
 
 82. A verb must agree in person and number with its 
 logical subject : 
 
 Three persons are standing in 2)rei ^erfonen ftcfyen t)or eurem 
 
 front of your house §aufe 
 
 There are three persons stand- (£$ fteljen (see 192, 3) brei ^erfonen 
 
 ing in front of your house Dor eurem §au[e 
 
 a. If the subject is a collective noun, the same rules 
 should be observed that apply to pronouns. See 26. 
 
 TRANSITIVES AND INTRANSITIVES. 
 
 83. The German, unlike the English, has only very 
 few verbs which may be used both transitively and in- 
 transitively, e. g., brenneu burn; as a rule, the two classes 
 
46 IMPERSONALS. 
 
 must be carefully kept apart : to watch, as an intransitive 
 verb, is umdjen, as a transitive, betoadjen. 
 
 a. The most important verbs that are intransitive in 
 German and correspond in meaning to English transitives 
 are given in 65. 
 
 b. An English intransitive verb which has no precise 
 intransitive equivalent in German, should be rendered by 
 the reflexive: 
 
 He turned round dx buefyte ftdj urn 
 
 c. The prefix 6e- may be prefixed to many intransitive 
 and some reflexive verbs to take the place of a preposition 
 like auf, ii6er, on, upon, about, etc., and thus change an in- 
 transitive into a transitive: ffagen moan, beflagen bemoan; 
 fdjretben write, 6efc£)rei6en write on or about, describe; fid) 
 ttmubern wonder, 6ettmnbent (wonder at), admire. 
 
 IMPERSONALS. 
 
 84. A verb having for its subject the indefinite e3 
 (29, 2) is called an impersonal verb. Some verbs, by 
 virtue of their meanings, are more commonly used as im- 
 personate ; others may be used as personals or impersonals ; 
 others, again, are ordinarily personal. 
 
 1. The verbs expressing the most common phenomena 
 
 of nature are generally impersonal: it rains e3 regnet; 
 
 similarly : 
 
 blifeen lighten fdjneteu snow 
 
 bonnern thunder ftiirmen storm 
 
 tjagetn hail nieljen blow 
 
 2. A number of words admit of a personal or im- 
 personal construction without material difference in mean- 
 
IMPERSONALS. 47 
 
 ing; in the impersonal construction, however, the indefinite 
 q$ is generally omitted when any other element of the 
 sentence precedes the verb : 
 
 He was hungry ((£r mar fjungrig, or) er fyungerte, or 
 
 e8 fyungerte it)n, or itjn Ijungerte 
 
 I dreamed last night that he 3d) traumte le£te 9tad)t, baft er tot 
 was dead fei, or e8 traumte mir tc, or mir 
 
 traumte jc 
 
 a. Some of these verbs, when used as impersonals, take 
 
 an accusative as an object : 
 
 I am hungry (58 fjungert mid); see above 
 
 I am thirsty (58 biirftet mid) 
 
 I am cold (58 frier t mid) 
 
 I grieve (58 jammert mid) 
 
 I long for (58 geliiftet mid) {with gen. or with 
 
 nad) and dat.) 
 
 b. Others take a dative : 
 
 I am afraid of him (58 graut mir Dor ifmt; {rejieonvely ■, 
 
 id) graue mid) t»or ifym) 
 
 3. The indefinite e3 may be used to express the un- 
 known subject of any verb : 
 
 Something rustled among the (58 rafijctte in ben trocfenen 331at* 
 
 dry leaves, or there was a tern 
 
 rustling etc. 
 There is a knock, or somebody ($8 flopft 
 
 is knocking 
 
 In this case, e£ must be retained when some other 
 element of the sentence precedes the verb : 
 Suddenly there was a knock s J$loyid) ffopfte e8 
 
 4. Of intransitive verbs (including transitive verbs used 
 like intransitives, without a direct object) an impersonal 
 passive may be formed, expressing, without reference to 
 an agent, that a certain act is performed : 
 
48 AUXILIARIES. 
 
 There was playing and dan- (§8 ttmrbe gefpielt unb gefwtgen 
 
 cing 
 There was much laughter (S3 nntrbe Die! gefadjt 
 
 Much assistance was rendered (§8 nntrbe il)m Diet gefyolfen 
 
 [to] him 
 
 a. When any other element of the sentence precedes 
 
 the verb, e3 must be omitted : 
 
 Smoking is not permitted in (§8 barf in biefem 3intmer ntd)t Qe* 
 this room raud)t toerben, or in biejem j&ixa* 
 
 mer barf nid)t geraudjt tnerben 
 (See 29, 1 d) 
 
 AUXILIARIES. 
 
 85. The verb t£)Uit do should not be used as an 
 auxiliary, nor, unless accompanied by an object, as a 
 substitute for the principal verb : 
 
 Do you sing? No, I do not ©tngen@ie? -ftetn, id) ftnge ntdjt 
 
 I finished my work this morn- 3d) tjabe tjeuteSftorgen meine Arbeit 
 
 ing; did you, too? Yes, I ooEcubet; tjabcn ©ie e§ (see 29, 
 
 did 1 d) aud) getfyan? 3a, id) autf) 
 
 86. The auxiliaries fjctben, fein and toerbett are not used 
 in answers to questions or in emphatic affirmations, with- 
 out the important object, predicate or adverb previously 
 expressed or a word representing them : 
 
 Did you not have a copy of fatten ©ie nidjt em (Sremplar Don 
 
 Goethe's Faust with you? ©oetlje'S gcmft bei fidj? 3a, id) 
 
 Yes, I did Ijatte eing 
 
 Were you in Paris at that SSaren ©ic bamalS in *Pari$? 
 
 time? No, I was not Sftein, id) mar nid)t ba 
 
 He claims that I have not paid (Sr bcfjcmptet, bag id) bicje SRedjnung 
 
 this bill, but I have nod) ntdjt bejafyft l)abe ; id) tjabz 
 
 e3 aber bod) getfyan 
 
* 
 
 FUTURE AND CONDITIONAL. 49 
 
 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. 
 
 87. 1. The perfect and pluperfect tenses are formed by- 
 means of the auxiliary t)aben, as in English by means of 
 have : 
 
 I have read your letter 3d) fjabe 31jren SBrtef gelefen 
 
 It had snowed <S8 fjatte gefdjneit 
 
 2. But intransitive verbs, expressing motion from one 
 place to another, or transition from one condition to 
 another, usually take fctn as auxiliary, instead of fjabert : 
 
 He has arrived, landed, depart- (§r ift angefommen, gelanbet, abge» 
 
 ed, died retft, geftorben 
 
 He has slept (Sr fyat gefdjlafen 
 
 But 
 
 He has fallen asleep (§r ift eittflejdjlafen 
 
 a. Here belongs also gclingen turn out as desired, usually 
 translated by means of succeed : 
 
 The attempt was successful 2)er SBerfud) gelang 
 
 I have succeeded in it (§3 ift mir gelungen 
 
 The prisoner had succeeded in (£§ mar bent ©efangenen gelungen 
 opening the door bie £f)iir 311 offnen; see 128, 3 b. 
 
 Also mtgftngeti : 
 
 He has failed in the attempt Xer SBerfudj ift il)m migtungen 
 
 3. ©ctll be and btctbcit remain also take fetit as auxiliary, 
 
 instead of (jabcn : 
 
 I have already been there 3d) bin fdjon bagetuefen 
 
 He had remained at home (Sr mar 311 $au% gebltebeu t 
 
 f 
 
 FUTURE AND CONDITIONAL. ' 
 
 88. Never express the pure future or conditional by 
 foUen or toolkit; see 104 and 105, 
 
50 FUTURE AND CONDITIONAL. 
 
 89. 1. The future is expressed by the present of tuerben 
 
 and the present infinitive : 
 
 I shall come 3d) roerbe fommen 
 
 He will come (§r nrirb fommen 
 
 He will be sent away (Sr miib meggefdjicft merben 
 
 a. In indirect discourse (see 114-115) the conditional 
 (see 90, 1) may be used, instead of the future subjunctive : 
 
 He said that he would write (£r fagte, bafe er oft jdjretben roerbe, 
 
 often or nriirbe 
 
 I was told my request would Sftan fagte mir, meine 23ttte roerbe 
 
 be refused {or umrbe) mir abgefdjtagen roer- 
 
 ben 
 
 2. The future perfect is expressed by the same forms of 
 
 tuerben and the perfect infinitive : 
 
 He will then have finished his 3>ann nrirb er feine Arbeit beenbet 
 work fyaben 
 
 a. In indirect discourse (see 114-115) the conditional 
 perfect (see 90, 2) may be used, instead of the future per- 
 fect subjunctive : 
 
 He wrote that,by next Monday, (Sr fdjrieb, baft er ba§ 23nd) am nad) 
 he would have read the book ften Sftontag burdjgetefen tjaben 
 
 through roevbe, or roiirbe 
 
 90. 1. The conditional is expressed by the preterit 
 subjunctive of uierbcn and the infinitive : 
 
 He would go with us, if he (5r nriirbe nut uu8 gefyen, menn er 
 
 could fonnte 
 
 He would be sent away, if he (§r roiirbe fortgefd)icft roerben, tnemt 
 
 did it again er e8 nrieber t^dte 
 
 a. Instead of the conditional, the preterit subjunctive 
 
 may be used (see 117, 2) : 
 
 (§r gtnge mit mtS, instead oftx nriirbe mit nn« gefyen 
 
 (£r nmrbe fortgefd)icft, instead of er nriirbe fortgefdjicft rcerben 
 
PASSIVE. 51 
 
 2. The conditional perfect is expressed by the same 
 forms of ftetbett and the perfect infinitive: 
 
 He would have done it if he G?r roiirbe e« getfjan Ijaben, roenn er 
 
 had been able e« gefonnt t)citte 
 
 He would have been sent away (Sr roiirbe fortge)d)tcft toorben fetn, 
 
 if he had done it again tuenn er e8 uneber getljan Ijatte 
 
 a. Instead of the conditional perfect, the pluperfect 
 
 subjunctive may be used (see 117, 2) : 
 
 (£x fjtitte e$ getfjan, instead o/ev roiirbe c« getljan Ijaben 
 
 (Sr mare fortgefdjtcft roorben, instead of er nriirbe fortgefdjicft roorben fein 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 91. The passive is formed by means of the auxiliary 
 ttjerbcn and the past participle of the principal verb. The 
 auxiliary should stand in the same tense in which the 
 principal verb would stand in the active voice ; in doubtful 
 cases it is well, therefore, to change the construction into 
 the active, to ascertain what tense should be used. Thus : 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 Present. 
 He builds the house The house is [being] built by him 
 
 (Sr baut ba% §au« 2)a8 §au3 roirb toon itjm gebaut 
 
 Preterit. 
 He built the house The house was [being] built by him 
 
 (§r baute ba$ §au3 2)a8 §aug rourbe oon if)m gebaut 
 
 Perfect. 
 He has built the house . The house has been built by him 
 
 (Sr fyat ba$ $au% gebaut $a« §au8 ift toon if)tn gebaut 
 
 roorben 
 Pluperfect. 
 He had built the house The house had been built by him 
 
 (§r batte ba& §au3 gebaut 2>a8 $au% mar Don ifym gebaut 
 
 roorben 
 Future. 
 He will build the house The house will be built by him 
 
 (£r roirb ba8 §au§ bauen 2)a8 $au& roirb oon U)m gebaut 
 
 roerben 
 
52 PASSIVE. 
 
 Future Perfect. 
 He will have built the house The house will have been built by 
 
 him 
 (Srnrirbba8£an§ gebaut Ijaben 2)a§ §au8 roirb oott ifjm gebaut 
 
 luorbeit (etn 
 
 a. Notice that the forms is being built, was being built, 
 etc., are to be rendered by the simple passive : tturb gebaut, 
 umrbe gebaut, etc. ; see 124, 3 b. 
 
 92. As the meaning of Herbert is to become, the above 
 forms of the passive can only be used when a becoming 
 or, in other words, a change in condition, an occurrence, is 
 to be expressed. Whenever not so much the change in 
 condition, but rather the new condition itself is to be 
 emphasized, either as resulting from the change or, for its 
 own sake, as a permanent condition, then the auxiliary 
 feirt should be used, as in English to be : 
 
 Occurrence. Condition. 
 
 Fishes are caught in nets or He is caught (i. e., he has been 
 
 with hooks caught) 
 
 gtfdje roerben in c J?e§en ober nut <£v ift gefangen 
 
 2Ittge(f)afeu gefangen 
 
 The fire was extinguished by When the engine arrived, the fire 
 
 the occupants of the house was already extinguished 
 
 £)a§ geuer nmrbe Don ben 23e* 2U§ bte generfpri^e anfam, mar \>a% 
 
 rooljuern be8 §aufe§ getofdjt gener fdjon gelbfdjt 
 
 When we reached the ship, the When we reached the ship, the 
 
 sails were hoisted (= the sails were already hoisted 
 sailors hoisted the sails) 
 
 2U8 ttrir ba$ @djiff erretdjten, 2U8 onr ba% ©djiff erretdjten, toaren 
 
 rourben bie @egel aufge^ogen bte ®egel fdjon aufgejogen 
 
 She was received by her maid- She was beautiful and was dressed 
 ens and dressed in magni- like a queen 
 
 ficent garments 
 
PASSIVE. 53 
 
 ©ie rourbe oon iljren 3>ungfranen ©ie roar fd)5n unb mar nrie eine 
 empfangen unb in prad)tige $onigin gefleibet 
 ©eintinber gefleibet 
 
 The bridge will be blown up Before you can prevent it, the 
 
 to-morrow bridge will be blown up 
 
 2ftorgen nrirb Me 33rucfe geforengt (Stye <Sie e8 uedjtnbern fonnen, nrirb 
 
 toerben bie SBriitfe getyrengt fein 
 
 93. Do not use the passive unless you wish to 
 emphasize the object as acted upon, rather than the agent 
 as acting : 
 
 Luther translated the Bible gutter uberfe^te bie SBibet in§ 3)eut* 
 
 into German so that it could jcfye, jo baft ba$ gange SBotf fie 
 
 be read by the whole people lefen fonnte unb nid)t nur bie 
 
 and not only by the clergy ©eifUid)feit 
 
 The active voice should be used here, because the people are evidently 
 thought of as readers of the Bible, rather than the Bible, for its own sake, 
 as being read ; but : 
 
 The general was killed by a S)er ©eneral rourbe Don einer $a* 
 cannon ball nonenfugel getotet 
 
 a. When only the act, but not the agent is to be 
 emphasized, the impersonal passive may be used ; see 84, 4. 
 
 94. The English passive may often be rendered by the 
 
 indefinite pronoun man and the active: 
 
 It is thought Tlan glauot 
 
 The books were shown to him &ie 53iid)er rcnrben il)m gegeigt, or 
 
 man geigte iljm bie 33iid)er 
 
 a. This should always be done when an infinitive pre- 
 ceded by to is dependent on a passive verb, and it may 
 then be necessary to substitute a subordinate clause for 
 the infinitive : 
 
 He was heard to exclaim SERan fyorte Urn auSrufen 
 
 He was seen to fall to the Sftan fab, ifyn gu 33oben fatten, or man 
 ground faf), nrie er gu SBoben pel. 
 
54 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 He was thought to be insane Sftcm gtcmbte, bag er ttmfynftnttig 
 
 fei; see 122 
 
 95. Sometimes an intransitive verb may be used to 
 translate the English passive when no agent is men- 
 tioned : 
 
 Seven horses were burnt ©teben ^Sferbe oerbrannten 
 
 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 96. The German modal auxiliaries biirfeu be allowed to 
 (dare), f ontten be able to (can), mogcn like to (may), muffen be 
 compelled to (must), follen be obliged to (shall), tootlen wish 
 to (will) are much more extensively used than the English 
 can, may, etb., because they have infinitives and parti- 
 ciples, and can, therefore, form compound tenses, while 
 their English equivalents are defective to that extent : 
 
 I can read 3d) famt lefen 
 
 I have been able to read 3d) fyctbe lefen Ibnnen 
 
 I shall be able to read 3dj tnerbe lefen fonnen, etc. 
 
 (See 119, 2 b.) 
 
 97. The modal auxiliaries may be used as independent 
 
 verbs with neuter pronouns as objects : 
 
 He is not allowed to do that (Sr barf ba§ nid)t tfyuit 
 
 She will be compelled to do it @ie ttnrb e§ tlnin muffen 
 
 Or with adverbs of place, when a verb of motion is 
 understood (see 135). 
 
 He cannot get out (§r fann nid)t IjerauS 
 
 And fonnen, mogeu and tooKen, when used in certain 
 senses, may take nouns or pronouns as objects ; see 101, 5, 
 102, 2, 105, 4. 
 
 98. When a modal auxiliary in the perfect or plu- 
 perfect is accompanied by an infinitive, its past participle 
 assumes the form of an infinitive : 
 
MODAL AUXILIARIES. 55 
 
 He has wanted it (5r fjat e8 getooflt 
 
 He has wanted to do it dx l)at e8 tfytm rooHen 
 
 She has been compelled to do it @ie t)at e$ tluxn muff en 
 
 a. The same is true of fjetfccn command, Ijelfen Mp, 
 l)5ren hear, laffen Ze/, cawse, fefyen see; see 119, 3: 
 
 He has helped me to carry out (§r f)at mir meinen $tan auSftitjrcn 
 
 my plan fjetfen 
 
 I have heard her sing 3d) l)abe fte ftngen t)5ren 
 
 We have let him depart SSir Ijaben if)n abreifen laffen; 
 
 see 120 
 
 99. The possession of a past participjp enables the 
 German modal auxiliaries to form pluperfects and pluper- 
 fect subjectives : 
 
 He had been able to come (Sr Ijatte fommen fonnen 
 
 He would have been able to (5r fydtte fommen fonnen 
 
 come, for which the more 
 
 common he could have come 
 He should (or ought to) have G?r fycitte fommen fotten 
 
 come 
 
 100. $iirfctt. 1. Stirfen means now be allowed to, 
 have a right to ; dare should be translated by ftmgen (see 
 119,4): * 
 
 All students are allowed to Me <2>tubenten biirfen bie 33ibftotf)ef 
 
 make use of the library benu^en 
 
 The citizens did not dare refuse £>ie S31trger roagten e3 (29, Id) 
 the general's demands nid)t, bie f^orberungen be8 ©ene* 
 
 rats abmfdjlagen 
 
 2. Hence biirfen should be used to express may, when 
 used in the sense of be allowed to, have a right to: 
 
 The doctor said I might walk 3)er 3)oftor fagte, id) biirfte eine 
 for half an hour fydbe @tunbe fpajieren gefyen 
 
 3. It should be used for muff en, when must not is 
 equivalent to be not allowed to, ought not to : 
 
56 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 I must not go out after dark 3d) barf nad) ©onnemmtergang 
 
 ntd)t auggefjen 
 
 4. It may be used, particularly in the preterit sub- 
 junctive (see 117), to make a cautious statement : 
 
 You are right, I dare say <B\e biirften tool)! $ed)t fyaben 
 
 5. SSagen biirfen is not an uncommon pleonasm : 
 
 May I [venture to] offer. you 2)cirf id) eg toagen, Sljnen mcinc 
 my company ? 23eglettung onjubieten? 
 
 101. $iittttett. 1. Gormen corresponds to the English 
 
 can : 
 
 He cannot read nor write (Sr fcttm tt»eber tefcrt nod) fdjretben 
 
 He could not be present (§r fonnte nid)t cuiroefenb jeiu 
 
 2. Ordinarily, also be able to should be rendered by 
 fonnen ; the circumlocutions fal)tg fctn, im @tanbe fetit 
 should be reserved for occasions where they are needed 
 for the sake of variety: 
 
 He has been unable to get per- (gr licit feme (Srtctubnig erfyatten 
 
 mission fonnen 
 
 She will be unable to leave the €ne ttnrb fed)8 Sodden tang ba% 
 
 house for six weeks £au§ nid)t oevlafjen fonnen 
 
 3. Stomtcn is used to express an absolute possibility : 
 He could come if he would (§r fonnte fommeit mean er rooflte 
 
 a. To express a possibility as conceded by the writer or 
 
 speaker, either fonnen or mogen may be used, the former 
 
 being perhaps more common in the ordinary language, 
 
 especially in the present tense: 
 
 He may come at three o'clock ($r fann nm brei Ul)r ober urn fteben 
 
 or at seven o'clock Ufjv fomuien 
 
 You may be right 2)n fannft {or magft) $edjt fjaben 
 
 It might embarrass her (gg fonnte fte in ^Berlegenljett brlngen 
 
MODAL AUXILIARIES. 57 
 
 4. Sonnen is used, even more often than the English 
 can, in the sense of be allowed to, may : 
 
 You can go now ©ic fonnen jefct gefyen 
 
 5. In the spoken language, fonnen is often used in the 
 sense of know, in speaking of a science or a language : 
 
 He knows French very well (5r Fcmit fefyr gut grangofifdj 
 
 6. Sonnen should never be confounded with fennen 
 know. As between fennen and ttnffen, both meaning know, 
 it may be said that id iff en is used more particularly of 
 facts, fennen of persons and things, so that the latter 
 may be said to be synonymous with be acquainted with : 
 
 I know him well 3d) fenne tfyu gut 
 
 I know who he is 3d) roetfe, roer er ift 
 
 * I know his house (i e., I know 3d) roeig fetn §ctu8 
 
 where he lives) 
 I know his house (i. e., I have 3d) fenne fetn §au8 
 
 been in it and know how it 
 
 is arranged, etc.) 
 
 102. SRogen, 1. SDWgett may be used to express a 
 possibility as conceded by the writer or speaker ; in this 
 sense it interchanges with fonnen ; see 101, 3 a. 
 
 2. It may be used, as a transitive verb, in the sense of 
 
 like and, with an infinitive, in the sense of like to, care to : 
 
 She did not like him @ie mod)te ifui nid)t 
 
 I do not care to see him now 34 mag iljn jefct uidjt fel)en 
 
 He did not like to ride with* us, (§r modjte md)t tnit un8 reiten, tneit 
 
 because his horse was some- fetu s #ferb etttmS fafym toav 
 
 what lame 
 
 a. In this sense, mogen is often strengthened by gern 
 (see 186, 1 a), especially in the preterit subjunctive used 
 with the force of a conditional (see 117, 2) : 
 
58 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 
 
 I should like to spend a year 3cf) mbd)te gem ein 3al)r in 3nbten 
 in India nibringen 
 
 3. The subjunctive of tnogen is used in independent 
 optative sentences ; see 112, 2 and 3. 
 
 4. In dependent clauses, the use of mogen is much more 
 restricted than that of may in English, the subjunctive of 
 the principal verb being ordinarily used to convey the 
 same meaning, while in some cases even the indicative 
 may be used : 
 
 I hope you may find your fam- 3d) fjoffe, ©ie toerben 3l)re gamilie 
 
 ily well gefunb antreffen 
 
 I fear that he may have mis- 3d) fiirdjte, baft er meine Sttbfuijt 
 
 understood my intention mifperftanbeit tjabe, or fyat 
 
 I repeated the explanation in 3d) ttneberfyotte bie (Srflarung, ba* 
 
 order that everybody might mit jebermamt biefelbe genau oer* 
 
 clearly understand it ftiinbe, or t)crftel)cn mod)te 
 
 He always feared lest some Q?r fitrdjtete immer, bag jemanb 
 
 one should inquire into his Jetner ©efd)td)te nad)forfd)e 
 history 
 
 103. 1. Stiffen. Must should be rendered by miiffen : 
 All men must die 2ttle Sftenfdjen miiffen fterben 
 
 You must excuse me ©te miiffen mid) entfcfyutbtgen 
 
 2. Be compelled to, be forced to, be obliged to may also, 
 in most cases, be rendered by miiffen : 
 
 I was compelled to use vio- 3d) muftte ©eroatt gebraudjen 
 
 lence 
 
 Napoleon had been forced to 9?afcoleon Ijatte fid) $urii(f$ief)eu 
 
 retreat miiffen 
 
 a. Of course, ge^xmngen toerbcn (or fein, see 92) be com- 
 pelled, may also be used, and it should be used when the 
 agent is expressed : 
 
 The stranger was compelled by 2)er ftrembe nmrbe toon ben $8iir» 
 the citizens to leave the town geru ge^uungen, bie @tabt fogleid) 
 
 at once gu tjerlaffen 
 
MODAL AUXILIARIES. 59 
 
 3. Have to may be translated literally, but it will often 
 be better to use miiffen : 
 
 His father had to pay the bill ©ein SBater tjatte bie Sftecfymmg gu 
 
 begatjten, or muftte bie SRedjnung 
 be$al)(en 
 
 4. When miiffen is accompanied by a negative, it usu- 
 ally means not be compelled to ; must not in the sense of 
 be not allowed to, ought not to, should, as a rule, be ren- 
 dered by biirfen ; see 100, 3. 
 
 104. Solicit. 1. ©often should never be used to ex- 
 press the pure future or conditional ; see 88-90. 
 
 2. Otherwise ; the forms of shall should be rendered by 
 
 those of foflen : 
 
 Thou shalt not kill £>u foHft ntd)t toten 
 
 He should go to Karlsbad dx folltc ttad) ftarlSbab gefjett 
 
 You should have come sooner 2)u Ijatteft friifyer fommen foflen, 
 
 see 99 
 
 3. The imperfect subjunctive of fatten should be used 
 for ought to with a present infinitive, and the pluperfect 
 subjunctive for ought to witha perfect infinitive : 
 
 He ought to stay at home and (gr fottte gu §aufe bleiben unb ftu* 
 
 study bieren 
 
 You ought to have paid him 2)u fwtteft ifyn foglcicf) begafyten fot» 
 
 at once ten, see 99 
 
 4. ©otten should be used to translate the forms of to be 
 when followed by an infinitive with to, unless pure futu- 
 rity is to be expressed : 
 
 I am to receive ten thousand 3d) jofl getjn temfenb Tlaxt has 3al)v 
 
 marks a year erfjalten 
 
 The ship was to sail to-day, $5a8 @cf)tff jollte fyeute abfafyren, 
 
 but the captain has fallen aber ber ^apitan tft fefyr franf 
 
 very sick geroorben 
 
60 TENSES. 
 
 5. The present tense of foUen may be used, when no 
 misunderstanding can arise, in the sense of he said to : 
 
 The Czar is said to contemplate 2)er (£gar foil eine Sftetfe nad) tyaxiS 
 
 a journey to Paris beabftd)*ttgen 
 
 Dr. Faust is said to have lived Dr. gauft foil in (Srfurt gelebt 
 
 in Erfurt tyaben 
 
 105. SBoffeit. 1- SSoIIcn should never be used to ex- 
 press the pure future of conditional ; see 88-90. 
 
 2. Nor should tooHen ever be used, like the English 
 
 would, in the sense of was (or were) wont to : 
 
 Every evening she would sit 3eben $benb fag fte am lifer mtb 
 on the shore and gaze upon faf) auf8 Sfteer fyinaug 
 the ocean 
 
 3. It is used in the sense of he willing to, desire to, wish 
 to, want to : 
 
 The doctor would not {L e.,was S)ev?lqt iDolIte Don ber armen grau 
 
 not willing to) accept any feine 23e$af)Uuig anneljmen 
 pay from the poor woman 
 
 I wanted to come, but I could 3d) tuollte fommen, aber id) fonntc 
 
 not nidjt 
 
 a. In the sense of desire t% gem is often added to tool* 
 
 len (see 186, 1 a) : 
 
 He desired to complete his (Sr ttottte feine ©tubien gem be* 
 studies enben 
 
 4. SSoHen is also used, as a transitive verb, in the sense 
 of desire, want to have : 
 
 The child wanted the moon 2)a8 $inb rootlte ben 9ftonb [fyaben] 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 106. 1. The present tense is used, for the English per- 
 fect, to express an action or condition which began in the 
 past and still continues at the present time : 
 
TENSES. 61 
 
 I have been working on this 3d) arbeite fdjon brei 3afjre an Me* 
 book for three years fern 33ud)e 
 
 2. Similarly, the preterit is used, for the English pluper- 
 fect, to express an action or condition which, having com- 
 menced previous to a specified time in the past, still con- 
 tinued at that time : 
 
 I had been in Paris for three 3d) mar fctt brei Sftonaten in $art«, 
 months/ when the war broke aU ber $rieg au§brac^ 
 out 
 
 107. 1. As in English, the present tense is often used, 
 
 for the preterit, in lively narration : 
 
 Without a moment's hesitation Ol)ne etnen 5utgenblicf gu g'ogern, 
 
 he rushes through smoke eitt er burd) 9?aud) unb gfammen 
 
 and flames up the narrow bie enge £reppe l)iuauf, britf)t bie 
 
 stairs, bursts open the door, Xl)iiv auf, ergretft ba§$tub, mid* 
 
 seizes the child, wraps it in a elt e§ in eine SBettbecfe, tragt e8 
 
 blanket, carries it down the auf bemfelben gefal)r(id)en SSege 
 
 same dangerous path, and fyinunter unb itbergibt e8 feiner 
 
 hands it to his mother, who t>or greube ftummeu Gutter 
 is speechless with joy 
 
 2. It is also used in giving a brief account of a story, a 
 
 poem, or a drama ; and, in that case, it is of importance 
 
 to be consistent and not fall into the use of the preterit 
 
 after the present has once been used : 
 
 In the second scene, Arkas, 3u ber gtueiteu ©cene erfdjeint 
 
 the king's messenger, appears $rfa8, ber 23ote be* $ontg§, unb 
 
 and announces to the priest- melbet ber ^rieftertn ba% £eran= 
 
 ess the approach of Thoas nafyen beS £l)oa3 (see 3 b) unb 
 
 and his army fetneS £eere8 
 
 108. The present tense, more frequently than in Eng- 
 lish, is used instead of the future, provided that no mis- 
 understanding can arise : 
 
62 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 I shall depart for Munich to- 3d) reife morgen nad) 2ftiindjen ab 
 
 morrow 
 
 We shall build (are going to Md)ftc$ 3at)r bauen ttrir etn neueS 
 
 build) a new house next year §cm$ 
 
 If you will come with me, I SSenn bu mit mir fommji, gebe id) 
 
 shall give you the money Mr ba% ©elb 
 
 a. This is particularly often done in the passive : 
 Whoever moves will be shot SSer fid) riiljrt ttnrb erfdjoffen 
 
 b. The present may, therefore, be used to express a 
 very decided command : 
 
 You go at once to your room S)u gefyft fogleid) auf betn 3immer 
 
 109. The future and the future perfect are often used to 
 express that which probably is, or has been : 
 
 Who can it be ? It is probably 2Ber fann e8 fein ? (£8 nurb mein 
 
 my brother 33rnber fein 
 
 He has probably landed by G?r toirb je^t [rodjtidjetnUd)] fdjon 
 
 this time getanbet fein 
 
 110. Instead of the preterit, the perfect is very fre- 
 quently used in ordinary conversation, less frequently in 
 the written language : 
 
 Last year I was in Europe ' S^teS 3af)r bin id) in (Snropa ge* 
 
 roejen 
 Thiers died Sept. 4, 1877 Xl)ter8 tfl am 4. (September 1877 
 
 geftorben 
 
 a. In continued narration, however, the preterit is the 
 rule. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 111. The subjunctive is used, if the writer or speaker 
 wishes to represent something not as a fact, or as certain, 
 but as possible, conditional, desirable, or as said or be- 
 lieved by another person, But the subjective character, 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 63 
 
 which may be given to a statement by the use of the sub- 
 junctive, may be given to it also by other means, e. g., by 
 the use of certain particles or modal auxiliaries, as is often 
 done in English, so that the use of the subjunctive, par- 
 ticularly in independent clauses, is thus comparatively 
 limited. 
 
 Optative Subjunctive. 
 
 112. The subjunctive is used to express a wish or in- 
 tention. 
 
 A. In Independent Sentences. 
 
 1. The use of the present subjunctive is ordinarily 
 limited to certain fixed expressions : 
 
 God be praised ©elobt fei @ott 
 
 May God grant ©ebe ©ott 
 
 Let it be thus <&o fei e§ 
 
 2. The present subjunctive of mogen is commonly used 
 
 to express a wish conceived as capable of realization : 
 
 May the new year bring you Sftoge bir i>a8 neue 3af)r nid)t8 aU 
 nothing but joy and happi- @lucf uub greube bringeit 
 ness 
 
 3. The preterit subjunctive, usually accompanied by a 
 
 particle like bod) or rtur, is used to express a wish not 
 
 realized at the present time : 
 
 Would that he might come $ame er bod) 
 
 I wish it would stop raining §orte e8 bod) auf gu regnen 
 
 a. The preterit subjunctive of mogen may also be used, 
 
 without materially changing the sense : 
 
 Would that he were silent Wlodjte er bodj fcfyroetgen, for the 
 
 simpler fdjnricge er bod) 
 
 4. The pluperfect subjunctive, usually accompanied by 
 bod) or nur, is used to express a wish not realized at a 
 
64 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 time in the past when its realization would have' been de- 
 sirable : 
 
 Would that I had seen him £citte td) itjn bodj gefefyen 
 
 If he had only arrived at the 2Bcire er bod) (nur, bod) nur) gur 
 right time redjten 3 cit gefommen 
 
 B. In Dependent Clauses. 
 113. 1. The subjunctive is used in dependent clauses 
 after verbs of wishing, intending, 'permitting and their 
 opposites : 
 
 I desire that my books shall 3d) rcitufdje, baft man mir meine 
 
 be returned to me 33iid)cr juriicfjeube 
 
 He intended that his brother (Sr beabjidjtigte, baft jein SBruber 
 should receive this letter biejen SBrtef erfyiette, or ertjalten 
 
 follte 
 He had not permitted his son (§r tjatte nid)t ertaubt, baft jein 
 
 to go to America ©ofyn nad) toerifa gtnge 
 
 He feared that his friend (Sr fiivdjtete, baft jein grennb ftitrbe, 
 might die or fterben modjte 
 
 2. The subjunctive is used in final clauses to express 
 intention, purpose, etc. : 
 
 Luther translated the Bible gutter iiberfe^tc bic SBibel tn$ 
 
 into German, so that the 2)eutfd)e, \o bag ba$ 55olf fie lefen 
 
 people might be able to read fonnte unb nid)t nur bie ©eift- 
 
 it and not only the clergy lidjfett 
 
 3. If, however, that which is expressed in the final 
 clause is not to be represented as intended, or is to be 
 represented not only as intended but as actually accom- 
 plished, the indicative should be used : 
 
 The fog was so dense, that the 2)er 9?ebel War fo bicfyt, baft ber 
 
 captain could not see the $apttcin ba$ 2id)t nidjt feljen 
 
 light fonute 
 
 He stepped nearer, so that he (§r tvat na!)er, fo baft er ba% ©lib 
 
 could (was able to) see the beffer fefyen fonute 
 
 picture better 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 65 
 
 4 The indicative may also be used after verbs of wish- 
 ing and commanding, if the wish or command are to be 
 very emphatic or are conceived as certain to be fulfilled : 
 
 I want you to take this letter 3d) njimfdje, baft bit biefett 23rief 
 to the post auf bte $oft trogfl 
 
 Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse. 
 
 114. 1. The subjunctive is used in substantive clauses 
 dependent on verbs of thinking, saying, inquiring, search- 
 ing, investigating, etc. : 
 
 He believes that he is sick <£v glanbt, bag er tranf fet " 
 
 He said that he would soon ($r fagte, bag er balb $uritcffef)ren 
 
 come back n?erbe 
 
 He asked (he wished to know) Hv fragte (er roottte ttrtffen), ttne idj 
 
 how I had slept gejd)lafen tjabe 
 
 2. If, however, the truth of the statement is not to 
 be questioned, or is to be affirmed with a considerable de- 
 gree of certainty, the indicative should be used : 
 
 I believe that you are right 3d) gfoitbe, baft bit rcdjt fjaft 
 
 He knew that his father had (£r nmfjte, bag jein $ater angefom- 
 
 arrived men toax 
 
 Ask your brother himself, if grage betnen 33ruber nur felbft, ob 
 
 he did not see it (i. e., I know er e8 ntd)t gejeljeit tjat 
 
 he did see it) 
 
 115. After verbs of saying and thinking, a clause, 
 which stands for a direct object, may be introduced by 
 baft, in which case the verb naturally stands at the end of 
 the clause (see 236) ; or it may be left formally indepen- 
 dent, while logically dependent, in which case the verb, as 
 regularly in independent sentences, occupies the second 
 place (see 214) ; the rules for moods and tenses in indi- 
 rect discourse (see 116) apply in either case : 
 
66 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 He said [that] he had seen the 
 emperor 
 
 The accused claimed that he 
 was innocent 
 
 (£r fagte, baft er ben $aifer gefefyen 
 fjtitte, or er fagte, er Ijatte ben 
 Jfaifer gefeljen 
 2)er Slngeffagte beljanptete, baft er 
 unfdjulbig roare, or er mare un* 
 fdjulbtg. 
 116. 1. In English, in changing from the direct to the 
 indirect discourse, the present tense is changed to the 
 preterit ; in German, the best usage requires the present 
 tense of the direct discourse to be retained also in the 
 indirect discourse : 
 
 Direct 
 He said : " I am sick. *' 
 (5r fagte : „3d) bin franf" 
 
 He asked him: "Have you 
 seen my brother?" 
 <§r fragte i^n: „§aft bu mei* 
 nen 33ruber gefeljcn?" 
 
 He thought: "He will forget 
 it" 
 
 (Sr Dadjte : „(Sr nrirb e« Der- 
 geffen" 
 
 Indirect. 
 He said that he was sick 
 (Sr fagte, baft er franf fei 
 
 He asked him, if he had seen his 
 brother 
 
 (Sr fragte if)n, ob er feinen 33ruber 
 gefefjen fyabe 
 
 He thought [that] he would forget 
 it 
 
 (Sr bad^te, baft er e8 oergeffen 
 toerbe, or er toerbe e8 toergeffen; 
 
 see 115 
 2. In the spoken language, however, the preterit is 
 quite generally substituted for the present, as in English ; 
 and this is also often done in the written language, espe- 
 cially when the form of the verb is the same in the 
 present subjunctive as in the present indicative : 
 
 They said : " We have seen <2He fagten : „2£tr fyabett ifyn ge= 
 
 feljen" 
 
 ©ie fagten, baft fte ilnt gefeljen l)at* 
 ten, instead of Ijaben, which 
 would be identical with the pre- 
 sent indicative 
 
 (£r fagte, baft er franf ware, for fei 
 
 him" 
 They said that they had seen 
 him 
 
 He said that he was sick 
 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 67 
 
 a. Similarly, as the preterit subjunctive tofirbe may be 
 used for the present subjunctive nmbe r so for the future 
 subjunctive id) toerbe tf)im we may substitute what is or- 
 dinarily called a conditional (see 90), id) toiirbe tljim : 
 
 He said that he would do it (Sr fagte, baft er e$ tljim ttmrbe,/or 
 
 roerbe 
 
 Potential Subjunctive. 
 
 117. The preterit subjunctive is used to denote that 
 which, under certain circumstances, might be : 
 
 It might be possible, but . . . (g« roare roof)! mogltd), aber . . . 
 
 2. Hence the preterit subjunctive may be used in 
 hypothetical clauses, instead of the conditional, and the 
 pluperfect subjunctive instead of the perfect conditional: 
 
 (5r ginge mit unS, (instead of er 
 roiirbe mit un8 getjen) roenn cr 
 fotutte 
 
 (Sr Ijatte e$ getfjan (instead of cr 
 rourbe e$ getfyan Ijaben), roenn cr 
 gefonnt i)dttc 
 
 <£v roare gefommen (instead of cr 
 roiirbe gefommen fein), roenn e8 
 nic^t gercgnet Ijcitte 
 
 118. 1. The subjunctive is used to express conditions 
 which are not realized : 
 
 He would go with us, if he 
 could 
 
 He would have done it if he 
 had been able 
 
 He would have come if it had 
 not rained 
 
 If he were my friend, he would 
 not say this of me 
 
 If he would only come, all 
 
 would be well 
 I should have come sooner if I 
 
 had known it 
 
 SScnn cr tncin greunb roare, (o*- 
 roare er tnein 5?reunb, see 235, 2) 
 fo {see 140) roiirbe er bieS uidjt 
 toon mtrfagen 
 
 SSenn er nur fame (or fame er mir), 
 fo roare attes gut 
 
 3d) roare friifjer gefommen, roenn id) 
 e8 geroufct ijatte, or Ijatte id) e8 
 geroufjt 
 
68 INFINITIVE. 
 
 2. Hence the subjunctive should always be used after 
 
 aU toentt, ctfe ob as if, as though : 
 
 He looked as though he had (§r fa!) au8, al§ ob er au8 bem ©rabe 
 risen from the grave cmferftanben retire, or al« tt)dre ev 
 
 au% bem ©vabe auferftanben 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 119. 1. Infinitives are preceded by their complements 
 (see 231, 1). When the preposition ju is used, it always 
 stands immediately before the infinitive. 
 
 2. As a rule, the preposition §u is used before an infini- 
 tive in the same cases in which to is used in English. 
 
 a. When to is equal to in order to, it should ordinarily 
 
 be rendered by urn . . . %u f the unt preceding the other 
 
 complements of the infinitive : 
 
 He went to Paris to study Q?r gtng nad) granfreitf), urn franco* 
 French history ftfdje ©ejd)id)te gu ftubieren 
 
 b. Never use JU before an infinitive dependent on a 
 
 modal auxiliary, not even when the modal auxiliary is 
 
 employed to render an English circumlocution requiring 
 
 the use of to : 
 
 I cannot do it 3dj fcmn eS nttfjt tfymi 
 
 He will not be able to do it (£r roirb e$ nid)t tfyim fonnen 
 
 We must do it SBir miiffen e8 tf)un 
 
 We have been compelled to Sir fyaben e§ tf)im miiffen 
 do it 
 
 c. Unlike the English to, git must be repeated before 
 
 each of several infinitives : 
 
 The teacher gave us a poem to S)er £efyrer gab un8 ein ©ebitfjt 
 copy and learn by heart abgitfdjveiben unb auSmenbtg $u 
 
 lenten 
 
INFINITIVE. 69 
 
 3. The infinitive without ju is used after finbert find, 
 
 \xi\jitn feel, Ijcifcm command, fjelfen help, fjorett hear, laffeit 
 
 let, cause, Icfjrcn teach, Icrncn learn, fefyeit see : 
 
 I saw her sitting at the window 3d) faf) fte am gettfter ft£en 
 
 The boy learned to read $)er $nabe lentte tefen 
 
 He ordered me to be silent (Sr Ijiefi mid) [till jdjtueigen 
 
 The colonel let the men rest £)er Oberft Ueg bte ©olbaten jum 
 (caused ... to rest) two hours ©tuuben ruf)en 
 
 4. Contrary to English usage, ^u should be used before 
 
 an infinitive after UMijen dare, and bvaudjen need: 
 
 He did not dare say a word (Sr magte leiu 2Bort $u reben 
 
 You need not trouble yourself @ic bvaudjen ftd) md)t gu bemitljeii 
 
 120. 1. When Ijorcn hear, fefjcu see, fitfjlen /e^, laffen 
 fe£, cawse, (jctfecn, 6efel)len, gebieten command, are followed 
 by an infinitive, the object which expresses who is heard, 
 seen, etc., or to whom a command is given, may be omitted 
 in German without changing the rest of the sentence, 
 while in English a passive construction must be used : 
 
 The king ordered the architect 2)cr ^oittg befall bem 2lrd)iteften, 
 
 to build him a castle on the iljm eiu ©djfog auf bem 33erge gu 
 
 mountain beaten 
 
 The king ordered a castle to $)ev $omg befaf)f, tl)m ettt ©djfojj 
 
 be built for him on the auf bem SBcrge $u bauen 
 
 mountain 
 
 a. When have with an infinitive or past participle 
 
 means cause, order, command, it should be rendered by 
 
 laffen, fyeifcen, fcfeljlen or gebieten: 
 
 I had him repeat the story 3d) Uefj iljn bte ©efd)td)te roieber* 
 
 l)o(en 
 The Sultan had fifteen of the 25er ©iritan (teg funfgeljn ber ©e* 
 prisoners beheaded fangencu entljanpten 
 
 2. It may, therefore, be said, that after the above verbs, 
 
70 INFINITIVE. 
 
 a past participle or a passive infinitive should be trans- 
 lated by an active infinitive (without jit before the verbs 
 mentioned 119, 3) : 
 
 I have heard this story told a 3d) Ijabe biefe ©efd)id)te fd)on oft 
 
 good many times ergatyen fyoren 
 
 Charlemagne caused the old #arl berOrofee Uegbic alten£elben* 
 
 heroic poems to be collected licber fammeln 
 
 The captain ordered the sails 2)er $apitcin Ueg bie ©egel auf= 
 to be hoisted gietjen 
 
 3. The active infinitive may then be said to have pas- 
 sive force, for its logical subject may be expressed, as 
 after the finite forms of the passive, by lion with the 
 dative : 
 
 The king had a castle built on £>er $ontg Ueg fief) Don feinem SBau* 
 the mountain by his archi- meifter eiu @d)lo§ aitf bem 23erge 
 tect bauen 
 
 4. The active infinitive should also be used in the pre- 
 dicate after fein be : 
 
 There was nothing to be done (§8 roar nid)t8 gu tfyuu 
 
 a. Attributively, however, the gerundive should be 
 used, which is in form identical with an inflected present 
 participle preceded by gu : 
 
 This poem is to be learned by 3)iefeS ©ebicfyt ifl au$tt>enbtg git 
 
 heart lenten 
 
 - But 
 
 The poem to be learned (or 3>a« gu lernenbe ©ebtdjt ift gtemlicf) 
 
 which is to be learned) is tang 
 
 quite long 
 
 The difficulties to be overcome 2>ie gu uberttrinbenben @d)ttriertg* 
 
 were very great feiten tnaren feljr grog 
 
 121. With the following verbs the infinitive without gu 
 is used in certain fixed expressions, in place of various 
 English constructions : 
 
PARTICIPLES. 
 
 71 
 
 fasten ride (in a vehicle) 
 reiten ride (on horseback) 
 gefyen go, walk 
 
 bleibcn remain ftefyenbtetb en remain standing, halt 
 
 ftfcen bleiben remain sitting 
 Uegen bleiben remain lying 
 foajieren fafyren ride for pleasure 
 tya^teren reiten ride for pleasure 
 (pajieren gel) en walk for pleasure 
 fdjfafen gefjen go to bed 
 ftfdjen gefjen go a-fishing 
 jagen geljen go a-hunting 
 etc. 
 
 122. The English construction of an accusative with an 
 infinitive (the latter preceded by to) cannot be imitated in 
 German, but a subordinate clause introduced by a suitable 
 conjunction should be substituted : 
 
 He knew himself to be guilty (gr ttmgte, bag er fcfyulbtg tt)ar 
 
 I want you to go away now 
 He declared it to be a false- 
 hood 
 
 Similarly : 
 
 He sent it for his wife to look 
 at 
 
 3d) roiinjdje, baft bu nun fartqefyft 
 (Sr erfltirte, baft e8 einc Sitge fei, 
 
 or er erf (arte, e8 fei eiue 2itge; 
 
 see 114, 1 
 
 (Sr fanbte e8, batnlt feine grau es 
 fid) aujatje; see 113, 2 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 123. Participles, being verbal adjectives, are inflected, 
 and admit of comparison, just like common adjectives 
 (see 17-23) ; they are generally preceded by their comple- 
 ments (231, 2-4). 
 
 124. The use of participles is more limited in German 
 than in English. 
 
 1. Participles may be used attributively : 
 
 A standing army Sin ftefjenbeS §eer 
 
 A wandering minstrel (gin fafyrenber (or nianbentber) 
 
 ©anger 
 A respected citizen (gin geadjteter 93iirger 
 
 A wounded soldier (gin oertounbeter @olbat 
 
Y2 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 2. Participles may be used substantively : 
 
 A traveller (Sin SKeifenber 
 
 Something glittering (StroaS ©Icm^enbeS 
 
 Those assembled 2)te $erfammetten 
 
 The wounded 3Me £oten 
 
 3. a. Only past participles can be used predicatively : 
 
 The door was locked 2>te £f)iir roar Derfdjloffen 
 
 He had lost his watch (Sr fyatte feme Ufyr toerloren 
 
 The mother had died 2)ie Gutter raar geftorben 
 
 6. Present participles cannot be used in the predicate, 
 
 but a finite verb should be substituted : 
 
 She was sitting at the window ©ie fag am genfter 
 I was just going to leave for 3d) roollte ebeu nad) SBertin ah* 
 Berlin reifett 
 
 c. A limited number of present participles are no longer 
 
 felt as such, but as common adjectives, and they may 
 
 therefore be used predicatively and adverbially : 
 
 He is absent (Sr ift abroefenb 
 
 She sang charmingly @te fang ret^enb 
 
 Such are, among others, antoefenb present, bebeutenb 
 important, betreffenb concerned. 
 
 4. a. Participles may be used appositively : 
 
 She sat weeping by the bed- ©ie fag roeinenb am 23ette iljrer 
 
 side of her mother gutter 
 
 He entered the room in silence @d)roetgenb trat er in ba$ ^imvan 
 
 Pierced by an arrow he sank $on einem s J3fetfe getroffeti fan! er 
 
 to the ground gu 23oben 
 
 b. This use of a participle, however, is not permitted in 
 the numerous cases in which an important limitation of a 
 noun is to be expressed. The participle should then be 
 used attributively, before the noun, preceded by its own 
 
PARTICIPLES. 
 
 73 
 
 qualifiers, (see 231, 2) ; or else a relative clause should be 
 substituted : 
 
 The book lying on the table 
 was a Greek grammar 
 
 The candidate receiving the 
 largest number of votes is 
 elected 
 
 I prefer an edition of Moliere's 
 works printed in France 
 
 2)a8 auf bem £iftf)e Uegenbe S8ud) 
 wax etne griedufcfye ©rammatif, 
 or ba% 23ud), ba& auf bem £ifd)e 
 tag, 2C. 
 
 2>er bie meifkn ©ttmmen erfjaltenbe 
 (Sanbtbat (or berjenige (Eanbibat, 
 tueltfjer bie meiften @timmen er* 
 ffiU,) ift erroar^lt 
 
 3d) ^ie^e etne in granfreid) gebrucfte 
 SluSgabe Don SKoltere'S SSerfen 
 (or eine $lii8gabe toon . . ., bie in 
 granfreid) gebrucft ift,) Dor 
 
 c. A present participle should not, ordinarily, be used 
 to express an idea as important as, or more important 
 than, that expressed by the finite verb, but a coordinate 
 verb should be used instead of the participle : 
 
 He sat at his desk all day, (Sr fa6 ben gan;;en £ag an feinem 
 
 writing letters $nlte unb fdjrteb SBriefe 
 
 He stood on the mountain, (§f ftanb auf bem Serge unb fal) in8 
 looking down into the valley £t)al l)iniutter 
 
 125. Present participles should not be used in German 
 to express adverbial relations of time, cause, or manner. 
 Various substitutions afe possible. 
 
 1. An adverbial clause introduced by a suitable con- 
 junction (see 142 ff:) : 
 
 Returning from his walk, he 
 was surprised to see light in 
 his study 
 
 Not finding his friend at home, 
 he went away again 
 
 Having arrived at night, he 
 had not noticed the dirty 
 appearance of the hotel 
 
 3U« er uon feinem @£a$iergange gu* 
 riicffefyrte, roar er iiberrafdjt, Vid)t 
 in feinem ©tubtergimmer gu fetjen 
 
 Site (or ba) er fetnen greunb ntd)t 
 gu §aufe fanb, ging er roicber fort 
 
 £>a (or metl) er in ber 9?ad)t ange- 
 fommen roar, tjatte er ba§ fdjmu^ 
 ige 2ui$fel)en be8 §otel8 md}t 
 bemertt 
 
74 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Having finished his work, he Cobalt er feine Arbeit oottcnbet 
 went away again fyatte, eilte er ttueber batton 
 
 He left the hotel, pretending dv Derltefe ba% §otel, inbem er oor« 
 that he would soon return gab, balb guriicfferjren gu tnotlen 
 
 Trying to excuse herself, she Snbem (or rocifyrenb) fie fid) $u ent* 
 only made the matter worse jdmtbtgen fudjte, madjte fie bie 
 
 &ad)t nur nod) jdjUmmer 
 
 a. When for a present participle, referring to a noun 
 which is the subject of the sentence, a subordinate clause 
 is thus substituted, this subordinate clause should gener- 
 ally stand first in the sentence, and the noun should be 
 made its subject, while a pronoun should be used as the 
 subject of the principal clause (see 244) : 
 
 Casting a last glance at the Snbem ber fitter bem £cuife fetner 
 
 house of his ancestors, the $(l)nen eiuen le^ten SBttcf jjntrmrf, 
 
 knight mounted his horse beftieg er fein $ferb nub rttt ba* 
 
 and rode away toon 
 
 2. Sometimes, a relative clause may be substituted : 
 
 The count, believing that his 2)er ©raf, mefd)er gfaubte, bafe fein 
 
 servant had been murdered 2)tener auf feiuen 23efet)l ermoubet 
 
 at his command, was fright- morben fei, erfdjraf, al8 er ifm 
 
 ened when he saw him ap- fommeu fal) 
 proaching 
 
 3. Sometimes, a suitable adjective may be found : 
 
 They marched back, rejoicing @te marfdjterten guriid, frolj u'ber 
 over their victory ifjreu ©ieg 
 
 4. Sometimes, a suitable noun preceded by a preposition 
 
 may be substituted : 
 
 I took the book intending to 3d) naljm ba% 33udj in ber $bfi(f)t, 
 return it within a week e$ in etner 2Bod)e gururfgujenben 
 
 5. In a few cases the infinitive should be used instead 
 of the participle ; see 121. 
 
VERBAL NOUNS IN -ING. 75 
 
 6. After fommen come, the manner of motion is not ex- 
 pressed, as in English, by the present participle, but by 
 the past participle : 
 
 The prince came galloping along 2)er $rinfl tarn bafyer galoppicrt 
 A swan came swimming up to (Sin @d)rocm tarn auf bte Sungfrau 
 the maiden gugefd)tuommen 
 
 126. Although past participles are more frequently 
 used in German to express adverbial relations than pre- 
 sent participles, yet they cannot be used with the same 
 freedom as in English, and it will often seem best to make 
 substitutions for them similar to those just indicated for 
 present participles. 
 
 VERBAL NOUNS IN -/NO. 
 
 127. In English, a confusion has arisen between the 
 present participles and the verbal nouns in -ing, in con- 
 sequence of which it is in some cases difficult to say 
 whether we have to do with a true present participle or a 
 verbal noun. For our purpose, it has seemed best to dis- 
 cuss in the previous paragraphs all those cases in which 
 we clearly have to do with present participles, and clas- 
 sify all others as verbal nouns. 
 
 128. English verbal nouns in -ing should under no cir- 
 cumstances be translated by German present participles. 
 The various ways of rendering them are the following: 
 
 1. By a verbal noun without suffix : 
 
 The fighting lasted until even- £)er $antp[ bauerte bis gum Stbenb 
 
 ing 
 We heard the singing distinctly 2Bir Ijorten ben ©efang beutltd) 
 
 2. If no suitable noun without suffix is in common use, 
 a neuter verbal noun in -eit (often called " an infinitive 
 
76 VERBAL NOUNS IN -M0. 
 
 used as a noun"), or a feminine verbal noun in -UttJJ, 
 should be used. Feminines in -Hllg, however, are not 
 formed from all verbal stems, and when formed, they 
 often have special meanings, denoting, for instance, the 
 result of the act, rather than the act itself; caution 
 should, therefore, be exercised in their use. The neuters 
 in —en may be used with greater freedom. 
 
 I prefer rowing to sailing 3d) gtefje ba% {see 4, 2) SKnbem bem 
 
 <Segeln tior 
 
 Smoking is not allowed in this 3n biefem ^tmmer ifi ba$ $andjen 
 room toerboten 
 
 I use spectacles for (or in) 3d) gebrcmdje eine Grille gum (or 
 reading beim) £cfen 
 
 The landing of the pilgrims 2)te £ctnbnng ber ^ilger 
 
 The signing of the treaty 2>ie llntev$etd)nung be§ SBertrageS 
 
 a. If such a noun is qualified by another noun, the lat- 
 ter must always stand in the genitive case : 
 
 The singing of such songs £)a$ ©tngen jotdjer Steber 
 
 Feeding the animals is for- £a§ giitteru ber £l)iere ift toerboten 
 bidden 
 
 b. With the preposition gu, a neuter verbal noun in -en 
 may often be used to render an English infinitive with to, 
 and this construction should, as a rule, be used, when 
 the infinitive has no adjunct, or is accompanied only by a 
 direct object: 
 
 He gave him a drawing to (Sr gab U)m eine 3 e ^ nuu fl 5 um 
 
 copy dopteren 
 
 He left his coat in the sun to dx Ueg fetnen Sftocf in ber (Sonne 
 
 dry ^nm £rocfnen 
 
 I had no time to read his long 3d) tjatte fetne 3eit jum 2efen fetnen 
 
 letter langen SBrtefeS, or letne 3^ 
 
 fetnen (angen 33rief gu lefen 
 
 c. In many cases, a compound may then be formed of 
 the verbal noun and its adjunct : 
 
VERBAL NOUNS IN -ING. 77 
 
 Letter writing, the writing of 2)a§ 23riefefd)retbett 
 
 letters 
 
 The work of cutting trees 2)ie Arbeit be8 33ciiimef aliens 
 
 The habit of smoking tobacco 3)ie ©erootjntyeit be3 £abacfraud)en§ 
 
 3. A verbal noun in -ing used in the manner of a direct 
 object after certain verbs should be translated by an in- 
 finitive with gu : 
 
 He ceased playing (Sr fjorte auf, git fpielen 
 
 He began reading the letter C?r fing an, ben 23itef gu Tefeit 
 
 He remembered having heard dv erttmerte fid), biefe SBemerfung 
 this remark before jdjou friil)ei gcfyort gu fjabeit 
 
 a. An infinitive with 5U may frequently be anticipated, 
 
 either as object or as subject, by the impersonal c3 (29, 
 
 Id): 
 
 I enjoyed looking at the pict- (S§ mad)te mir 2>ergniigen, bic 33it- 
 ures bcr 311 betradjteu 
 
 b. Here may be mentioned the construction of the im- 
 personal gcltngcn (see 87, 2 a): 
 
 He succeeded in translating Q?$ gefong tl)m, bie @tette ridjtig gu 
 the passage correctly iibevfefcen 
 
 4. A verbal noun in the genitive case may usually be 
 translated by an infinitive with ju : 
 
 He took the money with the (Sr naljm ba% ©elb in bcr 2tbftd)t, e« 
 
 intention of returning it guritcf jucrftattcn 
 
 In the hope of being able to 3n ber §offnung, biefe @iimme auf* 
 
 raise this sum bringen jit fomteii 
 
 He accused me of having stolen ($r befrfjufbigte mid), iljm bie Uljr 
 
 his watch geftoljlen gu tyabeu 
 
 a. But adjectives and verbs which, although followed 
 in English by of, do not take a genitive in German, but 
 require some preposition (see Appendix, A and B), should 
 be treated according to 6, below. 
 
78 VERBAL NOUNS IN -WG. 
 
 5. When a verbal noun in -dng preceded by a preposi- 
 tion expresses an adverbial relation of time, cause or 
 manner, applying to the sentence in general, it should 
 generally be expanded into a subordinate clause, intro- 
 duced by a suitable conjunction : 
 
 After reading the letter, he put 9?ad)bem cr ben SBrief getefen fyatte, 
 
 it into his pocket ftccfte er il)n in tie £afd)e 
 
 Before going to bed, I packed (Slje id) gu SBette ging, patfte id) atte 
 
 all my things tttcine @ad)en ftujammen 
 
 On arriving at the castle, the %\§ ber fitter am ©djloffe anfam, 
 
 knight dismounted ftieg er {see 125, 1 a) com ^ferbe 
 
 For the conjunctions which should be used in render- 
 ing the various prepositions, see 142, ff. 
 
 a. Two prepositions, however, viz. of)ne without and an* 
 ftatt instead, may be followed by an infinitive with ju : 
 
 The witness spoke without £)er Beitge tyrad) oljne ben Sdtge* 
 
 looking at the accused flagten an^ufdjauen 
 
 Instead of writing, he went gn ftatt gu fd)retben, ging er felbft 
 
 himself fyin 
 
 For the infinitive with jtt, a subordinate clause intro- 
 duced by bafe may be substituted, and this substitution 
 should take place whenever the logical subject of the 
 verbal noun in -ing is not the same as that of the govern- 
 ing verb : 
 
 The young man went to Amer- Tj e r junge SJtonn ging nad) 5Imertfa, 
 ica without his father's ofyne baft feiit SBater etroaS ba&on 
 
 knowing anything about it nmgte 
 
 6. When a verbal noun in -ing preceded by a preposi- 
 tion does not express, as stated in the previous paragraph, 
 an adverbial relation of time, cause or manner, applying 
 to the sentence in general, but constitutes a necessary 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 79 
 
 complement of the predicate, it may generally be rendered 
 by an adverb, consisting of ia (before vowels bar) and the 
 proper preposition, followed by the infinitive with ju 
 (see 136, 2 b) : 
 
 2)er $nabe roar ftotj barcmf, ben 
 ^rciS gelDonnen $u fjaben 
 
 @ic beftanb barauf, mit un8 ^u 
 gefjeu 
 
 (5r madjte (Sinttjanbe bagegen, etiten 
 33evid)t iiber bieje Slngelegenljeit 
 gu ueroffentltdjen 
 
 (5r fanb uiel ^ergniigen baran, feine 
 $inber gu initerridjten 
 
 a. For this infinitive with ^lt, a subordinate clause in- 
 troduced by baft may often be substituted, and this should 
 be done whenever the logical subject of the verbal noun 
 is not identical with that of the governing verb : 
 
 He objected to my publishing (5r mad)te (Sinroenbungen bagegen, 
 an account of it bag id) einen 33ertd)t bauou Der* 
 
 offeritlidje 
 
 He rejoiced in his friend's ob- (Sr freutc ftrf) bariiber, baft fein 
 taining the position greunb bie ©telle crtjteit 
 
 The boy was proud of having 
 
 won the prize 
 She insisted upon going with 
 
 us 
 He objected to publishing an 
 
 account of this affair 
 
 He found great pleasure in 
 teaching his children 
 
 BJwerbs, 
 
 129. Any adjective or participle may, in its inflected 
 form, be used as an adverb; see 18, 3. 
 
 130. An adverb of place or direction generally appears 
 as the most direct complement of the finite verb. It 
 usually stands, therefore, at the end of the sentence (see 
 226): 
 
 I went out the next day 3d) ging ben anbern Sag au& 
 
80 ADVERBS. 
 
 In the case of compound tenses, however, the infinitive 
 or past participle stands last, and in subordinate clauses 
 the finite verb itself occupies that position; in either 
 case, the adverb immediately precedes the verb and is 
 then prefixed to it : 
 
 I shall go out to-morrow 3d) tterbe morgen au«get)en 
 
 I had gone out the day before 3d) roar ben £ag corner cmSge* 
 
 gangen 
 
 If I go out to-morrow 2Benn id) morgen cutSgelje 
 
 131. Numerous combinations of verbs with simple 
 adverbs of place or direction, especially ab, cm, auf, ctu3, 
 6ci, bitrcl), liber, urn, unter, have gradually acquired special 
 or derived meanings. Thus au^gel)cn go out, when applied 
 to persons, is now used only in the sense of go out of one's 
 house; au34retcn, originally meaning step out, is now used 
 almost exclusively in the sense of leave the ranks, leave a 
 society ; bitrdj-gcljen, originally meaning go through, now 
 means also run away; bcUftctjen, originally meaning stand 
 by, now means aid. Care should therefore be exercised 
 in the use of these simple adverbs of place, and more fre- 
 quently compound adverbs, containing a demonstrative 
 element like ba, f)er, or f)tn, should be substituted for 
 them, in the manner explained in 132-134, especially 
 when for the adverb a noun preceded by a preposition 
 may readily be substituted. Thus : 
 
 The conductor was not in the £)er jfottimftetft roar nid)t tm 2Ba* 
 
 car ; he had gone out gen ; er roar fytnauSgegcmgen 
 
 He stepped out (e. g. out of the (§r trat fyerauS 
 
 room) 
 He went through (e. g. through dv gtug l)inburd) 
 
 the city) 
 He stood by (e. g. near the (£x ftanb babei unb Iadjte 
 scene) and laughed 
 
ADVERBS. 81 
 
 132. In German, a distinction has to be made between 
 adverbs of place which express a situation, and adverbs 
 of direction, such as are used after verbs of motion, a dis- 
 tinction which is not always made in English : 
 
 Where does he live? SSo rooljnt cr? 
 
 He has never been there (§r tft me ta geroefen 
 
 I shall remain here five weeks 3d) roerbe fitnf SSodjen Ijter bfetben 
 
 Is he below? 3ft er unten? 
 
 But 
 
 Where (or whither) is he going? 2Bof)in geljt er ? or 2Bo gefyt cr l)in? 
 
 (see 134, 2) 
 
 He does not want to go there C?r null nid)t bovtljin gefyen 
 
 She came here five weeks ago (gte tarn bor fitnf SSodjen l)terl)er 
 
 He has gone below G?r ift Ijinuntergegangen 
 
 133. After verbs of motion, again, a distinction has to 
 be made, in German, according as the motion is from some 
 other place toward the speaker (or toward the place with 
 which he may temporarily identify himself), when an ad- 
 verb compounded with f)cr is usually employed, or is away 
 from the speaker (or the place with which he may tem- 
 porarily identify himself), toward some other place, when 
 an adverb compounded with (jilt is usually employed. 
 2)a, bovt there, Ijier here, and too where precede fjcr and Ijtn 
 in such compounds; the other adverbs of place follow: 
 
 She is coming here to-morrow (gie fommt morgett f)ierf)cr 
 
 She is going there next week <gte gcl)t nadjfie 2Bod)e bortljtn 
 
 Go in; go out ©eftt |incin; gefyt IjtnauS 
 
 Come in ; come out $ommt Ijerein; fommt fyeranS 
 
 Come down ; go down tommt Ijernnter; geljt Ijinunter 
 
 For details see Alphabetical List of Adverbs, etc., 142 fif. 
 
 134. 1. Except the compounds of too, which always 
 stand at the beginning of a clause, the adverbs com- 
 
82 ADVERBS. 
 
 pounded with t)cr and t)in, like the simple adverbs of 
 
 place and direction (see 130), usually stand, as the most 
 
 direct qualifiers of the verb, at the end of the clause, and, in 
 
 the cases in which the verb itself stands at the end of the 
 
 clause, they may be prefixed to it ; but the latter is not 
 
 done as regularly as with the simple adverbs of place, 
 
 and is done least often with the compounds of ba, bort 
 
 and Ijier: 
 
 He has not yet come out (£r ifl nod) tttdjt fjerauggefommen 
 
 I shall go there next spring 3d) toerbe udd)fieS gru^a^r bortt)tn 
 
 reijeu 
 
 2. 2)a, bort, l)ter and too may be separated from fyer and 
 l)in, the latter then standing, as the most direct comple- 
 ments of the verb, at the end of the clause : 
 
 Where do you come from? 2Bo fommfl bu tjcr? or SSoljer 
 
 fommft bu? 
 Where are you going? 23o gefyft b\i l)iu? or 2Bol)in gel)ft 
 
 bu? 
 
 3. §er and Ijin, and especially adverbs compounded 
 with them, are often used to strengthen adverbial phrases 
 consisting of a noun (or pronoun) preceded by a prepo- 
 sition : 
 
 All around the city 9ftng$ um bie ©tabt Ijerum 
 
 Far into the country SBeit inS 2cmb Ijinein 
 
 Out into the field 2luf$ getb l)tnau8 
 
 He drew his sword from its dx §og ba% <2>d)tt>ert cm8 ber ©d)etbe 
 
 sheath IjerauS 
 
 The flower-pot fell from the 2)er SBlumentopf fteloonbergenfter* 
 
 window-sill into the street ban! auf bie ©trafje fyinab 
 
 See 172, I, 2, and 182. II, 2. 
 
 135. Adverbs compounded with I)er or I) in, as well as 
 nouns preceded by such prepositions as express direction, 
 
ADVERBS. 83 
 
 may in themselves imply motion ; unless, therefore, it is 
 
 important that the manner of motion should be stated, 
 
 an infinitive or past participle of a verb of motion may be 
 
 omitted ; this omission is particularly common after the 
 
 modal auxiliaries (see 97) : 
 
 He could not get across (Sr fonnte nid)t fyiniiber 
 
 His mother would like to go ©erne Gutter modjte gern gu ifym 
 
 to him 
 
 He has gone to Australia (Sr ift nad) SluftraUen 
 
 136. Numerous demonstrative, relative and interroga- 
 tive adverbs are formed by prefixing the adverbs bet, Ijicr, 
 ioo f (before vowels bar, toor) to various prepositions : ba* 
 tnit, Ijtermtt, toomit; barunter, Ijterunter, luorunter; bagegen, 
 {jtergegen, toogegen, etc. These are much more frequently 
 used than their English equivalents therewith, herewith, 
 wherewith, etc. 
 
 1. They are used in place of pronouns governed by 
 prepositions and referring to things, not persons ; see 28. 
 
 2. The compounds of bet are used to place a subordinate 
 clause introduced by baf$, or an infinitive with ju, in the 
 same adverbial relation to the governing verb in which a 
 noun preceded by the corresponding preposition would 
 stand : er bcftcf)t auf unfever foforttgen 9titdfef)r he insists 
 on our immediate return ; cr beftcfjt barauf, ba$ fair f ofort 
 ^liriicffctjrcn (lit., ■ he insists on this : that we return at 
 once') he insists on our returning at once; er 6eftef)t 
 barauf, f ofort jurfidEjitfcfjvcn (lit., 'he insists on this: to 
 return at once ') he insists on returning at once. The 
 compounds of ba are, therefore, especially used : 
 
 a. When the governing verb requires to be construed 
 with a preposition (see Appendix B) : 
 
84 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 The ministry urgently demand- 
 ed the dissolution of Parlia- 
 ment 
 
 The ministry urgently demand- 
 ed that the king should dis- 
 solve Parliament 
 
 I reminded him of his promise 
 
 I reminded him that he had 
 promised to send me his la- 
 test book 
 
 3)a8 2ftinijlerium brang auf 2Iuf- 
 lofung be8 s #arlamentc8 
 
 2)a8 2ftiutftertum brang barauf, ba6 
 
 ber $onig ba8 ^arlament auflofen 
 
 fofle 
 3d) erimxerte tfyn an fein $erfpred)en 
 3d) erinncrte iljn baran, baft cr toer- 
 
 fpvodjeu l)atte, mir fein neueftes 
 
 $3ud) ^u fdjtden 
 
 A number of verbs, especially such as denote a state or 
 expression of feeling or emotion, may directly govern a 
 clause introduced by t>ctf3, but it is better to interpose a 
 suitable compound of ba : 
 
 2>er ©efangene beflagte fid) fiber 
 
 fd)led)te 23el)anbutng 
 2)er ©efangene beflagte ftd) [bar» 
 
 fiber], baft er fd)led)t beljanbelt 
 
 foorben fei 
 2)er anne $erl war fefyr banfbar 
 
 [bafiir], bag mir il)n befudjteu 
 3d) felme nitct) fbanad)], metne §ei* 
 
 mat ttriebergufefyen 
 
 The prisoner complained of ill- 
 treatment 
 
 The prisoner complained that 
 he had been ill-treated 
 
 The poor fellow was very grate- 
 ful that we came to see him 
 
 I long to see my native place 
 again 
 
 6. To render the English construction of a verbal noun 
 in -ing preceded by a preposition (see 128, 6) : 
 
 We are proud of being Ger- Sffitr ftnb ftotg baranf (see Appendix 
 
 mans 
 
 I am contented with your hav- 
 ing tried it once 
 
 I have thought of going to an- 
 other university next winter 
 
 B), 3)eutfd)e gu fein 
 3d) bin bamit gufrieben, baft bn e8 
 
 einmat toerjudjt tjaft 
 3d) t)abe baran gebad)t, nadjften 
 
 SBinter auf etne anbere Uni&erfttat 
 
 in ge^en 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 85 
 
 prepositions. 
 
 137. 1. Prepositions governing the Genitive: 
 
 anftatt or flatt instead of urn . . . NriUen for the sake of 
 
 aufcerljalb outside of mibefcfjabet without injury to, not- 
 
 bieffettS on this side of withstanding 
 
 fjalber for the sake of unfent, umuett not far from 
 
 jenfettS on the other side of ungeadjtet notwithstanding 
 
 innerljafb within unterftalb below 
 
 fraft by virtue of oermoge by means of 
 
 Icings along uermittelft, mittetfi by means of 
 
 lcwt according to rofiljrenb during 
 
 oberljdb above ujcgen on account of 
 
 trofc in spite of gufolge in accordance with 
 
 2. Prepositions governing the Dative: 
 
 cw8 out of, from ncid) after, according to 
 
 auger except, beside nadjft next to 
 
 bei near, with, by, at nebft, famntt together with 
 
 btnnen within (of time) feit since 
 
 gtetd) like t)on from, of, by 
 
 mit with $u to, at 
 
 The following are placed after their substantives : 
 
 entgegen against gu, in the sense of toward, in the 
 
 gegeniiber opposite to direction of 
 
 gemcift according to gufolge according to ; when placed 
 
 nacf), usually placed after its before its noun it requires the 
 
 noun when meaning accord- genitive 
 
 ing to gunuber contrary to 
 
 3. Prepositions governing the Accusative : 
 bi8 till, until oljne without 
 
 bitvd) through, by urn about, around, at, for 
 
 fiir for tniber against 
 
 gcgen against 
 
 4. The following prepositions govern the Accusative ■ 
 when direction toward an object or goal is to be expressed, 
 otherwise the Dative : 
 
86 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 an at, by, on 
 
 auf upon, on 
 
 Winter behind 
 
 in in, into 
 
 neben by the side of, by 
 
 Thus: 
 
 The fish was swimming in the 
 brook 
 
 The fish swam from the brook 
 into the lake 
 
 The book is lying on the table 
 
 I have laid the book on the 
 table 
 
 We could see to the very bot- 
 tom of the pond 
 
 An oil-painting hung over his 
 desk 
 
 The branches of this old tree 
 hung down over the wall so 
 that he could easily reach 
 them 
 
 An eagle was circling over the 
 lake 
 
 We rowed over the lake 
 
 fiber over, above, across 
 unter under, among 
 oor before 
 gttrifdjen between 
 
 2)cr gifd) |d)tt>amm in bem 93ad)e 
 
 2)er gifd) fdjroamm au8 bem 23ad)e 
 
 in ben ©ee 
 2)a« 23ud) liegt auf bem £ifdje 
 3d) f)abe ba« 33ud) auf ben fclfdj 
 
 getegt 
 2Bir fonnten bis auf ben ©runb be$ 
 
 £etd)e8 fefyen 
 (Sin Olgemalbe l)ing fiber feinem 
 
 $ttttt 
 3)ic Sfte btefeS alten 23aume8 Ijingen 
 
 fiber bte Waiter fyermeber, fo baf? 
 
 er fie letdjt erfaffen fonnte 
 
 (Sin Hbler fretfte fiber bem ©ee 
 Sir ruberten fiber ben ©ee 
 
 a. When used to express other than strictly local or 
 temporal relations, auf and iiber generally take the accu- 
 sative : 
 
 In this manner 
 
 A book on the history of the 
 Peasants' War 
 
 Stuf btefe SSeife 
 
 (Sin 33ud) fiber bte ©efd)itf)te be6 
 58auernfriege$ 
 
 138. In English, a preposition is sometimes placed 
 after the noun or pronoun to which it belongs, and 
 quite frequently, particularly in familiar discourse, it is 
 even placed at the end of the sentence. In German, 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 87 
 
 prepositions, excepting those mentioned in 135, 2, should 
 always precede their nouns or pronouns : 
 
 His garden he was particularly 2luf (einen ©arten war er befonberS 
 
 proud of ftotj 
 
 I asked him what they had 3d) fvagte ifnt, fiber tt)a8 (or tt)or* 
 quarrelled about fiber, see 28, 2) fie ftdj geftritten 
 
 flatten 
 a. A simple adverb of place or direction, however, 
 forming with a verb an idiomatic expression (see 131), 
 naturally stands at the end of the sentence : 
 He addressed him (5r rebete iljtt an 
 
 He began his work Qx fing fcine Arbeit an 
 
 He promised it to him (§r fagte e8 iljm gu 
 
 But 
 He said to him dx fagte ju iljm; see 68 
 
 v 
 
 Conjunctions. 
 
 1. Co-ordinating Conjunctions. 
 
 139. 1. a. Simple Connectives : 3l6er, fonbem (see 161, 
 II) but, afletn but, benn for, nber or, entmeber . . . ober 
 either . . . or, toebcr . . . noc^ neither . . . nor. Most of these 
 do not, as a rule, count in determining the place of the 
 finite verb ; see 217. 
 
 b. Adverbial Conjunctions, i. e. properly adverbs, chiefly 
 demonstrative, used to establish a logical relation with 
 the preceding sentence or clause and therefore often clas- 
 sified as conjunctions; they introduce independent sen- 
 tences, and should be immediately followed by the per- 
 sonal verb (see 214, 215). The most important are : 
 
 atfo therefore befto the with comparative; see 191 
 
 aud) also bodj, bennod) yet, still, however 
 
 aufeerbem besides folglid) consequently 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 ba there, then 
 
 bann then 
 
 bafjer, bafitr, barum, begfyatb, beg* 
 
 It) eg en thence, therefore, on 
 
 that account 
 barnad) thereafter 
 barauf thereupon 
 bagegen, bafjtngegen, Ijtngegen 
 
 on the other hand 
 bemuad), bemgemaft accordingly 
 
 inbeffen meanwhile, however 
 
 tnttfyin consequently 
 
 nad)f)er afterwards 
 
 nod) still, yet 
 
 fo so, thus, then 
 
 fonft else, otherwise, generally 
 
 tro^bem nevertheless 
 
 unterbeffen meanwhile 
 
 Dielme^r rather 
 
 Dormer previously 
 
 2. Subordinating Conjunctions. 
 2. These require the finite verb to stand at the end of 
 
 the clause (see 236). 
 al8 as, when, than 
 bettor before 
 big until 
 
 ba since, as, because 
 bcimit in order that 
 baft that, in order that 
 el)e before 
 falls in case 
 
 tnbem, inbeg, inbeffen while, as 
 je the with comparative ; see 
 
 191 
 nadjbem after 
 nun now that 
 
 The most important are : 
 
 ob if, whether 
 
 obgteid), obfd)on, obtnoljt although 
 
 feit, feitbem since 
 
 jo as before adjectives or adverbs, 
 
 see 152, 2 a 
 nngeadjtet notwithstanding 
 tnafyrenb while 
 tuenn if, when 
 toemt . . . audj, tnenn . . • gletd), 
 
 menu . . . fdjon although 
 met! because 
 ttrie how, as 
 
 140. After a temporal adverbial clause, bet is often 
 used to sum up the contents of the clause, introductory 
 to the principal clause ; f o is used similarly after conces- 
 sive and, occasionally, after causal and temporal clauses ; 
 in concessive clauses, jo is often strengthened by a follow- 
 ing bod) ; see 221 : 
 
 When he saw the policeman, 9118 er ben ^oligiften falj, [ba or fo] 
 he ran away lief er fort 
 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 89 
 
 If you say this, you do an in- SBenn bu bag fagft, [fo] tljuft bu 
 
 justice to your friend bctncm 5$™ un be llnved)t 
 
 Although he has never been in Dbgletd) er nie in 3)eutfcf)latib mar, 
 
 Germany, [yet] he speaks [fo] tyrttfjt cr bod) red)t gut 
 
 German very well 2)eutfd) 
 
 141. Subordinating conjunctions require finite verbs 
 in German : 
 
 If in town next Monday, I SScnn td) nadjften 9flontag in brr 
 
 shall call on you ©tabt bin, tocrbe id) ©ic auj* 
 
 fudjen 
 
 Although still young, he had Dbgletd) cr nod) jmtg toar, fo rjntte 
 
 acquired quite a reputation cr fid) bod) jdjon cincn giemlidjcn 
 
 as a painter $Ruf ai8 9ftater crworbeu 
 
 Since returning to the city, I @citbem id) ttucber in bcr @tabt 
 
 have learned of the death of bin, f)abe id) Don bcm £obc ciueS 
 
 an old friend alten grcimbeS geljort 
 
 When finished, this building SBcnn btcfcS ©ebciubc fcrtig ift, ttrirb 
 
 will be the largest in the city e8 ba8 grofjte in bcr <Stabt fcin 
 
 XEbe flDost flmportant Englisb B&verbs, prepo* 
 
 sitions an& Conjunctions, fn Blpbabetical 
 
 ©rber, witb tbeir Oerman Equivalents, 
 
 142. In English, the same word may sometimes be 
 used as a preposition, an adverb, and a conjunction, and, 
 more frequently, the same word may be used in two of 
 these three capacities. In German, this is less often the 
 case. It is therefore important to exercise care in trans- 
 lating these particles, so that a word which is used as a 
 conjunction may not be rendered by a word which is only 
 used as a preposition. Thus : 
 
90 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 After the performance {Prep.) 
 After the performance was 
 
 over (Conj.) 
 Three hours after (Adv.) 
 
 143. About. I. Adv. 1. 
 wmtjer : 
 
 He ran about 
 
 There was water all about 
 
 9?atf) ber SBorfteUung 
 
 Wadjbem bic SBorfteHung beenbet 
 
 mar 
 S)rei ©tunben nadjljer 
 
 = around, in a circle, fjcrum, 
 
 <£x lief umfjer, or Ijerum 
 (§3 toar SSaffer rings umfyer 
 
 2. = near, in ber Sftafye, t)ier l)eutm, ba Return : 
 
 He is about here somewhere 
 
 Whereabout 
 
 His whereabouts 
 
 He is about again (= he is in 
 
 this neighborhood again) 
 (= he is up again) 
 
 (5r ift l)ter trgenbtoo in ber Waty 
 
 2Bo, too Ijentm 
 
 @ein 2litfentl)alt3ort 
 
 (§r ift toieber l)ier in ber Wdty 
 
 (5r ift toieber aitf ben SBeinen 
 II. Prep. 1. = around, in a circle, urn, often strength- 
 ened by a following umfjer, or Return (see 134, 3), or by a 
 preceding rtng3, or by both : 
 
 [9ftug§] urn ba& §ctu$ [Ijerum] ift 
 
 tin ©arten 
 <£x lief urn ben 23aum fyerum 
 
 There is a garden all about the 
 
 house 
 He ran about the tree 
 
 2. = in (on) or about : 
 
 Books and papers were scat- 
 tered about the floor 
 
 The children played about the 
 yard 
 
 3. = of, itfcer : 
 
 He spoke about the origin of 
 the Faust legend 
 
 4. = with reference to, concerning, mit Skjug auf (with 
 ace.) : 
 
 I was wrong about the year of 3d) toar im 3rrtum mit 33egug auf 
 his birth fein ©ebitrtsjafyr 
 
 SBitdjer unb ^aptere lagen gerftreut 
 
 auf bem 33oben umfjer 
 S)ie $inber fjnetten auf bem £ofe 
 
 umljer 
 
 dx fpradj fiber ben Urfprung ber 
 gauftfage 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 91 
 
 5. = nearly, more or less, ungefafjr (adv.) : 
 
 He had about a hundred men 
 It was about 3 o'clock 
 She came about three o'clock 
 He is about to leave 
 
 (5r fyatte ungefafjr tymbert Wlami 
 (S3 roar ungefaljr 3 Ul)r 
 ©ie fam ungefa'ljr um brei U^r 
 (5r if* im 93egrtffe, abgureijcn 
 
 144. Above. I. Adv. Dben; after a verb of motion, 
 naclj oben, or fjinauf : 
 
 He is above 
 To go above 
 Over and above 
 
 The above; the above-men- 
 tioned 
 
 (§r ift oben 
 
 Wad) oben (or Ijinauf) geljen 
 
 Wodj obenbrein 
 
 25er obtge ; ber oben ertoalnate 
 
 II. Prep. 1. = over, higher than, fiber : 
 
 Above the level of the sea fiber ber 9fteere8oberflad)e 
 
 2. more than, fiber : 
 Above five thousand 
 
 fiber fiinftaufenb, or meljr at8 fimf* 
 taufenb 
 
 3. = beyond, beside, aufter : 
 
 Over and above what his busi- 9?odj auger bem, toa8 iljm fetn @e= 
 ness yields him fd)aft emtragt 
 
 4. Idioms: 
 
 Above all things (= first of all 
 
 things) 
 (= more than all other things) 
 Be above one (occupy a higher 
 
 position) 
 Those above me 
 Be above something 
 Above praise 
 It is above me 
 
 $or alien 2)ingen 
 
 fiber afleS 
 
 fiber jemanbem fieljen 
 
 2Mne SSorgefefcten 
 fiber ettr>a8 erfjaben fetn 
 fiber atteS 2ob erfyaben 
 2>a$ gefyt iiber tnetnen SBerjianb 
 
92 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 145. Across. I. Adv. Srii&en ; after a verb of motion, 
 Ijeru&er, fjtnuber (see 133) : 
 
 He sailed across to England (Sr fegelte mtf) (Sngfonb Ijtmiber 
 
 Come across and visit me lomm Ijeriiber unb befucfye mid) 
 
 II. Prep. 1. Denoting situation, auf ber anberen @ette, 
 jenfett3 : 
 
 The country across the great 3)a8 £anb jenfeit be8 grogen gluffeS 
 river 
 
 2. Denoting direction, after a verb of motion,* iiber, 
 
 often strengthened by tjeriikr, Ijimtber (see 134, 3) : 
 
 The bird flew across the brook £)er $ogel flog iiber ben 23adj Ijin* 
 
 iiber 
 We walked across the bridge 2Sir gittgeu iiber bie SBriicfe 
 
 3. = upon. 
 
 I come across him once in a 3d) begegne il)m gunieifen 
 
 while 
 
 I came across a difficult pas- §eute Sftorgen bin idj auf etne 
 
 sage this morning jcr)tt)iertge <SteEe geftogen 
 
 146. After. I. Adv. Sftadjijer, barauf, [pater, fytnterf)cr: 
 
 A few hours after (Sinige @tnnben \pixttx 
 
 Many years after Stfiele 3al)re uad)f)er 
 
 II. Prep. 1. Usually, nad) : 
 
 After the concert 9tad) bent (Concert 
 
 After three days Watf) bret Sag en 
 
 One after another (Siner nacb bent anbern, nadj em* 
 
 anber 
 After an old pattern Wa&i einent atten SJhifter 
 
 After all 2)od), nun bod), tro£ aUebem 
 
 2. = m accordance with, nadj, gemaft, jufolge, all three 
 usually following the noun. 
 
 3. Instead of using the preposition nad), the adverb 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 93 
 
 nctcf) may be added to the verb, which then takes the 
 simple dative : 
 
 The artist has fashioned this 
 
 lamp after an old pattern 
 I rode after (i. e. followed) him 
 
 as rapidly as I could 
 
 2)er $itnjHer I)at biefe ?ampe cincm 
 alten 3ftufter nadjgebilbet 
 
 3d) ritt if)m nad) fo frf>nett (see 152, 
 2 a) id) fonnte 
 
 4. After, with a verbal noun in -m#, should be ren- 
 dered by a subordinate clause introduced by nadjbem (see 
 128, 5): 
 
 After consulting a physician, 
 he decided to go to Karlsbad 
 
 III. Conj. 9?atf)bem: 
 
 After he had finished his stu- 
 dies he returned to America 
 
 s J?ad)bem er einen $rgt urn $at ge* 
 fragt fiatte, entfdjlojj er fid), nad) 
 $art8bab 311 gefyen 
 
 9?ad)bem er feine ©tubien beenbig* 
 Ijatte, fel)rtc er nad) 2lmerifa gu* 
 rllcf 
 
 147. 
 
 gegen : 
 
 Against 1. Prep. Ordinarily, gegen, toiber, tat* 
 
 We had to row against the 
 current 
 
 He studied law against his fa- 
 ther's wishes 
 
 He leaned against the pillar 
 
 2Bir mugten gegen ben ©trom 
 
 rubem 
 (Sr ftubterte bie 3?ed)te gegen ben 
 
 SSunfrf) feineS SBaterS, or bent 
 
 2Bunfd)e feineS Waters entgegen 
 (Sr leljnte ftdt) gegen {or an) ben 
 
 ^feller 
 
 2. = in expectation of, looking forward to : 
 
 I warn you against his treach- 3d) roarne ©ie tjor feiner Sreuloftg* 
 
 ery feit 
 
 I am prepared against an at- 3d) bin auf einen 2utgriff Dorbereitet 
 
 tack 
 
 148. Ago. Adv. : 
 
 Many years ago 
 A few minutes ago 
 
 Bor otelen 3aljren 
 $or roenigen 2ftinuten 
 
94 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 A week (fortnight) ago $or ad)t (Dier$el)n) £agen 
 
 It is not very long ago (gg ift nod) nid)t langc \)tx 
 
 It may have been thirty years (g« mag nun breifjig 3af)re fyei teitt, 
 ago, when, etc. cu% :c. 
 
 149. Along. I. Adv. §tn, baljtn; l)er, baf)er (see 133): 
 
 X^ He walked along buried in 3n tiefen ©ebcmfen ging er baljtn 
 J? ^ thought 
 
 &( fvHe came along whistling a Sin Sltebdjen pfetfenb, !am cr baljer 
 song 
 
 Take him along with you Sftimm iljit mit; see 209. 1 a 
 
 Go along ! $atf e bid) ! or gort mit bir ! 
 
 II. Prep. Sanger 
 
 Along the railroad, we saw ScingS ber (Sifenbaljn faljen ttrir oiete 
 many traces of the inunda- ©puren ber Uberfd)tt)emmwtg 
 tion 
 
 a. Instead of the preposition Iang3, the adverb enttcmg 
 may be used, following either an accusative denoting way 
 or distance (see 79, 2), or a noun dependent on a prepo- 
 sition; enticing is most frequently used with verbs of 
 motion : 
 
 We walked along the bank of SSir gingen ba& Ufer {or cm htm 
 the brook Ufer) beg 33adje8 entlang 
 
 150. Although. Conj. Dbgteid), ofifdjon, obtoot)t, toerm 
 and) (even if) ; and) is generally separated from toemt by 
 the subject, and sometimes also by other elements of the 
 clause; in stately discourse, gteid) and fdjott are often 
 separated by 06 ; see 140, 220 : 
 
 Although this first attempt Obgtetd) ber erfrc SSerfndj (or oh ber 
 
 failed, he was not discour- erfte SBerfnd) gleid)) miglang, fo 
 
 aged toerlor er bod) ben 9ftut nidjt 
 
 Although he may not like it, SBenn e8 iljm and) nid)t gefaflt, fo 
 
 he will have to submit nurb er ftd) bod) fiigcn muff en 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 95 
 
 151. Around. Adv. and Prep. See About, 143. 
 
 152. As. Conj. 1. In comparisons, the demonstrative 
 
 as, for which so may often be substituted, should always 
 
 be translated by f o : 
 
 As proud as a king ©0 ftotg tt)ic eiu ftMg 
 
 As soon as possible ©obatb al$ mogtid) 
 
 a. Of course, fo may be omitted under the same cir- 
 cumstances under which as may be omitted in English : 
 Proud as a Spaniard ©tola toi e zw ©panier 
 
 2. The relative as of a comparison may be rendered by 
 
 ate or luie ; as a rule, luie refers to quality and manner, 
 
 and denotes similarity ; ate refers to quantity and degree, 
 
 and denotes identity : 
 
 As beautiful as a flower @o fd)bn toie cine SBhime 
 
 As heavy as lead ©o fdjroer al8 231ei 
 
 He was received as it behooved G?r nntrbe empfangeit, nne e8 cincm 
 
 a king $otuge gebiifyrte 
 
 I read as much as I could 3d) lag fo Diet, al8 id) !onntc 
 
 a. After an adjective or adverb preceded by fo, the ate 
 
 or ftrie that would naturally introduce a following clause 
 
 of comparison may be omitted without any other change 
 
 in the clause : 
 
 I shall come as soon as I can 3d) oierbe fommcn fobalb [at8] id) 
 
 fatm 
 As far as I understand it ©o toeit [tt)ie] id) e8 oerjtelje 
 
 b. Such clauses, either with or without audj (see 165, 3), 
 
 are often used in a concessive sense : 
 
 As rich as he is, (however rich @o retd) [at$, or fine] er [audj] tft, 
 he may be,) yet he is not [fo] ifi er bod) nidjt gUitflid) 
 happy 
 
 (See 170, 2.) 
 
96 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 c. As if, as though is aU tueitn, aU 06, or tote tocnn ; 
 
 after al§, the usual substitution of the interrogative order 
 
 for the. conjunctions toenn or 06 may be made (see 171, 2): 
 
 He looked as if (as though) he ($r Jal) au§, al8 ob (or al§ toenn, or 
 had been sick ttrie toenn) er franf getoefen toare 
 
 (see 118, 2), or al8 tt?are er franf 
 getoefen 
 
 3. J.s, expressing identity, is always al$ ; see 9 : 
 
 They received him as their ©ie entpfmgen iljn at$ il)ren tonig 
 
 king (£. e. he was to be their 
 
 king) 
 
 As an American (i. e. being an 9H8 teerifaner ift er natMidj ein 
 
 American) he naturally be- $nl)anger ber repubUfcmifdjen 9te* 
 
 lieves in the republican form gierongSform 
 
 of government 
 
 He went into the camp of the (Sr ging aid ©piort tn8 feinbiicfye 
 
 enemy as a spy £ager 
 
 He disguised himself as a sol- (§:r toerf leibete fidj aid @o(bat 
 
 dier 
 
 4 The conjunction as, when used in a purely temporal 
 sense, and referring to an individual act or condition in 
 the past, is ctt£, more rarely one : 
 
 As I opened the door, I saw 2U$ (or toie) id) Me Zt\uv aufmatfjte, 
 him passing falj id) tf)tt Doriibergeljen 
 
 5. When expressing cause (often combined with time), 
 as should be translated by ba : 
 
 As he had no money, he had to 2)a er f ein ©elb Ijatte, mugte er gu 
 
 stay at home £cwfe bleiben 
 
 As the art of printing was not S)a bie SBndjbruderfnnft nodj nidjt 
 
 yet invented, books were erfnnben toar, fo toaren 23iid)cv git 
 
 very expensive at that time jener £tit fe^r teuer 
 
 6. In the sense of as soon as, as fast as, as should be 
 rendered by fofcalb (see 2 a), foune, or tote : 
 
ADVERKS, ETC. 97 
 
 As the printed sheets come ©obctfb bit gebrutften 93ogea au§ 
 from the press, they are ber $reffe fommen, ttjcrbeu fie ge* 
 dried and folded trodnet unb gefaltet 
 
 7. According as, je nacljbcm : 
 
 The prince generally granted 2)er prf* pflegte fotdje ©efucfye $u 
 
 or refused such requests, ac- benriUtgen ober gu tterroeigem, je 
 
 cording as he was in good or liadjbem er gut ober libel gefaunt 
 
 bad humor roar 
 
 153. At. Prep. 1. = close ly, art, bet : 
 
 At the window %m genfter 
 
 At the table $m SHfdje 
 
 At the door %\\ ber 5£ljur 
 
 2. = in or about, auf, particularly when speaking of 
 
 large buildings, public places, institutions, and gatherings : 
 
 At the castle 2luf bem ©djtoffe, auf ber SBurg 
 
 At the city hall 2Utf bem $cttljcmfe 
 
 At the post-office 2luf ber $oft 
 
 At the court-house 9luf bem ©erid)t 
 
 At the market 5tuf bem 2Jtartt 
 
 At the university 9Utf ber Uuiberjttat 
 
 At the exhibition 2tuf ber 2tu§ftetlung 
 
 At the synod Sluf ber ©t)nobe 
 
 At the ball 5luf bem «atte 
 
 3. at the house of, bet : 
 
 At my friend's 23ei meinem greunbe 
 
 4. Before names of towns, in, more rarely jit : 
 At Wetzlar 3n (or ju) SSefclar 
 
 5. = toward: 
 
 He rushed at him (gr fliirjte ouf ilm lo8, or auf ttm gu 
 
 He threw a stone at him (Sr roarf mit einem ©teiue nad) ifym 
 
 6. To express the time of day, urn : 
 
98 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 At what time are you coming ? 
 
 Urn roietriet UI)r (or um roetrf)e 3eit, 
 more rarely gu roeldjer gett) 
 fommft bu? 
 
 Um fteben Utjr 
 
 Urn f)db fteben Utjr 
 
 Um ein SBiertel [auf] fiinf 
 
 Um brei SBtertel [auf] fttnf 
 
 3u 2ftittag, or mittagS ; see 60 
 3n ber 9?acf)t, or nad)t8 
 3u ber 2)ammerung 
 
 At seven o'clock 
 At half past six 
 At a quarter past four 
 At a quarter of five 
 
 But 
 At noon 
 At night 
 At dawn 
 
 7. After verbs denoting feelings or emotions, iifcer : 
 
 He wondered at the sight <§r rounberte fict) itber ben $nbUtf 
 
 She was grieved at his ingrati- ©ie roar befiimmert uber feine Un* 
 tude ban!bar!eit 
 
 8. Idioms: 
 
 at the age of im 2Uter toon 
 
 at all iibertjaupt 
 
 not at all gar nidjt 
 
 nothing at all gar ntdjtS 
 
 at the beginning im (am) 2ln* 
 
 fange, anfangS, anfangltd) 
 at church in ber $ird)e 
 at a command auf einen 33efe^l 
 at court t>or ©eridtjt 
 at dinner beim 2ftittageffen 
 at an end gu (Snbe 
 at the end am (Snbe, gute^t 
 at all events auf jeben gall, 
 
 jebcnfatts 
 at my expense auf meine Soften 
 at fault im Unredjt 
 at first guerft 
 at home gu $aufe 
 at last gutefct 
 at least roentgens 
 at length gulefct, enbUd) 
 at liberty in greifyeit 
 
 at most IjbdjftenS 
 
 at peace in grieben 
 
 at your pleasure nad) betnem SBe* 
 
 Iteben 
 at that price gu jeuem $retfe 
 at the risk of his life mit ©efafyr 
 
 feineS 2eben8 . 
 at the risk of losing his friendship 
 
 auf bie ©efafyr l)iu, feine greunb* 
 
 frfjaft gu berlteren 
 at school in ber ©djute 
 at sea auf ©ee, auf ber ©ee, gur 
 
 ©ee 
 at the theater im Sweater 
 at times juroeilen 
 at any time gu jeber $eit 
 at no time niemalS 
 at supper beim Slbenbeffen 
 at table bet £tfd)e 
 
 at that time gu jener £tit 
 at work an ber Arbeit 
 
 
\ 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 99 
 
 154. Because. I. Conj. SBeil, bet: 
 
 He cannot come, because he is (Sr fann nid)t lotmnen, toett (or bo) 
 sick er franf ijl 
 
 II. Because of. Prep. SBegen: 
 
 He could not come, because of (5r fonntc toegen be8 SftegenS nutyt 
 the rain fommcn 
 
 155. Before. I. Adv. 1. Of place, born ; after a verb 
 of motion, Dorcm. 
 
 Before and behind $om unb tyinten 
 
 2. Expressing time, uortjer, friitjcr, efjcr, fdjon, fcretfcS: 
 
 He had been there before (Sr War fdjott frii^cr bageroefen 
 
 This had never happened be- 2)ie8 ttmr nod) nte gefdjeljen 
 fore 
 
 II. Prep. 1. Usually, uor: 
 
 Before the house $or bent £aufe 
 
 The servant stepped before him 2)er 3)iener trat Dor tljn 
 
 Before sunrise 23or <Sonnenaufgang 
 
 2. Before with a verbal noun in -m^ should be ren- 
 dered by a subordinate clause introduced by one of the 
 conjunctions named below; see 118, 5. 
 
 III. Conj. gfje, uorbem, bettor : 
 
 He played the violin before he (§r foiette btc ©eige, elje er lefen 
 could read fonnte 
 
 156. Behind. I. Adv. §tnten; when denoting direc- 
 tion, nad) fjtnten : 
 
 I saw enemies before and be- 3d) fal) geinbe com unb Ijinten 
 
 hind * 
 
 From behind $on Ijinten 
 
 I sent a servant behind 3d) fd)icfte einen 2)iener ttad) Ijinten 
 
 He left his wife behind (§r Ueg fein SScib guriicf 
 
 Look behind yourself <2>iel) bid) urn 
 
 You are still far behind £)u bift nod) IPeit priid 
 
iOO ADVERfcS, ETC. 
 
 II. Prep. 1. §inter: 
 
 The robber was lying in wait £)er dauber latterte Winter bem 
 
 behind the tree 33anme 
 
 He took refuge behind the rock (5r fliid)tete ftd) Winter ben gelfen 
 
 2. Sometimes, behind may be expressed by the adverb 
 
 mid), the verb then taking a simple dative (see 70) : 
 
 She is not behind her sister in ©ie fleljt Ujrer ©djtueftev an gleifj 
 industry nid)t nad) 
 
 157. Below. I. Adv. Unten ; when expressing direc- 
 tion, narf) unten, l)tnunter, tjerunter (see 133) : 
 
 You will find Mr. S. below ©ie merben £errn ©. unten finben 
 
 The captain has gone below S)er $apitcin tft nad) unten (or f)in* 
 
 unter) gegangen 
 Come below ! $ommt Ijerunter ! 
 
 II. Prep. Unter: 
 
 Below the bridge Unter ber (or bie, see 127, 4) 23rMe 
 
 Below cost Unter bem ^oftenpreife 
 
 Below his dignity Unter feiner SBiirbe 
 
 Below criticism Unter aEer $ritif 
 
 158. Beside. Prep. 1. = by the side of neben : 
 
 She sat down beside her mother ©te je(3te ftd) neben tljre aflutter 
 
 2. = over and above, outside of (usually besides), aufcer : 
 
 Besides the doctor, there were Sluger bem $U*gte roaren nod) fiinf 
 
 five persons in the room ^erfonen im 3itnmer 
 
 Nobody besides myself Sftiemanb auger mir, or ntemanb 
 
 alg id) 
 
 3. Beside (or besides) with a verbal noun in -ing should 
 be rendered by a subordinate clause 'introduced by anfter 
 bak (see 128, 5) : 
 
 Besides refusing to pay the Stufjerbem baft er fid) tneigerte, bie 
 bill, he also insulted me $ed)nung &u beaten, beleibigte 
 
 er midj nod) 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 101 
 
 4. Figuratively: 
 Beside one's self with rage 
 
 5Iu6er fid) t)or SButf) 
 
 159. Besides. I. Adv. UberbieS, aufcerbem : 
 
 Besides, he is my friend UberbieS ift er metn greunb 
 
 Nobody besides (i. e. nobody Niemanb anberS, jonft niemanb 
 else) 
 
 II. Prep. See Beside, 2, 3. 
 
 160. Beyond. I. Adv. 2)aru6er l)mcut3, toetter (jinau£ : 
 
 He shot much beyond (5r fdjog tt»eit bariibcr fyxiaM 
 
 They live far beyond ©ie tt)ol)iten Diel tt)eiter fyinauS 
 
 II. Prep. 1. = on the other side jenfeit§ ; after a verb 
 expressing motion, iiber, often strengthened by a follow- 
 ing IjtnctuS (see 134, 3) : 
 
 Beyond this forest 3enfettS btefeS SBalbeS, or Ijintcr 
 
 biefem SSalbc 
 Beyond the sea 3etrjeit§ be$ 3fteere8 
 
 He shot beyond the mark @r fdf)og fiber ba8 3W fyinaug 
 
 2. = outside of, except, cwfter : 
 
 Beyond his nearest relatives, Stager feinen ncidjften SBerttmnbten 
 nobody was admitted ttmrbe niemanb gugelaffen 
 
 3. Idioms: 
 
 Beyond belief, beyond credit 
 Beyond dispute, beyond doubt 
 
 Beyond description, beyond 
 
 expression 
 That is beyond me 
 Beyond measure 
 
 Beyond my reach 
 Beyond recovery 
 
 UngfcmbUd) 
 
 Dime 3tt)eifet, tme alien Btvttftl, 
 
 ungttjeifefl)aft, unftreitig 
 UnbejdjreibUdj, unjagUd) 
 
 £>a« ger)t iiber meine iBegriffc 
 Uber bie Wlafyn, iiber alle Wlaftm, 
 
 ubermagtg 
 Hufcer meinem $3eretd)e 
 Unrettbar 
 
102 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 161. But. I. Prep. 1. = except, aitfter, aU : 
 
 I speak no language but Eng- 3d) fpredje nur (Snglifd), or nid)t8 
 lish ate (SngUfd), or feine ©pradje 
 
 auger (Suglifd) 
 
 But for him, I should have 2Benn er nid)t gettefen tocire, tnarc 
 fallen id) gef alien 
 
 2. = only, nur; erft (see 198, 2): 
 
 He had but a few pennies in (Sr Ijatte nur roentge pfennig e in 
 
 his pocket ber Xafdje 
 
 He had but half finished his (Sr Ijatte feine Arbeit erft Ijalb »ol= 
 
 work, when he was called lenbet, at« er abgerufen ttntrbe 
 
 away 
 
 II. Conj. Slber, fonbern. Two ideas absolutely exclud- 
 ing one another are contrasted by jonberrt, hence fonbern 
 can be used only after a negative ; two ideas forming a 
 contrast, but not absolutely excluding one another, are 
 contrasted by ctber : 
 
 Not large, but small -Kid)! grog, fonbern fleiu 
 
 Small, but pretty $Iein, aber fyiibfd) 
 
 This is not French, but Italian 2)ie8 ift nidjt grangbftfd), fonbern 
 
 StatiattW 
 This is French, but very poor 2)ie8 ift gran$oftfd), aber fefjr fd)led)* 
 French tee granjoftfd) 
 
 162. By. I. Adv. 1. = close by, hard by [bttf)t] babet, 
 
 [bidjt] baneben, [bidjt] baran : 
 
 He stood by and laughed (§r ftanb babei nnb ladjte 
 
 Those standing by 2)ie Umftefyenben 
 
 2. = past : borbet, ooruber : 
 
 The captain rides by every day £)er §auptmann rette. jeben Sag 
 
 Dorbet, or fcoriiber 
 The passers-by 2>ie SBoriibergefyenben 
 
 3. 
 
 By and by 9?ad)ften8, balb, aUmd^Iig 
 
 By the by 2tyropo8, nebaujer 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 103 
 
 II. Prep. 1. = near by, close by, by the side of, bet, an, 
 iteben : 
 
 By the bridge %xi ber SBrutfe 
 
 He sat by his friend (§r fag bei (or neben) feinem greunbe 
 
 After a verb expressing motion, bet should not be used. 
 
 2. = on or before : 
 
 It must be finished by Monday (58 mug am {or Dor) 2ftontag fcrtig 
 
 fein 
 He must be back by 6 o'clock (5r mug urn {or oor) 6 Uljr gurud* 
 
 fein 
 By this time he was thorough- (5r toat {efct {or mtttlerttmle) tooU* 
 ly tired pnbig ermattct 
 
 3. = past : an, bet . . . borbet, tooruber : 
 
 We sailed by a lighthouse SBtr fegelten an einem 2eud)tturm 
 
 Doriiber, or oorbet #^. 
 
 4. = by way of, fiber : / 
 I came by Strassburg 3d) bin xiber ©trafibnrg gefommen 
 
 5. = by means of, burd) : 
 
 He sent the letter by a mes- <£x fanbte ben S3rief burd) cincn 
 
 senger 93oten 
 
 The church was destroyed by £)ie $ird)e ttmrbe burd) geuer ger* 
 
 fire ftbrt 
 
 By practice 2)urd) Ubung 
 
 6. To denote the agent, after a passive verb, Don, or, 
 unless the verb expresses feeling or emotion, bitrdj; to 
 denote the author of a book or a work of art, t)on : 
 
 He was esteemed by all who (5r ttmrbe toon alien, bie iljn tannten, 
 
 knew him gead)tet 
 
 The castle of Heidelberg was 2)a8 §eibetberger ©djtog ttmrbe Don 
 
 destroyed by the French ben (or burd) bie) grangofen ger* 
 
 ftort 
 This poem is by Schiller 3)iefe« ©ebidjt ift Don @d)iKer 
 
104 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 7. = according to, nad) : 
 
 By my watch Wad} meiner Uljr 
 
 By your description Wad) beiner Mugabe 
 
 8. To express measure or number : 
 
 They sell chickens by the 2Jten oerfauft juuge §iiljuer nadj 
 
 pound bem $fmtb 
 
 By the dozen (i e. several 2)u£eubn)eife, or \a Smfceubeu 
 
 dozens) 
 
 By the hundred #uuberttt)etfe, or $u £uuberteu 
 
 , a. To express a difference in measure or number, use 
 urn, or simply the accusative (see 79, 1) : 
 
 He is older than his sister by (§r ift [urn] 10 3al)re alter al8 feme 
 
 ten years ©djtuefter 
 
 We were ahead by one boat- 2Bir toctren [urn] eine 33ootlciuge 
 
 length toorauS 
 
 9. By, with a verbal noun in -ing, should be rendered 
 
 by a subordinate clause introduced by tnbem or baburd) 
 
 ba$ (see 128, 5) : 
 
 He aroused the sympathy of (gr erroedte bct8 Sftitletb ber 23iirger, 
 
 the citizens by pretending to inbem {or baburd) baft) er oorgab 
 
 be an old soldier er totire ein alter @olbat 
 
 10. Idioms: 
 
 • by birth toon ©eburt by means of mitteljt 
 
 by chance burtf) 3"faH, gnfcilCig by no means auf feinen gall, fei* 
 
 by day bei £age, day by day, neStoegS 
 
 £ag fiir Xag know by name bem Sftamen nad) 
 
 by degrees aEmafylid) fennen 
 
 by experience an$ (Srfaljrung by name of tautens 
 
 by force mit ©eroalt one by one einer natf) bem anberrt 
 
 by hand mit ber §anb by profession t>ou SBeruf 
 
 by heart auSroeubtg by one's self fur ftd) 
 
 by land m Xante by trade Dou ©etuerbe, bem ©e* 
 
 by letter briefttd) merbe uad) 
 
 little by little aumcifylid) » by way of -roeife ; by way of 
 
 by all means auf jeben gall, auf trial toerfud)§roeife 
 
 aUe gaUe, jebeufalls by the way beilciuftg 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 105 
 
 163. Down. Adv. Unten ; after a verb of motion, ijitt- 
 
 itrtter, fjtnctb, fjerunter, fyerab (see 133) : 
 
 My sister is down stairs 9fteine ©d)me(ter ifl unten 
 
 She came down stairs (Sic fam fyerunter 
 
 She came down the stairs ©ie fam bie Xxtppt fyerunter 
 
 The stone rolled down the 2)er ©tein rotlte ben SBerg Ijimmter, 
 mountain fyinab 
 
 164. Either. I. Pron. See 40. 
 
 II. Conj. 1. Hither . . . or, enttoeber . ♦ . ober ; see 217 : 
 
 I shall spend next summer SRadjften @ommer roerbe id) cut* 
 
 either in England or in Nor- roeber in (Sngtanb obcr in 9^or* 
 
 way meg en gubrtngen 
 
 Either you must depart at (gntroeber mugt bu (or entroeber, bu 
 
 once, or you will arrive too mugt) fogleid) abreifen, ober bu 
 
 late fommft (see 108) gu tycit Ijm 
 
 2. Not . . . either, ctud) mcf)t ; 
 
 It is true, I cannot do it ; but G?8 ift roaljr, id) !ann e8 nidjt (see 
 
 you cannot do it either 97), bu aber audi) nid)t 
 
 Columbus had only three ships, (£olumbu8 Ijatte nur bret @d)iffe 
 
 and not very good ships unb nod) ntd)t einmal fe^r gute 
 either 
 
 165. Ever. Adv. 1. = at any time, je, jemalS : 
 If you ever do this again SSenn bu bie§ je ttueber t^ufl 
 
 2. = at all times, for ever, tmmer, auf immer, auf ettrig : 
 Ever your friend Charles $uf immer 2)ein gremtb $art 
 
 3. After an interrogative or relative pronoun or adverb 
 
 (often -soever), and), ctucf) immer, and) nur, nur tmmer; 
 
 these particles may immediately follow the pronoun or 
 
 adverb, but more often other words intervene : 
 
 Whosoever may have said this 2Ber Me8 nur immer gefagt fyaben 
 was mistaken mag, ijat ftd) geirrt 
 
106 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 Wherever he may be, I shall $5o er and) fein mag, idj toerbe (see 
 
 find him 220) iljn ftnben 
 
 From whichever side you may 23on meldjer @eite man jtdj auty 
 
 approach this wonderful immer bie(em ttmnber&oUen 93ane 
 
 building, the impression is nafyt, ber (Sinbrucf ift iibermaitU 
 
 overwhelming genb 
 
 a. "With less emphasis, whosoever may be translated by 
 jeber ber (or toetdjer), a He bie (or toe(d)e), whenever by jebe^ 
 mat toemt, wherever by uberall too, etc. 
 
 J. For however and ei;er so, see 170, I, 2. 
 
 166. For. I. Prep. 1. = in place of, for the benefit 
 
 of, in favor of, fur : 
 
 I will pay for you 3d) roW fiir bid) begdjlen 
 
 I have spoken for you 3d) Ijabe fiir bid) gefprodjen 
 
 I am for free-trade 3d) bin fiir ben greifyanbel 
 
 a. After a transitive verb accompanied by a direct ob- 
 ject, for in this sense may often be rendered by the " da- 
 tive of interest " ; see 72. 
 
 2. = in exchange for, fiir r um : 
 
 He bought a pair of boots for (§r fcmfte ein $aar ©tiefeftt fnr 
 
 fifteen marks fiinf je^n Wlaxt 
 
 For a low price Um einen geringen <PreiS 
 
 For little money Um toentg ©elD 
 
 3. = as, ate, fur, jit (see 76) : 
 
 I learn for certain 3d) l)ore ctt8 gang gemig 
 
 I took him for an Englishman 3d) r)ieXt ilm fiir einen (Sngtcinber 
 
 The workmen chose him for 5£)ie 2Irbeiter rocifylten if)n 311 tljrem 
 
 their leader 5Xnfiir)rer 
 
 4. To denote aim, purpose, toegeu, fjatber (following the 
 noun) : 
 
 They killed him for his money ©ie toteten ityx feineS ©elbeS tnegen, 
 
 or Ijalber 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 107 
 
 a. After a verb expressing motion, nai) : 
 
 We left for New York in the %m $benb reiflcn toir narf) 9?ett> 
 
 evening $ort ab 
 
 She went for a doctor ©ie ging nad) cinem Hr$te 
 
 He sent for his overcoat (5r fdjicf te nadj jeinem fiberrocfe 
 
 5. To denote cause, reason, toegen ; before nouns denot- 
 ing feeling or emotion, bor : 
 
 The judge was respected for 2)er 9Ud)ter ftmrbe toegen feiner 
 his honesty and his wisdom $Kecf)tfd)affenf)eit unb feiner $tug* 
 
 l)cit gcadjtet 
 
 a. Before nouns denoting emotions, nor : 
 
 He could hardly speak for joy (Sr fonnte uor S^ube faum fpredjen 
 
 For pain SSor ©Emergen 
 
 For grief SSor Summer 
 
 For laughing $or £ctd)en 
 
 For pleasure 33or SBergmigen 
 
 6. To denote time. A. Time elapsed. Use the ac- 
 cusative with or without a strengthening adverb (see 80, 
 2 and a) : 
 
 The Saxons and Danes fought S)ie ©adjfen unb 2)anen fantyften 
 for many years toiele 3al)re [tyinburd), or lang] 
 
 a. To denote the length of time which an action or 
 condition has, or had, continued, use the same construc- 
 tion as above, or the preposition fett; see 106: 
 
 I have been waiting here for 3d) umrte l)ter [feit] brct ©tunben 
 three hours 
 
 B. Time to elapse. Generally auf : 
 
 I am going to France for six 3d) gefje auf fed)8 SBodjen nadj 
 
 months granfreid) 
 
 I am going to France for the 3d) gefye nad) grcmfreidj, urn ben 
 
 winter Winter bort ^ubringen 
 
108 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 7. For, with a verbal noun in -ing (see 128, 5), should 
 be translated by a subordinate clause introduced by luetl 
 or baf iir bafy, in case for expresses cause, and by um . . . ju 
 with the infinitive, or according to 128, 2, in case for ex- 
 presses purpose: 
 
 The ministry was criticised for 
 not taking immediate action 
 
 I have engaged a man for pack- 
 ing my books 
 
 8. Idioms: 
 
 for all that trofc aUebem 
 
 once for all ein fur atte 2ftale 
 
 as for me ma8 mid) betrifft 
 
 for example gum 23eift)iel 
 
 for ever auf immev 
 
 for fear of cm8 gurd)t t>or 
 
 for the future iu gufuuft, gu* 
 
 funftig 
 for good auf immer 
 for life auf SebeuSgeit, lebeuS* 
 
 (anglicf) 
 
 II. Conj. SDenrt (see 217) : 
 
 The king sent his son, for he 
 himself was too old and 
 feeble 
 
 Tlan tabelte ba% 2ftinifterium, roeit 
 (or bafiir, baft) e§ ntdjt fogleid) 
 Sftagregelu ergriffen fyatte 
 
 3d) fyabe mir eiueu Wlaxm gum diiu 
 patfen meiner 23ud)er gemietet, 
 or ... gemietet, um metne 23iid)er 
 eingupacfen 
 
 for the life of me fur mciu I'eben 
 line for line 3eite fur geile 
 for the love of him iljm gu £iebe 
 it is not for me to judge eg ge* 
 
 biiljrt-nur md)t, gu rid) ten 
 for the moment augenblicfftdj 
 for nothing um foil ft 
 for the present gegenroartig 
 for the sake of um . . ♦ rottten 
 for want of ftitf 2ft angel on 
 for all the world like gerabe rote 
 
 £>er 
 bcnn er 
 fdjroad) 
 
 fanbte jeiuen ©oljn, 
 felbft roar gu alt uub 
 
 167. From. Prep. 1. Usually uon, cm3 (out of), often 
 strengthened by a suitable adverb (see 134, 3) : 
 
 I once walked from Munich to 
 
 Vienna 
 I am from Vienna 
 Farzival drew his sword from 
 
 its sheath 
 He fell from his chair 
 From principle 
 
 3d) biu eiumal gu guge oon 2ftim= 
 djen nad) SBien gegaugeu 
 
 3d) biu au§ {more rarelyoon) SBSien 
 
 ^Sargioal gog ba§ ©djroert an& ber 
 @rf)eibe [fjeraug] 
 
 (§r pel oom ©ttttye [fyerunter] 
 
 3lu« ©ruubfa^ 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 109 
 
 a. In the sense of beginning with, beginning at, from 
 should be translated by bon ... an ; an may be omitted 
 before b\$ to: 
 
 From Passau to Linz the roads SBon ^affait [an] bi§ nad) £ing 
 
 were very good ttmren bte SSege fetyr gut 
 
 From that time he grew $on jener ,3eit an ttmrbe er ftarfer 
 stronger 
 
 From my childhood SSon meiner tfinbljeit an, or auf 
 
 2. = by, according to, nacf) : 
 
 To judge by his looks ©einem $u8fef)en nad) gu urteiten 
 
 3. After verbs denoting removal, the simple dative 
 should be used ; see 69. 
 
 4. After verbs expressing concealment, bor; after verbs 
 expressing protection, bor or gegen : 
 
 She concealed her troubles ©ie l>erl)eimtid)te Hjreit Summer 
 
 from her friends t)or ifyren greunbinneu 
 
 An umbrella protects us from 2)er Sftegenjd)trm fd)u£tun8 toor bcm 
 
 the rain (or gegen ben) Sftegen 
 
 168. Hardly. See Scarcely, 187. 
 
 169. Hence. Adv. 1. = from this point, [from] hence, 
 bon bier, bon ha : 
 
 Let us go hence Safjt un§ Don I)ier fortgeljen 
 
 He sailed to Genoa, [from] • (Sr fufyr nad) ©enua, bon ba nad) 
 hence to Marseilles 2Jterfeitle8 
 
 2. = from this time : 
 
 A week hence ; a year hence 3n einer 2Sod)e; in einem 3al)re 
 
 3. = for this reason, bal)er, be3f)aI6, be^toegen : 
 
 He is faithful to his friends, (Sr bleibt feinen grennben treu, ba- 
 hence they are also faithful fyer ftnb jte aud) iljm treu 
 to him 
 
110 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 170. However. I. Adv. 1. = in whatever manner, 
 
 tote, tt)ie and), ttrie and) tmmer, tote ctudj nur, tote nur immer ; 
 
 see 165, 3, and 220 : 
 
 However he may do it, it will SSie er e§ and) anfangen mag, c§ 
 
 be a difficult piece of work mirb einc fd)rotertge Arbeit merben 
 
 However that may be 2Bie bem and) fein mag, trie ftdj ba8 
 
 aud) uertjatten mag 
 
 2. = tw whatever degree, tote [aud)], fo [aud)] ; see 165, 
 
 3 and 220: 
 
 However beautiful she was 2Bie ftf)6n fte [aud)] mar, or fo (djon 
 
 fie [audj] roar 
 However diligently he studied @o fteigig er [and)] ftubterte 
 
 a. The same effect may be produced by nod) fo ever so 
 much : 
 
 However rich he may be, he (§r mag nod) fo retd) fein, er mirb 
 
 will be punished for this bod) fur biefeS $erbred)en beftraft 
 
 crime merben 
 
 Every remark, however unim- 3ebe nod) fo unmidjtige S5em erf ting 
 
 portant, was reported in the ttmrbe in ben Sftorgengeitungen be* 
 
 morning papers rtd)tet 
 
 II. Conj. 1. With much emphasis, = however that 
 may he, tote bem cmdj fetn mag (see above, 1, 1), or tro|bem, 
 tro£ aHebem : 
 
 However, I will pardon you £ro£bem (or tro^ attebem) mill tdj 
 once more bir nod) einmal Dergeifyen 
 
 2. With less emphasis, = but, bod), jebod), aber, aCeitt ; 
 bod) and alletit, in this sense, should stand at the begin- 
 ning of the clause, jebod) and aber have the same freedom 
 of position as the English however : 
 
 He was, however, very fond of (5r mar jebodj ein grower Sftufiffiebs 
 music tjaber, or bod) mar er ein grower 
 
 2KuftfUeb^aber 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. Ill 
 
 The enemy, however, did not 2)odj fdjien Utt8 ber geinb ntrf^t gu 
 seem to notice us bemerfen, or aUein ber geinb 
 
 fd)ien wis nidjt gu bemerfen 
 
 171. If. Conj. 1. Usually tuemt, followed by the im- 
 perfect or pluperfect subjunctive when the condition is 
 not realized (see 118); the following hypothetical clause 
 is often introduced by f o (see 140) : 
 
 If he comes, I shall go away SBenn er fommt, [fo] gc^c id) fort 
 
 If I were rich, I should travel SSenn id) reid) mare, [fo] miirbe id) 
 
 for several years meljrere 3al)re reifen 
 
 If I had not known him so SSenn id) tt)n uidjt fo gut gefannt 
 
 well, I should have lent him Ijcitte, f fo] Ijatte id) il)m ba8 (Mb 
 
 the money geliefyen 
 
 2. Instead of toenn with the dependent order (see 236), 
 
 the interrogative order is often used to express a condition 
 
 (see 235, 2) ; in that case, fo is very regularly used at the 
 
 beginning of the principal clause : 
 
 $ommt er, fo gelje idj fort 
 SScire id) reid), fo miirbe id) meljrere 3al)ve reifeu 
 $attt id) iljtt nid)t fo gut gefaunt, fo tjatte id) ibm bag ©elb gelieljen 
 Compare with the sentences under 1. 
 
 3. The conditional clause may, of course, follow the 
 hypothetical clause ; in that case, however, the interroga- 
 tive order is not used except to express a condition not 
 realized : 
 
 3d) ge!)e fort, meun er fommt 
 
 3d) miirbe mefyrere 3al)re reifen, meun id) reid) mare, or mare idj reidj 
 3d) fjatte it)m ba% @elb gegeben, menu id) ifyn nid)t fo gut gefanut fyatte, 
 or fyatte id) il)n nid)t fo gut gefanut 
 
 Compare with the sentences under 1. 
 
 4. For as if see 152, 2 c. 
 
 5. In indirect questions both if and whether should be 
 translated by ob : 
 
112 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 The general wished to find out £>er ©enerat nnmfdjte ju erfafjren, 
 whether the enemy would ob ber geinb ben nadtften Sftorgen 
 attack in the morning or not angreifen roiirbe, ober ni(f)t • 
 
 Ask that man if he can show gragen ©ie ben 9ftann bort, ob er 
 us the way to the station un8 ben 2Beg nadj bem 23almI)ofe 
 
 geigen faun 
 
 172. In. I. Adv. 1. SDrinnen ; after a verb express- 
 ing motion, Ijtnem, herein (see 133) : 
 
 I called : u Come in " 3d) rief: „§erein" 
 
 She rushed in, in great excite- @ie ftiirgte in grower Slufregung 
 
 ment herein 
 
 I went in to help him 3d) ging I)inetn, urn ifym tfi fyelfen 
 
 You were not in (at home) S)u ttmrft ntd)t ju §aufe 
 
 2. In certain familiar phrases, ju . , . fjeretn, t)tnein: 
 He came in [by] the door G?r fam jur Sljur fyerein 
 
 II. Prep. 1. Usually in, contracted with bem to im : 
 
 in the bottle in ber gta(d)e in Asia in $ften 
 
 in the book im S8ud)e in summer im ©ommer 
 
 in school in ber ©djnle in three weeks in bret SSodjen 
 
 in Berlin in Berlin 
 
 2. To express the time of day, use either the genitive 
 
 (see 60) or cm : 
 
 in the morning am 9ft org en in the day-time am Sage, or bei 
 
 in the evening am 5tbenb Sage 
 
 But 
 
 in the night in ber 9latf)t, or bei 9?adjt 
 
 3. In a language, auf : 
 
 He answered in German (§r antroortete auf 2>eutfcf) 
 
 What do you call this in Ger- Sie nennt man (or roie l)eif$t) bie8 
 
 man ? 2>ing auf £>eutjd) ? 
 But 
 
 In German there are two de- 3tn 2)eutfd)en gibt eS $roei 2)efUna* 
 
 clensions tionen 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 113 
 
 4. In with a verbal noun in -ing should be translated 
 by bet with a verbal noun in -en (see 128, 2), or by a sub- 
 ordinate clause introduced by a suitable conjunction (see 
 128, 5) ; the former construction should be chiefly used 
 when time or an accompanying circumstance is to be 
 expressed : 
 
 SBeim Uberfefcen biefer furgen @teUe 
 madjte er fiinf gefyler 
 
 2)er gitrft bettrieS feine $lugl)eit ba= 
 burd), bag er ben geinb mit (Mte 
 befyanbette 
 
 in my opinion nadj meiner 2Injtdjt 
 
 in press lmtcr ber s Jpreffc 
 
 in print gebntcft; not in print (all 
 
 sold) feergriffen 
 in the reign (of) uuter ber 9*e« 
 
 gierung 
 in short !urg 
 in time (on time) gu renter ^ett, 
 
 jur redjten £tit, redjtjettig ; (in 
 
 future) mit ber £eit 
 in times past, in former times 
 
 friiljer, eljematS 
 in olden times in (or nt) alten 
 
 3etten 
 in truth roafyrljaftig 
 in this way auf bie(e (or fo(d)e) 
 
 SBHfe 
 
 In translating this short pas- 
 sage he made five mistakes 
 
 The prince showed his wisdom 
 in treating his enemies kind- 
 ly 
 
 5. Idioms: 
 
 in appearance bem 2lnfd)eine 
 
 nad) 
 in comparison im $ergtetd)e 
 in conclusion $nm ©dfjtuffe, 
 
 in the country (not in another 
 
 country) im £anbe 
 in the country (not in the city) 
 
 anf bem £anbe 
 in honor of the king bem $o* 
 
 ntge ju (Sfyren 
 in a hurry in grower (§ile, eilig 
 be in a hurry In grower (5tle 
 
 fein, groge (Site Ijaben 
 in this manner auf bieje {or 
 
 fotdje) SBeife 
 there is nothing in it e8 ijt 
 
 nidjts baran 
 
 173. Instead, Adv. and Instead of, Prep. 1. In German, 
 artftatt is used as a preposition only ; hence both the ad- 
 verb instead and the preposition instead of should be 
 rendered by anftatt with a genitive ; for anftatt. cm ©telle 
 may be substituted ; 
 
114 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 * 
 
 Instead of his father, his Anftatt fetneg SBaterS trot feittc 
 
 mother entered the room gutter in« dimmer 
 
 He meant to take quinine, but C?r rooUte (Sfjiiuit ttefymen, nafjm 
 
 took arsenic instead aber anftatt beffen (see 32) 2Irfcnif 
 
 His nephew could not go, so ©ein 9?effe fonnte nid)t bingetjen, 
 
 he sent a friend instead beSljctlb fanbte er einen feiner 
 
 greunbe anftatt feiner, or an 
 feiner ©telle 
 
 2. After instead of, a verbal noun in -ing should be 
 
 rendered by an infinitive with ju ; see 128, 5 a. 
 
 174. Into. Prep. 3n, often strengthened by a suit- 
 able adverb (see 134, 3) : 
 
 He fell into the water C?r fiel in ba3 Staffer 
 
 This tavern fell into disrepute 3)iefe8 28irt8l)aii$ tarn in iibetit Sftuf 
 
 The general sent an officer into 2)er ©eneral fd)icf te einen Offigter 
 
 the city to demand its sur- in bie ©tabt tytnein, urn fte |ttt 
 
 render Ubergabe aufguforbem 
 
 175. Like. Adv. Like may be expressed in two ways : 
 
 1. By gletcf), sometimes called a preposition (see 137, 2), 
 properly an adjective in apposition and therefore unin- 
 fected (see 18, 2), and governing a dative (see 73), which 
 may precede or follow ; this construction is more often 
 used when the comparison has reference to the subject 
 of the sentence than when it has reference to any other 
 part. 
 
 2. By tt>ie as, which requires the two elements of the 
 comparison to be in the same case : 
 
 He rushed up the stairs like a 2Bie etn SBaljnfmntger (or gletd) 
 madman eiuem 2Baf)nftnnigen, or einem 
 
 SBafynfmntgen gtetd)) ftiirgte er 
 bie Xvtppt fyinauf 
 He treated me like a school- (5r befyanbelte mid) rate einen <^d)ul* 
 boy jungen 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 115 
 
 a. 9Bte may be strengthened by a preceding ebenfo or 
 
 gerctbe, just, and the second part of the comparison is very 
 
 often introduced by fo : 
 
 Like his mother, Goethe had 2Bie (or gerabe ttrie, or ebenfo tote) 
 brown hair and dark lustrous jeine aflutter, f o fyatte aud) ©oettje 
 eyes brauneS £aar unb bunflc fun* 
 
 fclnbe 2tugen 
 
 176. Much. Adv. When expressing degree, not meas- 
 urable quantity, much, very much should generally be 
 rendered by fef)r, otherwise by rjtct : 
 
 She was very much grieved ©te ttiar fefyr befummert 
 
 I respect him very much 3d) ad) tc ifyn fel)r [I)od)] 
 
 He is much {I e. highly) re- (Sr ift (et)v gead^tct 
 
 spected 
 
 He is much (i. e. by many, or (Sr ift Diet oerleumbet 
 
 in many ways) maligned 
 
 177. Neither [. . . nor]. I. Pron. See 40. 
 
 II. Conj. 1. Neither . . . nor, toeber . . . nod) : 
 
 She was neither industrious <&ie war tueber fleiftig nodj begabt 
 
 nor talented 
 
 I am neither rich, nor have I 3d) bin tucber reid), nod) tjabe id) 
 
 any desire to become so 33erlangen banad), e8 ju roerben 
 
 2. iVb£ . . . neither, not . . . wor, nirf)t . . . unb auti) mcijt : 
 
 I did not go to the concert last 3d) mar geftern $benb nidjt im 
 night, neither (nor) can I go Concert unb fyeute $benb fann id) 
 to-day and) nid)t Ijingeljen 
 
 178. Of. Prep. See 57 ff. 
 
 179. Off. I. Adv. 1. = distant, toeit toeg, entfernt: 
 
 Far off, a great way off SSeit meg; tuett Don t)ier, toon ba, 
 
 Don bort 
 
 2. = away, after verbs of removal, toeg, fort, bation : 
 
116 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 He hurried off to catch the (Sr elite baoou (or fort), urn ben 
 
 train gag l xl erreidjen 
 
 He got off with his life (Sr fam mi! bem Men baoon 
 
 3. = down, tjtvab, fyerunter, fjinab, l)inunter (see 133) : 
 He fell off and broke his leg (Sr ftel fyerunter unb brad) \>a% 33ein 
 
 4. Idioms: 
 
 Off and on 2lb nnb gu; balb fo, balb fo 
 
 He is well off (§r ift in gnten Umftanben 
 
 Everything went off well 2We8 ging gut ab, or Don patten 
 
 Take off one's hat ©einen §ut abnefymen 
 
 Take off one's coat, one's boots ©einen SKotf, fetne @tief el auS^te^en 
 
 I must be off now 3d) mug jefct fort 
 
 Put off, delay $erfd)ieben, f)inau8ftf)ieben 
 
 II. The preposition off should be rendered by t)on r 
 
 strengthened by a suitable adjective or adverb from 
 
 among those mentioned above (see 134, 3) : 
 
 The tavern is a mile off the 2)a§ 2Btrt§ljau8 ift etne 2Mfe toon 
 
 road ber frmbftrage entfentt 
 
 He jumped off the horse (§r fprang oom S -Pferbe fyerunter 
 
 180. On. I. Adv. 1. In phrases like to have on, put 
 
 on, cm or auf ; see below, II, 1 and 2 : 
 
 She had a white dress on ©ie Ijatte ein roetgeS $leib an 
 
 He put his fur cap on (§r fe^te feine $el$mu&e auf 
 
 2. = forward, further, fort, toeiter, t)ortoart3: 
 
 They marched on until it be- @ie marfdjterten toetter bi« e8 bun= 
 
 came dark fel ttntrbe 
 
 I went on reading 3d) fufyr fort gu lefen 
 
 And so on Unb fo roeiter 
 
 From now on $on je£t an 
 
 II. Prep. 1. = close by, or touching, an object, cm : 
 
 Cologne is on the Rhine MUx liegt am 9?I)etn 
 
 The picture hangs on the wall ®a8 23i(b fyangt an ber Sffianb 
 
 I knocked on the door 3d) flopfte an bie £l)ur 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 117 
 
 2. = on top of, or resting on, auf : 
 
 The book is lying on the table 
 A stork has his nest on the 
 
 roof of the church 
 Go and lay this book on my 
 
 desk 
 
 £)a8 SBud) liegt auf bent %x\6) 
 (Sin ©torcf) fyat fein Sfteft auf bem 
 
 2)ad)e bcr $ird)e 
 ©efyen @ic l)in unb legen ©ie bie8 
 
 SButf) auf mein ^ult 
 
 3. To denote time, an (see 60) : 
 
 On Monday 91m 2ftontag 
 
 On a fine morning 
 On the first of April 
 
 4. = about, iiber : 
 
 A treatise on electricity 
 
 2ln einem ftf)onen 2ftorgen, or eineS 
 
 fdjonen SttorgenS 
 5lm crfien Styril 
 
 Sine Slbljanbumg fiber Me (Slectri* 
 cttat 
 
 5. On with a verbal noun in -ing should be rendered 
 by a subordinate clause introduced by a(3 ; see 128, 5. 
 
 6. Idioms : 
 
 on account [of] to eg en 
 
 on no account unter f einen Urn* 
 
 pnben 
 on board an SBorb 
 call on one (visit) befudjen, 
 
 (summon) aufforbern 
 on this condition unter biefer 
 
 SBebtngung 
 on the contrary im (3>egenteU 
 on foot gu gug 
 on hand norratig 
 on the one hand auf ber einen 
 
 @eite, emerjetts 
 
 on horseback gu ^ferbe, ride on 
 
 horseback reiteu 
 on land auf bem £anbe, am i'anbe, 
 
 an ba% £anb 
 on this occasion bei biefer ©elegen* 
 
 f)ett 
 on my part meinerfeitS 
 on purpose abftd)tltd), mit $bftd)t 
 on shore auf bem i'anbe, am 2anbe, 
 
 an ba8 £aub 
 on one side auf ber eineu @ette 
 on a sudden ^lol^lirf) 
 on these terms unter biefen 33e* 
 
 bingungeu 
 
 181. Only. Adv. 1. 
 
 Only five miles from here 
 If I had only known it 
 
 SJhtr: 
 
 9htr funf 9Mlen non r)ter 
 SBenn id) e8 nur geoutfct tjattc 
 
118 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 In optative sentences like the last, the German nur is 
 even more common than the English only, 
 
 2. = not yet more than, erft : 
 
 I had only read a few pages 3d) Ijcttte erft tuenige ©eiten gelefen, 
 
 when he returned al8 er juriicffam 
 
 She was only three years old ©ie to ax erft brei 3al)re att, al8 
 
 when her mother died itjre gutter ftarb 
 
 3. Be careful not to confound the adjective only with 
 
 the adverb ; the former is etnjig : 
 
 The only reliable work on this 2)ct§ ein^tge gnoerfafftge SBerf fiber 
 subject is by a Frenchman biefeu ©egenftaub ift toon einem 
 
 grangofen gefdjrieben 
 
 182. Out. I. Adv. 1. Ordinarily, brazen; after 
 
 verbs expressing motion, f)tnctil3, tjerauS (see 133) : 
 
 Out on the ocean ©rauften auf bem 2fteere 
 
 Out in the fields S)raugen auf ben gelbern 
 
 He rushed out into the street (§r filiate auf bte ©trofee l)inau8 
 
 I will call him out 3d) ttriU iljn IjerauSrufen 
 
 2. With certain verbs, in certain senses (see 131), au£ ; 
 
 likewise in certain idioms : 
 
 Mr. S. is going out now £err ft geljt je£t au8 
 
 I was out (not at home) 3d) ttmr cms, nictjt gu §au(e, auSge* 
 
 gangen 
 The fire is out 2)a8 geuer ift au8 
 
 School is out S)ie ©d)ule ift auS 
 
 II. Out of. Prep. 1. = outside of, aufterfyatfc : 
 We live three miles out of the 2Bir toofmen brei SMlen augerljalb 
 city ber ©tabt 
 
 2. After a verb expressing motion, out of may be ex- 
 pressed by au§ . . , IjercutS, fjhtauS (see 133) : 
 
 The child fell out of the car- 2)a8 $tnb fieX au§ bem SBagen 
 riage - IjerauS 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 119 
 
 a. In many expressions, however, jit . . . f)erau§, f)tnau£ 
 
 at, out . . . by should be 
 
 is more common, and out , 
 rendered in the same way : 
 
 We rode out of the city 
 
 The duke was driveu out of 
 the country 
 
 The girl went out by the back 
 door 
 
 I was looking out of the win- 
 dow 
 
 2Btr ritten gur ©tabt IjiuauS 
 
 2)er §ergog murbe gum Sanbe Ijut. 
 
 cuts gejagt 
 2>a« 2JMbd)en giug gur §iuterti)ur 
 
 IjtuauS 
 3d) faf) gum genfter I)inau« 
 
 3. Out of = from, on account of, a\l$ : 
 
 Out of malice $u8 ©djabeufreube 
 
 Out of love 2lu8 £tebe 
 
 4. To express material, au£ : 
 
 This bridge is built out of steel £)iefe SBriicfe ift au8 ©taljl gebaut 
 
 5. To be out of (lack) is nidjt metjr f)a6en : 
 
 I am out of paper 
 
 6. Idioms: 
 
 out of breath auger $tem 
 out of business nidjt mefyr im 
 
 ©efdjcift 
 out of humor jd)led)t gelaunt, 
 
 fd)ied)ter £aune {see 59, 3) 
 out of office uid)t mef)r im $mt 
 out of practice auger Ubung 
 
 3d) Ijabe !eiu papier meljr 
 
 out of print Dergriffen 
 
 out of sight — out of mind an% 
 
 ben $ugen — au8 bem <Bim\ 
 out of tune toerftimmt 
 out of the way (secluded) abge= 
 
 legen, entlcgen 
 
 I. Adv. See 211, I 
 Prep. 1. = not within, aiifcrljalb ; 
 
 183. Outside. 
 II. Outside of. 
 
 see 211, II, 1. 
 
 2. = not including, auf]er ; see 158, 2. 
 
 184. Over. I. Adv. 1. = on the other side, brii&cn ; 
 after verbs expressing motion, fjcriibcr, fjimiber (see 133) : 
 
120 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 My father lives over there 
 He is over (e. g. over the river) 
 We sailed over to England 
 My wife is coming over next 
 spring 
 
 Tldn 93ater tooljnt bort briiben 
 (§r ift briiben 
 
 '2Bir fegelten nad) (Sngtanb ^iniiber 
 SD^eine ftrau fomtnt nacfyfteS ^rul)* 
 jarjr ^eriiber 
 
 2. = past, Dorbet, boritber, au$ : 
 
 ®ie 33orftellung raar um gelni Utjr 
 ttoriiber 
 
 The performance was over at 
 ten o'clock 
 
 3. = left, itbrtg : 
 
 Fifty baskets were left over 
 
 gunfgig $orbe toctren iibrig ge= 
 blieben 
 
 4. = over again, nod) etnmat : 
 
 We had to do it all over 2Bir mngten e8 alleS nod) etnmaf 
 
 macfyen 
 
 II. Prep. Generally, After, often strengthened, after 
 verbs expressing motion, by a following {jeri'iber, tjiniiber 
 (see 133 and 134, 3) : 
 
 His father's portrait hung over 
 
 the sofa 
 We walked over the bridge 
 
 The horse came running over 
 
 the bridge 
 Over eighty members were 
 
 present 
 Frederick II. ruled over Prussia 
 
 from 1740—1786 
 He mourned over this loss till 
 
 he died 
 Over night 
 
 2>as ©tlbni* feineg $ater8 tying 
 
 iiber bem ©ofa 
 2Bir gingcn iiber bic 23rii(fe [$in- 
 
 iiber] 
 2)a3 ^3ferb fam iiber bte SBriicfe 
 
 [fyeriiber] gcrannt 
 fiber acfytgig 2ftitglieber toaren an* 
 
 mefenb 
 griebrid) II. regierte iiber ^rengeu 
 
 Don 1740—1786 
 (Sr trauerte iiber biefen SSerlnft bis 
 
 pi feinem SLobe 
 Uber SKadjt 
 
 185. Past. I. Adv. = by, see 162, I, 2. 
 II. Prep. 1. = by, see 162, II, 3. 
 
 2. = beyond, mctjr alS, iiber . . . fjtnaug (see 134, 3) : 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 121 
 
 Your father must be past sev- 2>ein $ater mug iiber (or meljr at$) 
 
 enty fieb^tg 3af)re alt feiu 
 
 A quarter past seven ©in 3>iertel nad) fteben; see 153, 6 
 
 186. Rather. Adv. 1. = preferably, tiebcr ; also et)er, 
 
 especially when followed by aV$ than: 
 
 I had rather stay at home 3d) blcibe Ueber }U §aufe 
 
 The prisoner said, he would £er ©efcmgene fagte, cr roiirbe cljer 
 
 rather die than betray his (or Ueber) fterben, a(8 (ein SBater* 
 
 country lanb Derraten 
 
 a. The ideas expressed in English by like to, prefer to y 
 
 like best to are most commonly expressed in German by 
 
 the adverbs gem, lieber, am liebften (see 102, 2 a, and 105, 
 
 3 a): 
 
 I like to teach, but I like bet- 3d) fefjre groar gem, aber id) ftu= 
 ter {or I prefer) to study, Mere nod) Ueber, unb id) reife am 
 
 and I like best to travel liebften 
 
 2. After a negative, efyer should be used : 
 
 The next morning he was no 2)en ncidjften 2ftorgen ging eg ifjm 
 better, rather worse nid)t beffer, efjer fdjlimmer 
 
 3. = more, mef)r, ef)er ; = more correctly, tueimcfjr: 
 
 He came rather (or more) be- (Sr fam meljr, roeil ev mugte, a(8 
 
 cause he must, than because roeil er roollte 
 
 he wished to come 
 He is a German, or rather an dx ift ein 3)entjdjer, ober trietmefyr 
 
 American of German descent ein s 2lmerifaner Don beutfd)er $b= 
 
 funft 
 
 4. = somewhat, etiua3, jiemttd), ganj, which are often 
 qualified by cigeutltcl) really : 
 
 His account of the matter was <2>ein 23erid)t Don ber &atf)e roar 
 
 rather amusing [eigent(id)] gan$ amiifant 
 
 He has rather good taste in (§r b,at jiemlid) guten ©efdjmacf in 
 
 literary matters Utterarifdjen Din gen 
 
122 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 5. The rather, urn fo meljr, urn f o et)er (see 191) : 
 The president felt compelled 2)er ^rdfibent fufytte, baft eu gegen 
 to be just to the accused, the ben ^Cttgeflagten geretf)t fetn ntiifie, 
 rather because he personally urn fo tnefyr, ba er if)n pevfbnlid) 
 disliked him nidjt teiben mocfjte 
 
 187. Scarcely. Adv. Scarcely, hardly, fcuun. A fol- 
 lowing subordinate clause, introduced by when, should be 
 rendered, in German, by a principal clause introduced by 
 fo or, more rarely, by ba (see 140) : 
 
 He had scarcely (or scarcely <£v l)atte faum (or faum Ijatte ev) ' 
 had he) given the order, ben 23efel)l gegeben, f*> mar bev* 
 when it was executed felbe fdjon auSgefiifyrt 
 
 188. Since. I. Adv. 1. = since then, fettbem, fettljev: 
 I have not seen him since 3d) fycibe tint fettbem (or feittjer) 
 
 uid)t gejefyen 
 
 2. = ago, Uor with the dative : 
 
 Many years since SBor trielen 3af)ren 
 
 II. Prep, ©cit ; fcon . . . an : 
 
 Since my childhood @eit meiner $inbf)eit 
 
 Since the beginning $on 2utfang an 
 
 III. Conj. 1. When used in a purely temporal sense, 
 since is feit or fcitbem : 
 
 Since my brother spent a year ©eit ntein SBruber ein 3al)r in 
 
 in Germany, he has been 2)eutfd)laub mar, interefftert (see 
 
 much interested in German 106) ev ftd) fefyr fiir beutfd)e $o- 
 
 politics Ittif 
 
 Since I have lived in the sub- ©eitbem id) in ber SBorftabt tnolme, 
 
 urbs, I have seen but little \)abt id) ifjix nur toentg gejefyen 
 of him 
 
 2. When since expresses cause, it should be translated 
 -by bet : 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 123 
 
 Since he is my friend, I must 
 help him 
 
 189. So. I. Adv. 1. To 
 generally f o : 
 
 I am not so tired as I was last 
 
 night 
 Will you be so kind as to lend 
 
 me your umbrella ? 
 So much the better 
 If that is so, we have no time 
 
 to lose 
 Is that so 1 (Exclamation) 
 She was so feeble that she had 
 
 to be carried home 
 
 3)a cr mein ^reimb ift, fo (see 140) 
 irnifj id) ifym tjelfen 
 
 denote manner or degree, 
 
 3d) bin mdjt jo miibe, al$ id) gefteru 
 
 Slbenb mar 
 SBotlen ©te fo gut feht, mir 3fyren 
 
 $egenfd)irm m leitjen ? 
 Urn fo beffer ; see 191 
 28emt ba& {or bem) fo ift, [fo] Ijabeu 
 
 urir feine £tit gu berlteren 
 <5o? or SBirflirf)? 
 @ie roar fo fdprad), bag man fie 
 
 nad) §aufe tragen mugte 
 
 2. To represent, without emphasis, a preceding word or 
 an idea previously expressed, use eS (see 29, 1 c) : 
 
 I will telegraph, if you wish 
 me to do so 
 
 He was always disagreeable, 
 and became still more so 
 when he inherited his uncle's 
 fortune 
 
 3d) null tetegrapljieren, menu ©ie 
 nmnfdien, baft id) e8 time, or, 
 simply, menu ®ie e8 nriutfd)en 
 
 (Sr mar immer ciu imangenefymer 
 XNenfd), unb rourbe e8 nod) metjr, 
 al8 er feineS DnfelS SBermbgeu 
 crbte 
 
 II. Conj. 1. Coordinating, = thus, therefore, atfo, Hub 
 fo, beSl)a(b : 
 
 You were not at' home, so I 
 went away again 
 
 2)u marft ltirfjt git §anfe, unb fo (or 
 alfo, besfyalb) ging id) nrieber fort 
 
 2. Subordinating, = so that, fo baft, bamit (see 113, 2 
 
 and 3) : 
 
 I drew the curtain, so he might 3d) gog ben $orf)ang Dor, bamit er 
 not see me mid) nid)t falje 
 
 190. That. Conj. 1. Ordinarily, bafc (see 114 ff.) : 
 
124 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 I know that he is rich 
 
 I thought that you had left for 
 
 Berlin 
 I hope that you will soon come 
 
 again 
 
 3d) roeig, baft er retd) t|t 
 
 3d) bad)te, baft bu nad) ^Berlin ab* 
 
 gereift tuarefl 
 3d) Ijoffe, bag bu balb ttrieber fom= 
 
 men nrirft 
 
 2. [So] that, )o baft ; [in order\ that, jo bag, bamit (see 
 113, 2 and 3) : 
 
 4 
 
 I was so surprised that I could 
 
 hardly speak 
 His father was poor, so that 
 
 he could not send the boy to 
 
 school 
 I had to hurry [so or in order] 
 
 that I might not lose the 
 
 train 
 
 3d) wax fo iiberrafdjt, baft idj faum 
 
 fpredjen fonnte 
 ©ein $ater wax arm, fo baft cr ben 
 
 ftnaben nidjt inbte ©d)ule fd)ttfen 
 
 fonnte 
 3d) mugte mid) eUen, bamit id) ben 
 
 3ug nid)t oerfaumte, or urn ben 
 
 3ug uidjt $u oerfanmen 
 
 191. The. Adv. 1. Simple the, before a comparative, 
 urn fo, or bejto : 
 
 Goethe sought to win Herder's 
 
 respect, the more so as the 
 
 latter treated him somewhat 
 
 contemptuously 
 All the better 
 
 ©oetlje fitdjte fid) (see 72, a) £>er= 
 berg 2ld)tung gu ertnerben, nm jo 
 mefyr, a\& biefer tf)n etttrnS oer= 
 dd)t(td) betjanbette 
 
 &efto beffer, or umfo beffer 
 
 2. If two clauses are connected by the correlatives the 
 . . . the, ascertain first which of the two is the subordi- 
 nate, which the principal clause ; the former should be 
 introduced by jc, the latter by bcfto or umfo ; when both 
 clauses are very short, je . . . je is sometimes used ; pay 
 attention to the order of words (see 221 and 236) : 
 
 The more he learned, the more 
 
 modest he became 
 You will like him the better, 
 
 the longer you know him 
 The sooner, the better 
 
 3e meljr er iernte, befto bejdjeibener 
 
 mnrbe er 
 (5r wixb Mr urn jo mefyr gefallen, jc 
 
 longer bu ifyit lennft 
 3e efyer, je beffer 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 125 
 
 192. There. Adv. 1. Sort, with less force ba ; after 
 
 a verb of motion (see 132) bortfyin, bafytn, or, with less 
 
 force, simply t)tn ; another adverb of place never precedes, 
 
 but follows, bort and bet : 
 
 Here and there §ter unb bort, or fyier imb ba 
 
 My aunt lives up there Wt'me Xante toofynt bort (or ba) 
 
 obert 
 I came from there 3d) fam Don bort[fyer], or t>on ba 
 
 [Her] 
 I am going there 3d) gelje bortfyin, or bal)in, or Ijin 
 
 a. After a noun, there may be rendered by the adjec- 
 tive borttg : 
 
 The authorities there £>ie borttcjen 33el)brben 
 
 2. Compounds (see 136) : 
 
 thereabouts, (of place) ba f)er* therefrom baoon 
 
 utn, (of number) ungef a fyr therein barin 
 
 thereafter bonad) thereof baoon 
 
 thereat babet, bariibev; see 153 thereupon barcmf 
 
 therefore, adv. begtoegen, bafiir; therewith bamit 
 
 conj. a\\o, fotglid) 
 
 3. The unaccented, so-called " expletive " there, which 
 is used before the verb when the subject follows, should 
 be rendered by the impersonal e3, followed by the verb, 
 which must agree in number with the logical subject fol- 
 lowing (see 82 and 223) : 
 
 There lay several open books (£8 fagen tneljrere aufgefdjfogenc 
 on the table 23iid)er ctuf bem £ifd)e 
 
 There followed two chapters (£8 fotgten gtoei tfapitet liber ft\op> 
 on Klopstock and Lessing ftocf unb ^effing 
 
 a. But rt should be omitted whenever any other ele- 
 ment of the sentence precedes the verb; there should 
 then remain untranslated : 
 
126 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 Once, there came two beggars 
 
 to our door 
 When he arrived, there were 
 
 many people at the station 
 
 to greet him 
 Beside the doctor, there were 
 
 three persons in the room 
 
 (Strnnat famen (or e§ famen eirnnaf) 
 groei Settler an unfere SEtjiire 
 
 2U8 er aufam, roaren triele £eute aitf 
 bent 33a^nt)ofe, it)n ;ut begriigen 
 
 5tu6er bem 2)ottor tnaren brei ^er* 
 fonen im ,3tmmer 
 
 193. There is (there are) may be translated by e3 ift 
 (e3 finb), or by e3 gtbt. 
 
 1. @3 ift, eS finb are used as in English there is, there 
 are, according as the logical subject is in the singular or 
 in the plural ; in either case, e£ should be omitted when 
 any other element of the sentence precedes the verb : 
 
 There is a vast difference be- (£$ ift etn uugefyeurer Unterfdjteb 
 
 tween these two countries 
 There were, at that time, many 
 
 fine pictures in this gallery 
 But 
 At that time, there were many 
 
 fine pictures in this gallery 
 
 $ttrifrf)en biefen beiben £anbem 
 (S8 roaren gu Jener 3 eit Dieie fd)oue 
 SBtlber in biefer ©allerie 
 
 3u jener £tit roaren t»iele fdjbne 
 23ttber in biefer ©aHerie 
 
 2. In the expression e£ gi6t, e£ is consistently treated 
 as the grammatical subject; it is never omitted, but 
 stands either before or after the verb, as the rules for the 
 arrangement of the sentence may require (see 222 a) ; the 
 verb always remains in the singular, and the logical sub- 
 ject stands in the accusative as the grammatical object of 
 gibt: 
 
 There is a better road, viz. 
 along the Neckar 
 
 Formerly, there were more in- 
 dependent cities in Germany 
 than now 
 
 When there were no railroads 
 and telegraphs 
 
 (§8 gibt einen befferen 2Beg, nomlid) 
 
 ben D^ecfor entlang 
 griif)er gab e8 mefyr freie ©tabte in 
 
 2)eutfd)lanb ate jefct 
 
 Site e8 nod) feine (Sifenbafuien unb 
 Xelegra^en gab 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 127 
 
 194. It is somewhat difficult to define the difference 
 between the use of e£ ift (e£ ftnb) and that of e3 gibt. 
 
 1. In accordance with the original meaning of the verb, 
 
 e3 gi6t is often used to denote that something is produced 
 
 by, or follows from, certain conditions : 
 
 A quarrel ensued (S§ gab ©treit 
 
 A terrible confusion was the (§8 gab eine furd)terud)e Sernurrmig 
 consequence 
 
 2. On the other hand, e$ ift (e3 ftnb) should be used 
 when the predicate is an adjective ; and when the predi- 
 cate is a past participle, fcin or iuerben should be used ac- 
 cording to 92 : 
 
 There were many of my friends (S3 roaven toief e Don meincn ftxtuiu 
 
 present ben gegeumartig 
 
 There were many persons (S$ nmrben Iriele ^erfonen getotet 
 
 killed or injured ober t)ertt)unbet 
 
 3. (S3 gibt is used to denote the existence of a subject, 
 
 either in general (when no place is specified), or in its 
 
 natural surroundings : 
 
 There are white elephants (§8 gibt toeifce (Sfepfyanten 
 
 There are lions in Africa, but (58 gibt i'otnetx in $frifa, abcr ntdjt 
 
 not in Europe in Chtropa 
 
 There are about 180 millions G?8 gibt ungefafjr 180 SJiillioiten 
 
 of Mohammedans in the 2ftot)ammebaner in ber SSett 
 
 world 
 
 There are men who would (58 gibt 3ftenfd)en, bie ba§> Inerbicten 
 
 gladly accept this offer gem annetjmen ttntrben 
 
 There are flowers that eat (5$ gibt tinmen, mld)t 3nfeften 
 
 insects frcffcn 
 
 There are edible birds'-nests (S$ gibt efjbare SSogehtefter 
 
 4. @3 ift (c3 ftnb) is used to denote the accidental or 
 temporary existence, in a specified place, of a subject 
 which might as naturally be in another place : 
 
128 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 There are white elephants in (58 ftnb metfee (Stepfjanten in biefer 
 
 this menagery Menagerie 
 
 There are fifteen persons in (£% ftnb fiinfeetm ^erfonen in biefem 
 
 this room 3^ nimer 
 
 There are beautiful flowers in (£$ ftnb fd)bne SBuimett in biefem 
 
 this bouquet ©traufte 
 
 There is a bird's-nest in this (S§ ift cin SBogelnejt in biefem 
 
 tree $8ctume 
 
 a. But notice the common formula : 
 There was once a man who, etc. (£8 mar einmal etn 2Jtann, ber *c 
 
 5. There are many less definite cases in which either 
 e$ gtbt or e3 ift (c3 ftnb) should be used according as the 
 conditions seem to approach those stated under 3 or those 
 stated under 4. In some cases the one expression would 
 be nearly as correct as the othei. 
 
 195. While the construction explained in 192, 3 is 
 more common than the corresponding English construc- 
 tion with there, there are on the other hand numerous 
 cases in which there is (there are) should not be translated 
 either by e£ ift (e$ ftnb) or e£ gtbt. More definite expres- 
 sions are to be preferred, and the student is advised to 
 make use of such, whenever they readily suggest them- 
 selves : 
 
 There is a bridge across the 23et $oln fiiljrt (leads) etne SBriicfe 
 
 Khine near Cologne iiber ben Styeiii 
 
 There are twelve companies in Sin Regiment Ijat jlDotf (£om s 
 
 a regiment pagnien 
 
 There is Prussic acid in peach- s .pftrftd)fevne entljaUen (contain) 
 
 stones SBlaufcutre 
 
 In that year there was a great 3n jenem Statjre r)errfcr)te (ruled, 
 famine . prevailed) eine gro6e§unger*uot 
 
 a. It is, especially, often necessary to contract there is 
 (there are) with a following relative clause into a single 
 clause : 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 129 
 
 The teacher asked how many- 
 had been in Germany, and it 
 appeared that there were 
 only five of us, who had ever 
 been there 
 
 196* Though. Conj. 1. 
 2. With less emphasis, = 
 allein (see 170, II, 2) : 
 
 I have seen him since he was 
 married, though very rarely 
 
 I have paid the bill, though un- 
 willingly 
 
 3)er i'etyrcr fragte, nrie triete in 
 2)eutfd)lanb gerocfen feten, unb e8 
 getgte ftd), bafj nur fiinf uon wis 
 je ba gercefen roaren 
 
 = although; see 150. 
 hotvever, bod), jebod), aber, 
 
 3d) fjabe tfjn gefeljeu, feitbem cr fid) 
 toertjeivatet l)at, aber nur fetten 
 
 3d) Ijabe bte SKedjnung begaljtt, jebod) 
 nur ungern 
 
 3. For as though, see 152, 2 e. 
 
 197. Through, and Throughout. 
 l)inburdj (see 130 and 131) : 
 
 The president will pass through 
 
 to-morrow morning 
 If the town is unoccupied, we 
 
 are to march through without 
 
 stopping 
 
 I. Adv. 1. 2)urd), 
 
 2)er ^rtijtbent fommt morgen friify 
 
 [f)ier] burd) 
 Senn bte ©tabt unbefe^t iji, fo 
 
 fallen ttrtt ofyne un$ aufgufyatten 
 
 burd)tnarfd)ieren, or Ijinburd) mar* 
 
 fdjteren 
 
 a. 2)urd) forms with verbs both genuine and "sepa- 
 rable " compounds, sometimes without essential difference 
 in meaning ; the genuine compounds, however, are always 
 transitive. See below, II, 1 a. 
 
 2. Throughout, in alien 2)ingen, in alien ©tiiden, buvtf)- 
 cms, burd)meg : 
 
 The fellow acted throughout 2)er $erl Ijanbette burdjtocg nne tin 
 like a coward geigling 
 
 II. Prep. 1. 2)urd), often strengthened by a following 
 burd) or Ijinburct) (see 134, 3) : 
 
130 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 The captain was shot through 
 
 the arm 
 Sigurd rode without fear 
 
 through the wall of flames 
 Through his intercession 
 
 a. The preposition through 
 
 the adverb burd) (see above, I, 
 
 We have run through the whole 
 forest 
 
 I have sought through the 
 whole library 
 
 198. Till, Until. I. Prep. 
 
 We had to wait till seven 
 
 o'clock 
 From morn till evening, till 
 
 midnight 
 
 2. Not until, erft : 
 The mistake was not discovered 
 until the next morning 
 
 II. Conj. 1. S8t3: 
 
 We had to wait till the carriage 
 returned 
 
 b. Not until, jtidjt efyer aU 
 
 al3, erft iDcnu (see 205, II), 
 
 strengthened by a preceding 
 
 have occurred repeatedly : 
 
 His innocence was not dis- 
 covered until he had spent 
 five years in prison 
 
 He never paid his debts till he 
 was compelled to do so 
 
 £)er §auptmann nutrbe burd) ben 
 
 Hrm gefdjoffen 
 ©igurb ritt ofyne gurdjt burd) bic 
 
 glammenmauer l)tnburd) 
 2)urd) feine Sermittelung 
 
 may often be rendered by 
 
 la): 
 
 5£ir ftub burd) beu gangeu SSatb ge= 
 laufeu, or ttrir Ijaben ben gau^en 
 SBatb burdjlaufen 
 
 3d) t)abc bie gaujc SBtbUotfjef burd)* 
 fud)t, or burd)gejud)t 
 
 1. 93t3, b\$ ju (see 199, 4 b) i 
 SSir mugten bis fteben UI)r marten 
 
 $om SIftorgen bis pun $benb, bis 
 SWittentadjt 
 
 2)er 3rrtum rourbe erft ben ndd)ften 
 Sftorgen entbecft 
 
 3Bir mugten marten, bt« ber SBagen 
 juriicffam 
 
 bi§, or, more commonly, erft 
 erft nactjbem ; erft may be 
 immer, if a thing is said to 
 
 ©cine Unfd)utb nutrbe erft cutbetft, 
 ate {or nad)bem) er fd)on fiinf 
 3af)re im ©efangniffe gugebrad)t 
 Ijatte 
 
 (§r begaljfte feine ©diutben immer 
 erft/ menu er ba$u gegnumgen 
 nuirbe 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 131 
 
 199. To. Prep. In many cases, to marks the indirect 
 object; it should then be rendered by the simple dative; 
 see 63. When the simple dative cannot be used, to should 
 be translated by a preposition. 
 
 1. Before nouns denoting persons or pronouns referring 
 to them. 
 
 a. After intransitive verbs always use ju : 
 
 I hastened to a physician 3d) elite 311 cinem $rgte 
 
 They came to king Alfred as @te famen gu $onig 2Ufreb al8 @e* 
 ambassadors fcmbte 
 
 b. After verbs denoting delivering, sending, transmit- 
 
 ting, writing etc. (which may also be followed by a simple 
 
 dative, see 67) use cm : 
 
 The courier delivered the dis- $)er Courier iibergab bie 2)epefd)en 
 patches to the ambassador bem ©ejanbten, or an ben ©e* 
 
 fanbten 
 The doctor wrote to me 2)er S)oftor fdjrieb mir, or an mid) 
 
 c. After fcnbcu and fcfjicfen, jit may be used if a person 
 
 is sent: 
 
 The princess sent a messenger 2)ie ^rin^efftn fanbte etnen 23oten git 
 to him ifjm, or an tfyn 
 
 2. Before names of towns and countries always use 
 
 nad): 
 
 We shall go to Italy 2Bir roerben nad) 3talien gefyen 
 
 Napoleon hastened back to 9?aJ>oleon eitte nad) ^ariS gitriid 
 Paris 
 
 3. Before other nouns denoting places, the rather in- 
 definite mid) may be employed, but generally one of the 
 more definite in, an or auf, as the case may be, should be 
 used : 
 
132 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 We went to church this morn- 
 ing 
 
 The emperor retired to a 
 monastery 
 
 The army marched back to the 
 Rhine 
 
 Hermann accompanied Doro- 
 thea to the spring 
 
 The maiden went to the market 
 
 The pirate carried the princess 
 to a desert island 
 
 Sir gingen fyeute 9ftorgen in Me 
 
 $ird)e, or gur $ird)e; see below, 6 
 2)er $aifer 309 ftd) in ein Softer 
 
 guriicf 
 2)te 2lrmee marfdjierte an ben Sftfyeiu 
 
 gurud 
 Hermann begteitete £)orotl)ea on bie 
 
 OueUe 
 2)aS 2ftabd)en giitg auf ben Sftarft 
 2>er ©eerauber fcfyteppte bie $rtif- 
 
 gefftu auf eine nriifte 3ufel 
 
 The stranger followed me from 
 the hotel to the corner of 
 William Street 
 
 I walked with difficulty from 
 my bed to the window 
 
 From first to last 
 
 4. a. In the sense of up to, as far as, b\§ should be 
 added to the preposition by which to would otherwise be 
 expressed : 
 
 2)er grembe folgte mir uom §otel 
 
 bis an bie (or btS gur) (Scfe ber 
 
 SBityetmjirajje 
 (§S murbe mir farmer, toom SBette bis 
 
 an baS genfter gu getjen 
 SBom erften bi§ gum lefeten; 0011 2ln= 
 
 fang bis gu (Snbe 
 
 &. Before numerals, bi3 alone should be used ; before 
 names of towns and countries, also before the names of 
 the months and days of the week, unless preceded by the 
 definite article, and in a few fixed expressions, 6t3 is suf- 
 ficient : 
 
 dv raudjte jeben £ag fftnf bis gelju 
 
 QEigarren 
 3d) arbeitete jeben $benb uon jicbeu 
 
 bis elf 
 3dj reifte mit meiner ©djroefter oon 
 
 bonbon bis [nad)] 3)ot>er 
 $on 2ftontag bis 2)onnerftag, or com 
 
 $ftontag bis gum 2>onnerftag 
 
 He smoked from five to ten 
 
 cigars a day 
 I studied from seven to eleven 
 
 every night 
 I travelled with my sister from 
 
 London to Dover 
 From Monday to Thursday 
 
 5. With an infinitive. See 119 ff. 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 133 
 
 6. Idioms: 
 
 to a ball auf einen 53aU to school gur ©d)ute, in bie ©djule; 
 
 to bed gu SBett indefinitely, to a school auf [eine] 
 
 to breakfast gum griifyftutf ©dmte 
 
 to church gur $ird)e, in bie $ird)e to supper gum SIbenbeffen 
 
 to congress in ben (Eongrefj to the theatre in ba% (or in$) 
 
 to dinner gum Sftittageffen Sweater 
 
 to jail in ba% ©efongniS to the university gur Unioerfitcit, 
 
 to a meeting in eine (or gu einer) auf bie Untoerfitcit; indefinitely , to 
 
 $erfammlung a university auf [eine] ilntoer* 
 
 to parliament in ba8 s $avlament fitcit 
 to a party in eine ©efellfdjaft 
 
 200. Toward (towards). Prep. 1. After a verb of 
 
 motion, jit, placed after its noun ; also auf . . . ^lt, nadj 
 
 . . . f)er, nadj . . . f)tn (see 133) : 
 
 We hastened toward the city 2Bir eilten ber ©tabt gu 
 
 The boy ran toward me 2)er $nabe eilte auf mid) gu 
 
 The enemy retired toward the 3)er geinb gog fic^ nad) ber 93rude 
 
 bridge f)tn guriicf 
 
 Toward the east 9tad) Often f)in, or gegen Often 
 
 2. To denote a personal relation, gegen : 
 
 He always acted very friendly (Sr geigte fid) immer fetjr freunbtid) 
 toward me gegen mid) 
 
 3. To denote aim, purpose, ju : 
 
 The professor gave me fifty 2)er ^rofeffor gab mir fiinfgig 3ftarf 
 marks toward this object gu biefem Qm&z 
 
 4. To state a number approximately, gegen r ungefafjr : 
 It was toward five o'clock (§8 mar gegen (or ungefafyv) fiinf Ul)r 
 
 201. Under. I. Adv. §tmmter, barunter ; with certain 
 
 verbs, in certain senses (see 131), ituter : 
 
 The fox tried to slip under 2)er gud)8 uerfudjte barunter gu 
 
 fd)tu:pfen 
 The boat went under 2)a8 Soot ging unter 
 
134 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 II. Prep. 
 
 She is the happiest creature 
 
 under the sun 
 The child fell under the wheels 
 
 of the carriage 
 Five persons were buried under 
 
 the ruins 
 
 1. Generally, unter : 
 
 ©te ift ba$ glitcf (id)fte ©efdjopf unter 
 
 ber ©onne 
 2)a8 $utb fiei unter bie ftaber be8 
 
 2Bagen8 
 f?iinf ^erfoueu rourben unter ben 
 
 £riimmern begrabeu 
 
 2. Idioms : 
 
 To take under consideration 
 Under date of the 21st inst. 
 To trample under foot 
 Under ground 
 To be under the necessity 
 Under pain of death 
 
 3n (ffrmagung gietjeu 
 
 Unter bem 21, b. WL (biefes aflonats) 
 
 Sftit gitfjen tteten 
 
 Unter bem 23oben; unter ber @rbe 
 
 ©enotigt fein 
 
 23et £obe8ftrafe 
 
 Until. See Till, 198. 
 
 Up. I. Adv. 1. To denote locality, oben : 
 
 202. 
 
 203. 
 
 The hermit lived up on the 
 
 mountain 
 Up there, up yonder 
 
 2)er (Sinfiebler tnoljnte oben auf bem 
 
 Serge 
 2)a oben, bort oben; see 192, 1 
 
 2. After verbs of motion, Ijtnauf, Ijerauf (see 133) ; in 
 
 certain idioms (see 131), mtf : 
 
 Let us go up 
 Do not come up 
 The boy got up at 7 o'clock 
 I was up early this morning 
 I woke up at midnight 
 The prisoner walked up and 
 down in his cell 
 
 £aJ3t uns Ijtnaufgefyen 
 $ommen @ie nidjt fyerauf 
 3)er tnabe jtanb urn 7 Ul)r auf 
 3d) niar tynte 9ftorgeu fdjon frul) auf 
 3d) road)te urn TOtternadjt auf 
 £)er ©efangene ging in feiner 3efle 
 auf unb ab, or auf unb nieber 
 
 II. Prep. The preposition up should be expressed by 
 an accusative (see 79, 2) followed by (jerauf or fyinauf (see 
 133); to express the goal of the motion, the accusative 
 may be preceded by auf, and the adverb may be omitted : 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 135 
 
 We swam up the river as far as 
 
 the new bridge 
 Drive slowly up the hill 
 
 I climbed up a cherry-tree 
 
 SSir fdjiucnnmen ben gfufj fyinauf bt« 
 gur ncucn SBviicfe 
 
 ftatyren ©ie langfam ben 23erg I)in* 
 auf 
 
 3d) fletterte anf etnen $irfd)baum 
 ttinauf] 
 
 204. Well. I. Adv. 1. Generally, tooljl, gut; the 
 former, however, is so often used as an unemphatic par- 
 ticle in the senses of indeed, of course, I suppose, etc., 
 that whenever there is any emphasis on well, it should be 
 translated by gut, rcdjt gut, feljr gut, red)t tooljt or fefyr 
 too 1)1 : 
 
 The boy speaks German well 
 
 I know your friend well 
 
 I know very well that you were 
 
 at home 
 The old woman scolded him 
 
 well 
 
 2. With the verb to he : 
 
 She is quite well again 
 
 That is well 
 
 It is well with him 
 
 It is well for us that you came 
 
 3. Idioms: 
 as well as fomoljt aU and) 
 well done! feljr gnt! . 
 well to do mofylfyabenb 
 well enough ju'emltd) gut 
 all is well that ends well (Snbe 
 
 gut, alle§ gnt 
 
 II. Interjection. 9?uu, to of) tan : 
 
 Well, let us start 2Bol)lan, tafjt un8 aufbredjen 
 
 Well, how did you sleep 9?un, tine fyaft bu gefdjlafen 
 
 Well, then, begin 9?un gut, fattgen @ie an 
 
 35er $nabe foridjt gnt 2)eutfd) 
 3d) fenne beinen greunb red)t gut 
 3d) ttetfj red)t gut, baft bit gu §aufe 
 
 tuarft 
 ®ic SHtc fdjalt il)n gnt (or titdjttg) 
 
 au8 
 
 ©ie ift nrieber ganj rooljt, or gefunb 
 2)a« ift gut 
 <S8 ftefyt tt)ol)t tntt il)m 
 @« ift gut fur un8 (or e« ift ein ©Uicf 
 fiir unS), bajj bit famft 
 
 and well he might nub mit SKedjt 
 well off gut baran 
 to take a thing well etroaS gut auf* 
 nefjmen 
 
136 
 
 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 205. When. I. Adv. The interrogative adverb when 
 is toctrnt: 
 
 When did Goethe die? SBatm ftarb ©oetlje ? 
 
 I was asked when I should SJlott fragtc mid), to cum id^ abreifen 
 depart roerbe 
 
 II. Conj. TT^^ti should be translated by aU, when re- 
 ferring to an individual act or condition in the past ; when 
 it is equal to whenever, it should be translated by luenn ; 
 see 141 : 
 
 When Correggio first saw Ea- 
 phaePs ' Saint Cecilia/ he ex- 
 claimed : " And I, too, am a 
 painter " 
 
 When I was in Paris (i. e. I 
 was there but once), I often 
 went to the theatre 
 
 When (i. e. whenever) I was 
 absent, my younger brother 
 took my place 
 
 When (i. e. whenever) I go to 
 Europe, I never fail to visit 
 Munich 
 
 When you visit us the next 
 time, you must stay longer 
 
 When still very young, the 
 prince was sent to England 
 
 2H8 Correggio mm erftett WlaU 9ta= 
 pfyaets ,§eitige GiacUia' falj, rief 
 er cms: „Unb id) bin and) ein 
 Scaler" 
 
 2118 id) in $ari8 roar, gtng id) oft ins 
 Sweater 
 
 SBenn id) abtoefenb roar, ttaljm tnetn 
 jiingerer 23ruber nteine ©telle ein 
 
 2Benn id) nad) (Suropa gelje, oerfeljte 
 id) niemate 2ftiind)en m befudjen 
 
 SSenn ©ie un8 ba8 nadtfte Wlal be* 
 fudjen, miiffett @te langer bleiben 
 
 5118 ber ^ring nod) gang jimg mar, 
 rourbe er nad) (Snglanb gefanbt 
 
 206. Where. Adv. 1. 3So ; = whither toofjtn ; /rom 
 where tvoi)tx (see 134, 2) : 
 
 Where do you live ? 
 
 May I ask where you are 
 
 going ? 
 Where does he come from ? 
 
 2. Compounds (see 28, 2) : 
 
 2Bo rooljtten ©ie? 
 
 Starf id) fragen, rooljht @ic geljen, 
 
 or roo ©ie fytngeljen ? 
 SBoljer fommt er, or roo fommt er 
 
 Ijer? * 
 
ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 137 
 
 whereabout too, too fjcntm 
 whereas (since), see 188 ; (while 
 
 on the other hand) to(il)renb, 
 
 tooljtngegen 
 whereat toobei, tooriiber; see 153 
 wherever too nur immer; see 165 
 
 wherein toorin 
 
 whereof toooon, tooriiber; see 178 
 
 whereon tooran, toorauf; see 180 
 
 whereto to out 
 
 whereupon tooranf 
 
 wherewith toomit 
 
 207. While (whilst). Conj. 9Baf)renb ; see 141 : 
 
 While I slept, the boat drifted 
 
 away 
 He is a soldier, while his 
 
 brother is a physician 
 While in Paris, I learned of my 
 
 uncle's death 
 
 2Scit)renb id) fd)tief, trieb ba§ S8oot 
 
 baoon 
 <£x if! <Solbat, toarjrenb fein ©ruber 
 
 Hrjt ift 
 SBa^renb id) in ^aris roar, fjorte id) 
 
 Don bem £obe meineS Onfels 
 
 208. Whether. Conj 
 
 I doubt whether he will come 
 I asked the doctor whether I 
 should continue the medi- 
 cine or not 
 Whether or no, he must yield 
 
 Prep. 
 
 D6: 
 
 3d) gtoeifle, ob er fommen toirb 
 3d) frctgtc ben 5)oftor, ob id) fort= 
 
 fatjren folle, bie 2ftebigiu eingu- 
 
 nerjtnen, ober nid)t 
 Ob er nun rotH ober md)t, er mufi 
 
 nad)geben 
 
 : together with, accompanied 
 
 griebrid) fam mit einem grogen 
 
 §eere 
 (Sr (pielte mit feinen @d)u(fameraben 
 
 33aU 
 Wlit {or gegen) . . . fampfen 
 
 209. With. 
 
 by, mit: 
 
 Frederick came with a great 
 army 
 
 He played ball with his school- 
 mates 
 
 To fight with [or against) . . . 
 
 a. With, accompanied by an unaccented pronoun, may- 
 be translated by mit, used adverbially : 
 
 Come with us $ommt mit 
 
 I should like to go with you 3d) modjte gent mttge^en 
 
 b. With, governing a noun followed by a participle or 
 an adverbial phrase, may be rendered by the accusative ; 
 see 81. 
 
138 ADVERBS, ETC. 
 
 2. = near, in the house of, about a person, 6et : 
 
 She lives with her parents ©ie tuofynt bet iljren Csltertt 
 
 I have the account with me 3d) fjabe bie Sftedjnnng bei mir 
 
 He has influence with the mi- (Sr tjctt (Sinflng bei bem 2ftintfter 
 
 nister 
 
 It is different with the French, (§3 ift anberS bet ben granjofen 
 
 (or in France) 
 
 3. To express means or manner, tntt : 
 
 I am writing with your pen 3dj fd)reibe mtt beiner geber 
 
 With pleasure 2ftit $ergnitgen 
 
 With great difficulty 9ftit grower Wliity 
 
 With these words he departed 9fttt btefen SSorten ging er fort 
 
 4. To express cause, t>or ; after a passive verb, t>on : 
 
 Mad with pain SSaljnfinntg Dor ©d)mergen 
 
 Bowed down with grief $om Summer gebiuft 
 
 5. = inspite of, bet, tro| : 
 
 With all his money he is a S8et (or trofe) all feinem ©eibe ift er 
 poor man bod) em armer Wlann 
 
 210. Within. I. Adv. Snnen, brinnen; after a verb 
 
 of motion, nad) tnnen, fjtncin, herein (see 133) : 
 
 It is warm and pleasant within 3nnen (or brinnen) ift e§ warm unb 
 
 an g en e$ m 
 He came within (£r lam herein 
 
 He went within (§r ging Ijinetn 
 
 From within $on tnnen, t»on brinnen 
 
 II. Prep, 3m, innertjatb ; of time, also binnett : 
 Within the church 3n ber $ird)e 
 
 Within certain limits 3nnert)alb genriffer ©renjen 
 
 This is not within my power 2)te8 ftel)t ntd)t in meiner ©eroalt 
 Within three days 93tnnen brei £agen 
 
 211. Without. I. Adv. Without, outside (183), auften, 
 brauften ; after a verb of motion, ttad) auf$en, f)inait$, f)erau3 
 (see 133): 
 
WORD-ORDER. 139 
 
 I had to stand without, in the 3d) mugte brcmgen im Sftegen fteljen 
 
 rain 
 
 He went without (5r ging IjinauS 
 
 From without 35on augeit 
 
 II. Prep. 1. = not within, au^erf)a!6 : 
 Without the gates of the city Slufjerfjatb bev ©tabttljore 
 
 2. = not withy oI)itc (see 10) : 
 
 The poor woman was entirely 2)ie armc S^u tt)ar tiotlftanbtg otjne 
 
 without means Sftittet 
 
 A knife without a blade (Sin Sfteffer oljne $linge 
 
 3. A verbal noun in -ing dependent on without should 
 be rendered by an infinitive with ^it ; see 128, 5 a. 
 
 TOaorJ)^©r5et* 
 
 <~ 
 
 212. A sentence is called declaratory when it expresses 
 a simple statement ; it is called interrogative, when it ex- 
 presses a question ; it is called optative, when it expresses 
 a wish. 
 
 213. There are three ways of arranging the German 
 sentence ; they differ only in the position of the finite 
 verb. 
 
 I. The finite verb occupies the second place : 
 
 a. in all independent declaratory sentences ; 
 
 b. in independent interrogative sentences beginning 
 with an interrogative pronoun, adjective, or adverb. 
 
 This may be called the Normal Order. 
 
 II. The finite verb occupies the first place : 
 
 a. in all independent interrogative sentences in which 
 
140 WOKD-ORDER. 
 
 the question is not expressed by an interrogative pronoun, 
 adjective, or adverb ; 
 
 b. in interrogative clauses used to express a condition 
 (see 235, 2) ; 
 
 c. in independent optative sentences (see 235, 3) ; 
 
 d. quite rarely, merely for emphasis (see 235, 4). 
 
 This may be called the Interrogative or Emphatic 
 Order. 
 
 III. The finite verb occupies the last place in all sub- 
 ordinate clauses. This may be called the Dependent 
 Order. 
 
 I. THE NORMAL ORDER. 
 
 214. In all independent declaratory sentences the finite 
 verb occupies the second place ; it may be preceded either 
 by the subject, with its qualifiers, or by any other one 
 element of the sentence with its qualifiers, which the 
 writer or speaker for rhetorical reasons may wish to place 
 first. 
 
 215. A word may be placed at the head of the sen- 
 tence either for emphasis ; or to establish a proper logical 
 connection with the preceding sentence ; or, simply, for 
 the sake of variety, so that every sentence may not begin 
 with the same element. Thus, for instance : 
 
 My father gave me yesterday a book 
 
 SJcein SSater f djenf te mir gefteru ein 23ud), or 
 9ft ir f 6) e u ! t e mein 55a ter geftent ein SBnd), or 
 
 ©eftern f d) e n ! t e mein $ater ntir ein SBnd), or 
 Sin 23ud) fdfyenfte mir tnein $ater geftent 
 
 My father has not given me the book, he has only lent it to me 
 ©efdjenft 1) a t mir mein $ater ba% 23ud) nidjt, nur getieljen 
 
WORD-ORDER. 141 
 
 a. The same effect which is produced in English by 
 such constructions as 
 
 It was in Strassburg that he met Goethe 
 
 may generally be produced in German by placing the em- 
 phasized element at the beginning of the sentence : 
 
 3n ©trctgburg traf er mit ©oetlje gufammen 
 although it is quite correct to say : 
 
 (58 mar in ©tragbitrg, mo er mit ©oetlje jmjammentraf 
 
 216. The number of words which may precede the 
 finite verb is unlimited, provided they form only one of 
 the elements of the sentence, i. e. either the subject, or 
 an object, or the predicate, or an adverbial phrase. The 
 subject, for instance, may consist of a noun, preceded by 
 the article and one or more adjectives, and followed by a 
 relative clause or an adverbial phrase, any part of which 
 may again be qualified by some other adjunct; these alto- 
 gether are regarded as forming only one of the constituent 
 parts of the sentence and they may thus all precede the 
 finite verb. Several adverbs or adverbial phrases quali- 
 fying one another or in apposition with one another, may 
 be regarded as one element of the sentence, and may pre- 
 cede the finite verb. Thus : 
 
 The king, who up to the day S)cr $ontg, ber bi8 an bem £age, on 
 
 when this discovery was roetd)em biefc (Sntbecfung gemad)t 
 
 made, had had the greatest murbe, ba% grogte SBertrauen in 
 
 confidence in his minister, fetnen Sftmtfkr gefyabt Ijatte, mar 
 
 was greatly shocked by his fiber feine £reutoftgfeit feljr be= 
 
 infidelity ftiiqt 
 
 In the house on the hill, a 3n bem §anfe auf bem §iigel molmt 
 
 hermit has lived for many fcfyon fett trielen 3al)ren ein ©in* 
 
 years jteMer 
 
142 
 
 WORD-ORDER. 
 
 a. A noun, adjective or participle, which precedes the 
 subject in apposition, is regarded as a separate element of 
 the sentence, as it generally takes the place of an adver- 
 bial clause and may easily be resolved into such a clause ; 
 it should, therefore, be followed by the finite verb : 
 
 An enemy of all pomp (= be- Sin ftehtb atteS $runfe8, entlteg bcr 
 
 cause he was an enemy of 
 
 all pomp), the young king at 
 
 once discharged many of the 
 
 court officials 
 Faithful to his vow, he devoted 
 
 the rest of his life to the 
 
 care of the poor 
 Tired from his long journey, 
 
 he lay down under a tree 
 
 jimge $ontg fofort t>iele ber §of= 
 beatnten 
 
 @emem ©eliibbe getreit, nubmete cr 
 
 ben Sfteft femes £eben$ ber Wege 
 
 ber airmen 
 (Srmiibet toon feiner tangen Sftetfe, 
 
 legte er ftd) unter einem 23aume 
 
 nicber 
 
 217. The purely coordinating conjunctions, especially 
 unb and, ober or, aber, fonbcrn out (see 161, II), aUeitt hut, 
 bernt for, when standing at the beginning of a sentence, 
 are felt only as links connecting two sentences, not as 
 elements of either ; hence they do not count in deter- 
 mining the position of the verb. A few others, especially 
 bocf), jebod) yet, however, enttoeber either, and jtoctr, to be 
 sure, may or may not count : 
 
 W)tx g-riebrid) fyiett jein SBerfpredjen 
 
 m'djt 
 3)a§ 3eid)en nntrbe gcgeben, unb 
 
 balb itoiitete tie ©d)iad)t auf ber 
 
 garden 2tnie 
 @ei flitt, ober bu mufet ba$ .Bonier 
 
 toeriaffen 
 3ttoar Uerfrcr)e id) (or groar id) toer- 
 
 ftefye) tmr toeing toon ber 2ftufif, 
 
 bod) liebe id) {or bod) id) IkU) jte 
 
 But Frederick did not keep his 
 
 promise 
 The signal was given, and soon 
 
 the battle raged along the 
 
 whole line 
 Keep quiet, or you must leave 
 
 the room 
 To be sure, I know very little 
 
 about music, but I am very 
 
 fond of it 
 
WORD-ORDER. 143 
 
 218. If two or more parallel clauses having the same 
 subject are connected by nnb, the subject need not be re- 
 peated in the second and following clauses, but in that 
 case the finite verb must immediately follow unb : 
 
 On the third day the stranger 91m britten Xage ertyelt ber grembe 
 received his money and then fctn ©elb itnb oerUefj bann bie 
 
 left the town ©tabt, or unb bann toertieg cr bie 
 
 @tabt 
 
 219. Exclamations are generally felt as standing out- 
 side of the" limits of the sentence, even without being 
 separated by periods or exclamation points : 
 
 Alas ! it was too late 2Id) ! e8 mar fdjon gu fpdt 
 
 Well, I have done what you SRun, id) Ijabe getfjan, tuad bu 
 desired roiinfdjtejl 
 
 220. Occasionally, concessive clauses at the head of a 
 
 sentence are disregarded in determining the position of 
 
 the finite verb of the principal clause : 
 
 Even if you start at once, you SScnn hn and) fofort abretfefi, bu 
 will arrive there too late fommft bod) )ii jpcit an, instead of 
 
 jo (see 140 and 221) fommft bu 
 
 bod) gu fpat an 
 
 However weighty reasons the @o nrid)tige ©riinbc ber 9ftimfter 
 
 minister might bring for- aud) toorbungcnmodjte, ber^onig 
 
 ward, the king would not adjtete ntd)t auf feine SBorte, in- 
 
 heed his words stead of fo ad)tett ber $onig bod) 
 
 md)t auf jetne SBorte 
 
 221. If the first element of the sentence consists of 
 several words, these may be summed up in a demonstra- 
 tive pronoun or adverb (see 140), which then, naturally, 
 also precedes the verb, since it cannot be considered an 
 independent element of the sentence : 
 
 By the well, outside the gate, 51m SBrunncn Dor bcm £I)ore, 
 There stands a linden-tree 2)a fteljt ciu SJtnben&aum 
 
144 WORD-ORDER. 
 
 Whoever says this, lies SSer ba$ fagt, ber hlgt 
 
 Although he is poor, yet he is Dbgletd) er arm ifi, fo ift er bod) 
 
 very much respected fefyr angefefjen 
 
 The more you give him, the 3c tnefyr bit tljm gtBfr, befro meljr 
 
 more he will ask nrirb er Derlangen _ V- 
 
 222. It has been stated that the finite verb always 
 occupies the second place in the sentence. If the subject 
 does not precede the finite verb, it generally follows im- 
 mediately, but it may be separated from the finite verb by 
 a pronoun or an adverbial phrase bearing comparatively 
 little emphasis : 
 
 Yesterday, my father gave me ©eftern fcfyenfte mir mein SBater etn 
 
 a book 33ud) 
 
 Now it is once more my broth- 3efct fontmt ttueber eirnnat mein 
 
 er's turn ©ruber an bie 9talje 
 
 For this reason, a Democrat SDeSfyalb ttntrbe im ttadjften 3al)re 
 
 was elected the next year ein 2)emofrat erttaljlt 
 
 a. When the subject is a pronoun bearing little or no 
 emphasis, it should naturally stand either before, or im- 
 mediately after, the ve*b ; this applies also to e£ in e3 gibt 
 (see 193, 2) : 
 
 Yesterday he gave me a book ©efiern $ab cr mir {never mir er) 
 
 ein 23ud) 
 At that time there was no 3)amat8 gab e§ feine @djufe im 
 school in the village 2)orfe 
 
 223. The order of words may be further varied by the 
 use of the impersonal e3 as a temporary or anticipatory 
 subject before the verb ; the latter is followed (see 222) 
 by the real (or logical) subject with which it must agree 
 in number (see 82). This construction is used to render 
 sentences beginning with the "expletive" there (see 192, 
 3) j but it may ai, :> be employed with great freedom in 
 
WORD-ORDER. 145 
 
 translating ordinary English sentences in which the sub- 
 ject precedes the verb, except, of course, when the subject 
 is a pronoun. It may be used for variety, or for emphasis, 
 or to bring the subject into closer proximity to some other 
 part of the sentence that may follow, e. g. a relative 
 clause. Thus : 
 
 A hundred thousand persons (§8 tocmberten lefcteS 3af)r fjunbert* 
 
 emigrated to the United tcmfenb ^erfoneu it ad) ben SBer* 
 
 States last year eintgten <§taatm au8 
 
 Nobody can now claim that I (S3 fann Jet^t memaiib befjaupten, 
 
 have not done my duty baft id) meine ^flidjt nid)t getljan 
 
 l)abe 
 
 Many now complained of him, (§3 beHagten fid) ityt fiber tf)n triefe, 
 
 who had formerly been his Me friifyer feine beften greunbe ge* 
 
 best friends toefen roaren 
 
 224. The parts of the sentence not already provided 
 for by the foregoing rules are then arranged in the re- 
 verse order of their logical importance : the most impor- 
 tant element, viz. the most direct adjunct of the finite 
 verb, occupies the last place ; it is preceded by the next 
 important element, often its own qualifier; that, by the 
 next in importance, etc. The finite verb near the begin- 
 ning of the sentence with its most direct complement at 
 the end of the sentence thus form a framework inside of 
 which the remaining elements of the sentence are ar- 
 ranged, the heaviest elements tending toward the end of 
 the sentence. 
 
 225. If the finite verb is an auxiliary, its most direct 
 adjunct is the infinitive or past participle belonging to it; 
 the latter should therefore stand at the end of the sen- 
 tence : 
 
146 
 
 WORD-ORDER. 
 
 His uncle had died three 
 
 months before 
 Professor &. will build a house 
 
 next year 
 I cannot come to-morrow 
 The bridge had been torn away 
 Tannhauser is to be given next 
 
 Monday 
 
 ©etn Onfel roar Dor brei SWonatcn 
 
 geftorben 
 ^3rofeffor ©. roirb [ftdj] nacfjftes 
 
 3a^r ein Jpaus bauen 
 3dj farm morgen nid)t fontmen 
 3)ie 93rMe roar roeggeriffen roorben 
 9Md)ften Sftoutag foil Xannfyaujer 
 
 gcgeben roerben 
 
 226. First in importance among the complements of 
 the principal verb rank the adverbs of place and direction 
 (see 130) ; such adverbs, therefore, stand at the end of the 
 sentence and yield this position only to infinitives or past 
 participles, as according to 225, in which case they are 
 prefixed to them. Such other adverbial or substantive 
 qualifiers as are essential to the meaning of the verb, or 
 as form with the verb more or less fixed or idiomatic ex- 
 pressions, are similarly treated, except that only the 
 shortest and most common among them are ever prefixed 
 to their verbs. It has been customary to speak of such 
 combinations of verbs with their qualifiers as " separable 
 compound verbs." 
 
 Wltin $ater fam gejlern guriitf 
 9Mn $ater roirb morgen gimid* 
 
 fommert 
 Sfteitt $ater ifi nodj ttidjt gitriicfge* 
 
 fommeti 
 <£x fcfyroieg fttfl 
 (§r mug ftifljdjroetgen 
 §ent€ ftnbet feine SBerfammhtng 
 
 ftatt 
 SDiefe 28odje Ijat feme $erfammiuug 
 
 ftattgefunben 
 SDer 9ftd)ter oerurteitte bn\ ©efan* 
 
 genen gum Zo^e 
 £>cr ©efangene roirb gum £obe oer* 
 
 urteilt roerben 
 
 | My father came back yesterday 
 My father will return to-mor- 
 row 
 My father has not yet come 
 
 back 
 He remained silent 
 He must remain silent 
 No meeting takes place to-day 
 
 No meeting has taken place 
 this week 
 
 The judge condemned the pris- 
 oner to death 
 
 The prisoner will be condemned 
 to death 
 
WORD-ORDER. 147 
 
 227. Next in importance rank the negatives mtf)t not, 
 liic, ttiemalS never, feine3n>cg§ not at all, and others : 
 
 My father will not give me the 9ftem SSater mitt mir ba% 23ud) nic^t 
 
 book geben 
 
 The meeting will not take 2>ie SBerfammlung nrirb fyeute nidjt 
 
 place to-day ftattftnben 
 
 I have never seen the president 3d) l)abe ben ^raftbenten nic ge* 
 
 fefyen 
 
 228. In regard to the arrangement of the remaining 
 members of the sentence greater freedom prevails, but, as 
 a rule, the same general principle, viz. that the elements 
 which bear the greatest stress tend toward the end of the 
 sentence, here also holds good. For that reason, the direct 
 object, as a rule, stands nearer the end of the sentence 
 than the indirect, but not by any means always : 
 
 My friend did not tell me this 2ftetn ftreunb fflt mir biefe @e= 
 
 story - fdjidjte nid)t ergciljlt 
 But 
 
 My friend did not tell it to his 9Mn greunb l)at e$ feinem 93ater 
 
 father nidjt ergaljtt 
 
 Notice the same difference in the arrangement of the two sentences in 
 English. 
 
 229. In doubtful cases, the relative importance of two 
 elements may sometimes be determined by considering 
 which of the two might be omitted with less injury to 
 the general sense of the passage : 
 
 " Where were you last night !" „3Bo tnaren ©ie geftern Slbenb ?" 
 
 "I was at home until 10 „3d) mar bi8 10 lu)r gu §aufe" 
 o'clock n 
 
 I bought a horse at once and 3d) faufte mir fogletd) ein $ferb unb 
 
 took a riding-lesson every nat)m taglid) eine Sftettftunbe 
 
 day 
 
 He was sent to Siberia by or- (Sr unirbe ouf 33efet)l be$ Q^aren 
 
 der of the Czar nad) ©ibirten gejtfjidft 
 
V 
 
 148 WORD-ORDER. 
 
 Bliicher marched upon Paris 231itd)er tnarfdjierte mit ber grogten 
 with the greatest rapidity ©ejdjminbigfeit auf ^)3ari8 311 
 
 230. In very long sentences, there is a tendency to dis- 
 tribute the less weighty elements between the weightier 
 ones so as not to throw the whole weight of the sentence 
 on one end ; the beginner should avoid long sentences. \ 
 
 231. As to the arrangement of the various words con-i 
 stituting one of the elements of the sentence, it should be 
 borne in mind that, as a general rule, the qualifier pre- 
 cedes the word qualified. It is particularly important to 
 observe this rule in so far as it applies to infinitives, ad- 
 jectives and participles. 
 
 1. Infinitives are always preceded by their qualifiers 
 (see 119, 1) : 
 
 It is easier to criticise a book (§8 ift leidjter, eutSBud) gu Mtifteren, 
 
 than to write a better one al§ eirt beffereg gu fdjreiben 
 
 The thief stole through the 2)er 2)ieb fd)Ud) burd) ba% Sunnier, 
 
 room without awakening the oljne Me 23ett)ofmer gu erroecfen; 
 
 occupants see 128, 5 a 
 
 2. Adjectives and past participles used attributively 
 must be preceded by their qualifiers : 
 
 The two hundred knights, faith- 2)ie gmeilnmbert tfyrem §ergoge bis 
 
 ful unto death to their duke, in ben Sob getreuen fitter xotu 
 
 declined to surrender the gerten fief), bie 23urg p iibergeben 
 castle 
 
 We stopped over night in a SSir btieben nber 9?ad)t in einem 
 
 village situated at the foot of am guge be8 ©ebtrgeS geiegenen 
 
 the mountains 2)orfe 
 
 3. Adjectives and past participles used predicatively or 
 appositively are, as a rule, preceded by their qualifiers, 
 but longer phrases sometimes follow : 
 
WORD-ORDER. 149 
 
 This story is very similar to 3)iefe ©efdjidjte ifi eiuer fe^r a'fmlid), 
 
 one which Goethe tells in his meldje ©oetlje in feiner ©elbftbio- 
 
 autobiography grapt)ie ergafytt 
 
 The count, faithful to the vow 2)er ©raf, bem ©eliibbe getreu (or 
 
 which he had made in the getreu bem ©eliibbe), rceldjeS er 
 
 face of death, made a pil- im $ngeftd)te be8 £obe8 getfjan 
 
 grimage to the Holy Land Ijatte, mad)te eine SMfaljrt nad) 
 
 bem fjeittgen £anbe 
 
 Struck with the strange sight, $on bem fettfamen SInbticfe betrof= 
 
 the young painter gazed at fen (or betroffen toon bem felt* 
 
 the maiden without being famen ^nblicfe), ftarrte ber junge 
 
 able to speak a word Sftater ba% Sftabdjen an, oljne cin 
 
 SBort fpredjen gu fonnen 
 
 4 Present participles are always preceded by their 
 qualifiers : 
 
 The bottle standing on my 2)ie auf metnem ^utte fteljenbe 
 
 desk contains poison Stafdje enttjcitt ©ift 
 
 Ashamed of his conduct, the ©id) feine8S8etragen$fd)cimenb,ent» 
 
 young man withdrew from fernte ftd) ber junge Sttann au8 
 
 the company ber ©efellfdjaft 
 
 232. The finite verb also occupies the second place in 
 
 all questions marked as such by an interrogative pronoun, 
 
 adjective or adverb : 
 
 Who will go with me to walk ? 2Ber mitt nut mir tyaflieren gefyen ? 
 
 Where did you buy this pic- 2Bo ftaft bu bieS 23Ub gefauft ? 
 
 ture? 
 
 Which picture do you mean ? 2Betd)e8 23itb meinji bu ? 
 
 233. The declaratory order may also be used in rhe- 
 torical questions to express astonishment : 
 
 Do you mean to say that you 9?ur arocmgig Wlaxt fyaben ©ie (or 
 
 paid only twenty marks for fatten ©ie, see 114 ff.) fur biefeS 
 
 this book ? 23ud) be$af)tt ? 
 
 Is it possible that you have ©ie tjaben Camlet nie gelefen? 
 never read Hamlet ? 
 
150 WORD-OUDER. 
 
 II. THE INTERROGATIVE OR EMPHATIC ORDER. 
 
 234. In the interrogative or emphatic order the finite 
 verb occupies the first place ; all the other elements of the 
 sentence are arranged as in the declaratory order. 
 
 235. 1. The interrogative order is used in questions 
 not marked as such by an interrogative pronoun, adjective 
 
 or adverb : 
 
 Has he ever read Wallenstein ? £at er iemalS SBafleiifteht getefen ? 
 Do you believe that she will ©laubeit ©ie {see 85), baft fte etit* 
 
 consent? ttulligen tturb? 
 
 Did you hear the new singer ? §aben @ie {see 110) bie neue ®an* 
 
 gerin gefyort? 
 Is she going to appear to-night? SSirb fte (see 124, 3 b) l)eute $&enb 
 
 cmftretett ? or tvitt fie tjeute 9j(beiib 
 auf? see 108 
 
 2. The interrogative order is also used to express a con- 
 dition (see 171, 2) : 
 
 Are you really my friend, then SBift bu tturfUd) metn greunb, fo er* 
 
 do me this favor toeife mir biefe @unft 
 
 Had he known the man, he §citte (see 118, 1) er ben Sftaun ge* 
 
 would never have granted famtt, fo toiirbe er ifym bie ^Bitte 
 
 his request ttie getoafyrt fyaben 
 
 You look as if you did not be- 2)u fteljji a\\8, al3 gtaubteft bu e« 
 
 lieve it itid)t 
 
 3. In independent optative sentences (see 112) the verb 
 occupies the first place, except in a few fixed expressions 
 like those mentioned in 112, 1; in imperative sentences, 
 also, the verb usually stands first : 
 
 Would that I had never seen §atte idj bid) bodj me gefeljen ! 
 
 you! 
 
 Take this letter to the post- £ragen @te biefen iBrief auf bit 
 
 office Wt 
 
 4. When accompanied by bod), \a, or jet bod), the verb 
 is sometimes placed first merely for emphasis : 
 
WORD-ORDER. 151 
 
 Let me stay a little longer; £af$ mid) nod) ein roenig tterroetfen; 
 [for] I have never seen any- rjab' id) bod) nie etroaS fdjonereS 
 
 thing more beautiful gefeljen 
 
 III. THE DEPENDENT ORDER. 
 
 236. Every dependent clause begins with a conjunction 
 or a relative pronoun and ends with the finite verb ; the 
 remaining elements of the clause are arranged as in inde- 
 pendent declaratory sentences. The most direct qualifier 
 of the verb thus comes to stand immediately before it, 
 and if it is one of the common adverbs of place it is pre- 
 fixed to the verb (see 130) ; this is also done with a few 
 of the most common other adverbial and substantive 
 qualifiers of the verb, as explained in 226 : 
 
 I saw Bismarck last summer, 3d) fal) 53i$mard le^ten ©ommer, 
 
 when I was in Berlin a(§ id) in ^Berlin roar 
 
 I have read the book which 3d) fyaht ba% 23ud) gefefen, roeld)e$ 
 
 you recommended to me @ie mtr empfol)fen Ijaben 
 
 I shall go, unless he comes 34 gefye fort, roemt er nid)t bcttb gu= 
 
 back very soon riicftommt 
 
 The concert which took place 2)a§ Concert, roetd)e$ geftera $benb 
 
 last night was poorly at- flattfanb, roar jd)ted)t befud)t 
 
 tended 
 
 a. Substantive clauses may be formally independent, 
 while logically dependent ; see 115. 
 
 b. A condition may be expressed by the interrogative 
 order, instead of by a conjunction with the dependent 
 order ; see 235, 2. 
 
 237. When in a dependent clause the past participle of 
 a modal auxiliary or of any other verb has the form of an 
 infinitive (see 98), the finite verb, which then apparently 
 governs two infinitives, generally precedes these, instead 
 of standing at the end of the clause : 
 
152 WORD-ORDER. 
 
 I am very glad that I have @8 freut mid) fefyr, bag id) 3^ncn 
 
 been able to render you this btefen 3)ienft Ijabe leiftett fonnen, 
 
 service instead of letften fomteit fyaht 
 
 Here is a book which you §ier ift ein 23nd), toeldjeS bu Ijtitteft 
 
 ought to have read, before lefen follen (instead of lefen fotten 
 
 writing anything on this sub- Ijatteft), efje bu ettoa^ iiber bicfen 
 
 ject ©egenftcmb fcfyriebft 
 
 238. The subject of a dependent clause is usually 
 
 placed immediately after the introductory conjunction or 
 
 relative pronoun (unless the latter itself is the subject) ; 
 
 but it may be separated from them by a pronoun or an 
 
 adverb bearing comparatively little emphasis : 
 
 2)a$ 8udj, tt>etd)e8 mein SBater mir fdjenfte, or toeldjes mir mem SSater 
 
 fdjenfte, tc. 
 SBeim morgen fein SBrief fommt, :c. 
 
 239. In dependent clauses, the auxiliaries f)ct6en and 
 fein may sometimes be omitted, when no misunderstanding 
 can arise : 
 
 The storm came sooner than 2)a8 ©emitter tarn eljer al3 tt)ir ge* 
 
 we had thought bad)t [fatten] 
 
 The news that the emperor 2)te 9?ad)rid)t, baft ber $aifer plbfc* 
 
 had suddenly died caused lid) geftorben [fei or mare], oerurs 
 
 great consternation fad^te aflgememe 33eftur$img 
 
 240. If several coordinate dependent clauses have the 
 same finite verb, it need not be expressed except in the 
 last: 
 
 I told him that I had paid the 3d) fagte iljm, baft id) bie SKedjmmg 
 bill, but had lost the receipt be$af)lt, ober bie Ouittung t»cr- 
 
 loren ^atte 
 
 241. Exclamatory questions beginning with an inter- 
 rogative pronoun, adjective or adverb are usually treated 
 as dependent clauses, a governing phrase like / wonder, or 
 is it not strange ? being understood : 
 
WORD-ORDER. 153 
 
 How many books you buy SBic oiefe Silver bu jebe$ 3a!jr 
 every year! fcwfft! 
 
 IV. PERIODS. 
 
 242. As every dependent clause is a part of some in- 
 dependent sentence (or of another dependent clause), its 
 position within the sentence is, strictly speaking, deter- 
 mined by the rules given above for the construction of 
 independent sentences. Dependent sentences should, 
 therefore, be arranged, in their proper order, not more than 
 one before the finite verb, the others between the finite 
 verb and its most direct adjunct at the end of the sen- 
 tence : 
 
 When the war was over, the $U$ ber $rteg ooriiber toax, fefjrte 
 
 great general returned again ber gro&e gelbf)err ttrieber %\i ben 
 
 to the studies which had in- ©tubten, ntit bcnen er fid) fdjon 
 
 terested him even as a boy d6 $nabe befdjaftigt fyatte, priicf 
 
 The French officers were re- 2)ie fransbftfdjeu Officiere itmrben 
 
 leased on condition that they unter ber SBebingung, bafj fie in 
 
 should not fight again in this biefem $rtege nicfyt meljr fcimpfen 
 
 war follten, entlaffen 
 
 243. It should be especially borne in mind that when 
 
 a sentence begins with a subordinate clause, the finite 
 
 verb should immediately follow, since it must occupy the 
 
 second place ; see, however, 220. Thus : 
 
 When Sully was disgraced as TO (gutty at$ SDttmfter in Ungnabe 
 a minister, he occupied him- gefallen tuar, befdjaftigte er fid) 
 self with writing his memoirs batnit, feme (Srinnernngen aufeu* 
 
 fdjreiben 
 
 244. When according to the rules for the arrangement 
 of the sentence the subject of the principal clause follows 
 
154 WORD-ORDER. 
 
 a subordinate clause having the same subject, in case a 
 pronoun is used in either clause for the subject, it should 
 be in the principal clause rather than in the subordinate : 
 
 The sentinels, when they saw 2H8 Me ©djUbtoacfyen ben getnb 
 the enemy coming, did not at fommen fafyen, ttmgten ftc nid)t 
 once know what to do fltetd), toa« fte tljim fottten 
 
 245. 1. While it is possible to regard a dependent 
 clause as one of the elements composing an independent 
 sentence, and treat it accordingly, it is also generally al- 
 lowable to place it outside of the limits marked by the 
 direct complements of the finite verb : 
 
 $13 ber $rieg ooriiber roar, fefjrte ber groge gelbljerr roieber $u ben ©tu* 
 bien guritcf, mit benen er fid) fcfjon al8 $nabe befcfyafttgt Ijatte 
 
 £)ie franjbftj^en Officiere rourben unter ber 93ebingung entfaffen, bag fte 
 in biejem $riege nid)t mtfyx fampfen foltten 
 
 Compare with the sentences under 242. 
 
 2. This is very generally done ; and it ought to be done 
 whenever the number and length of the dependent clauses 
 would remove the direct complements of the finite verb 
 so far from the latter as to make the construction awk- 
 ward or unintelligible ; it is also often done for emphasis 
 or variety : 
 
 It is natural that man wants to @8 if! natiirlidj, baft ber Sftenfd) toon 
 be governed by one who was bem regiert fein mill, ber mit ifjm 
 born and educated with him geboren imb er^ogen ifi, instead of 
 
 Don bem, ber mit iljm geboren unb 
 ergogen i)t, regiert fein ttriU* 
 
 246. Not only dependent clauses, but also infinitives 
 with ^u or urn ju, with or without adjuncts, and longer 
 adverbial phrases, whether or not qualified by dependent 
 clauses, may be placed outside the limits marked by the 
 
WORD-ORDER. 155 
 
 direct complements of the finite verb or, in a subordinate 
 
 clause, by the fiuite verb itself : 
 
 He began to work (§r fitig gu arbeiten an, or cr fing an 
 
 ju arbeiten 
 He returned to the country (gr fefyrte in bo« 2anb, ba$ er (ett 
 which he had not seen since fetner 3ugenb nid)t gefefyen Ijatte, 
 his youth $urucf, or gnrfitf in ba« 2anb, ba« 
 
 zc, or in ba$ £anb aunitf, t>as tc. 
 
Bppen&fy. 
 
 THE MOST COMMON ADJECTIVES, PARTICIPLES AND 
 VERBS, REQUIRING, IN GERMAN, CONSTRUCTIONS 
 DIFFERENT FROM THE ENGLISH. 
 
 To avoid confusion, each adjective, participle and verb is followed, in 
 these lists, by the preposition or case which it governs ; it should be 
 remembered, however, that, in actual use, adjectives, participles and 
 infinitives are, as a rule, preceded by their qualifiers; see 231. 
 
 The constructions of many participles and adjectives may be inferred 
 from those of the corresponding verbs. 
 
 A. Adjectives and Participles. 
 
 abundant in, with reid) an (dat.) 
 accustomed to gerob'lntt, gen. or 
 
 an (ace.) 
 adjacent to, use the verb grcngen an 
 
 (ace.) 
 advantageous to Dorteilfyaft fitr 
 affable to leutfeiig gegen 
 affected at, by geriiljrt burd), Don 
 affectionate to gartltd) gegen 
 afflicted at, by, with belummcrt 
 
 iiber (ace), burd) 
 afraid of bauge r»or {dat) 
 akin to uerroanbt mit 
 alarmed at beunrufyigt iiber (ace), 
 
 burd) 
 allied to berbiinbet mit 
 amazed at toerttmnbert iiber (ace.) 
 angry with one bofe auf {ace.) 
 angry at, about something bofe 
 
 iiber (ace), roegen 
 anxious about, for beforgt urn, 
 
 roegen ; a. for (desirous of) be* 
 
 gterig nadj 
 apparent from erftd)tltd) au8 
 applicable to anroenbbar auf (ace.) 
 apprehensive of, use the verb fiiraV 
 
 ten, ace. 
 apt for taugltdj $u 
 ashamed of befd)dmt iiber (ace), 
 
 or use the verb fict) fdjdmeu, gen. 
 astonished at erftaunt iiber (ace.) 
 attached to befeftigt an (dat); 
 
 (devoted) gugetljan, dat. 
 attended with beglettet Don 
 attentive to aufmerffam auf (ace.) 
 averse to abgeneigt, dat. or gegen 
 aware of geroafjr, gen. or ace. 
 bare of entbtofet uon ; olme 
 beneficent to tDot)ltr)citig gegen 
 bent on entfdjloffen $u 
 benumbed with erftorrt Dor (dat) 
 blind to blinb gegen 
 
 057) 
 
158 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 blind with blinb toor {dat. ) 
 bound for, to beftimmt nad) 
 capable of ftifyig, gen. or 311 
 captivated by, with eingenommen 
 
 toon 
 careful of adjtfam aitf 
 careful for beforgt urn 
 careless of, about unbeforgt, unbe* 
 
 f iitnmert urn 
 celebrated for berufymt toegen 
 charitable to, towards tntlbt^dttg 
 
 gegen 
 charmed by, with entjiirft toon 
 civil to fyoffid) gegen 
 clear from, of rein t)on 
 close by, to bid)t bet, an (dat. or 
 
 ace.) 
 cold to fait gegen 
 comparable to toergletdjbar mit 
 concerned about, for beforgt urn 
 concerned in beteiligt an (dat. ) 
 conscious of bettmgt, gen. 
 consequent to, use the verb fotgen 
 
 anf (acc.) 
 courteous to l)5fUd) gegen 
 covetous of begierig nad) 
 cruel to granfam gegen 
 curious of neugterig anf {acc.) 
 customary with gebraud)Ud) bet 
 dazzled with geblenbet toon 
 dead to abgeftorben fitr 
 deaf to taub gegen 
 decisive of, use the verb entfdjetben, 
 
 acc. 
 delighted at, with ent$ucft liber 
 
 (acc), Don 
 dependent on abljangtg toon 
 desirous of begierig nad) 
 destructive of toerberbttd) fitr, jer* 
 
 ftorenb, acc. 
 
 destitute of ) iT ,.. , A , 
 
 devoid of }eittblo6ttoon;ol,ne 
 
 different from toerfdjieben toon 
 disgusted at, with uberbritfftg, 
 gen. or acc; or use the verb 
 SBtbernrilten empfmben gegen 
 disloyal to treuto§ gegen 
 dismayed at erfdjrocfen iiber (acc.) 
 displeased at, with ungetjatten iiber 
 (acc.) 
 
 eager for begierig nadj 
 empty of leer an (dat.) 
 eminent for anSge^eidjnet bnrdj 
 enamoured of toerltebt in (acc.) 
 engaged in, occupied befdjaftigt 
 
 mit; (concerned) toerroicfett in 
 
 (acc.) 
 engaged to toertobt mit 
 enraged at ttoiitenb iiber (acc.) 
 envious of netbifd) anf (acc.) 
 essential to roefentlid) fiir 
 exempt from fret toon 
 faint with matt toor (dat.) 
 famed, famous for beriilmtt roegen 
 far from fern, meit entfernt toon 
 fatigued with ermitbet toon 
 favorable for, to giinjtig, dat. 
 fearful of tool! gurdjt toor (dat.) 
 fearless of oljne gitrdjt toor (dat) 
 fertile of, in frndjtbar an (dat.) 
 fit for taugtid), paffenb gu 
 fond of eittgenommen toon, ergeben, 
 
 dat, or use lichen 
 forgetful of, use the verb toergeffen, 
 
 gen. or acc. 
 free from frei toon 
 friendly to freunbttd) gegen 
 frightened at erfdjrocfen iiber (acc.) 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 159 
 
 fruitful in frudjtbar, ergiebtg an 
 (dot,) 
 
 full of Doll Don, or gen. 
 generous to grogmiitig gegen 
 glad of fro!) iiber (ace), or gen. 
 good for tctuglid) $u 
 good to, towards gut gegen 
 gracious to gnabtg gegen 
 greedy of gierig nad) 
 grieved at befummert uber (ace.) 
 guilty of fd)iitbtg, gen. or an {dat.) 
 happy at, over gliicf(td) iiber (ace.) 
 heedful of adjtfam auf (ace.) 
 heedless of uiibefiimmert urn 
 ignorant of unfunbig, gen. ; unbe* 
 
 fannt mit 
 ill of, with [a disease] franf an 
 
 (dat.) ; ill with [fear, etc ] franf 
 
 Dor (dat) 
 impatient at ungebutbig iiber (ace.) 
 impatient for begiertg narf) 
 impatient of, use nid)t bulben, nid)t 
 
 ertragen, ace. 
 incensed at aufgebrad)t iiber (ace.) 
 inclusive of einjdjliefjUdj, gen. 
 independent of unabf)angig Don 
 indifferent to gteidjgittttg gegen 
 indignant at entriiftet iiber (ace.) 
 indulgent to nad)ftd)tig gegen 
 infatuated with betljbrt Don 
 inferior to geringer al8 
 inflamed with entbrannt Don 
 innocent of unfdntlbig, gen. or an 
 
 (dat) 
 insensible of, to unempftnbltd) fiir, 
 
 gegen 
 inseparable from un$ertrenntid) Don 
 insusceptible to unempftnbUd) fiir 
 intended for befttmtnt fiir; (to be) 
 
 3U 
 
 intent on (attentive) aufmerffam 
 
 auf (ace); (desirous) begierig 
 
 nad) 
 intoxicated with beraufdjt Don 
 irritated at aufgebradjt iiber (ace.) 
 jealous of etferfiidjtig auf (ace.) 
 just to geredjt gegen 
 kind to giitig gegen 
 lavish of Derjdjtoenberifd) mit 
 liberal to freigebig gegen 
 loyal to treu, dat. 
 mad with toll Dor (dat.) 
 merciful to tnitteibtg gegen 
 mindful of etngebenf, gen. 
 mortified at unangenefym beriiljrt 
 
 Don 
 moved at, by, with geriifyrt Don, 
 
 burd) 
 needing bebiirftig, gen. ; or use the 
 
 verb bebiirfen, gen. or ace. 
 negligent of nad)tafftg in S3e^ug auf 
 noted for befannt, beriitymt burd), 
 
 meg en 
 notorious for beriidjtigt burd), n>e» 
 
 gen 
 obedient to geljorfam, dat. 
 obsequious to rotllfafyrig, dat. or 
 
 gegen 
 observant of adjtfam auf (ace) 
 offended at, by Derle^t Don 
 overcome with iibermdltigt Don 
 owing to, use the verb fyerriifjreu Don 
 pale with bleid) Dor {dat.) 
 particular about genau mit 
 patient of, use the verb gebulbtg er» 
 
 tragen, ace 
 penetrated with burd)brungen Don 
 perfidious to treuloS gegen 
 pleased with erfreut iiber (ace) 
 polite to fyoflid) gegen 
 
160 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 poor in arm an {dot.) 
 popular with beltebt bei 
 posterior to tyater al8, nad) 
 prior to friiljer a(8; Dor 
 prodigal of Derjdjmenberifd) mit 
 productive of frud)tbar an (dat.) 
 profuse of oerjdimenberifd) mit 
 proud of ftolj auf (ace.) 
 provoked at, with aufgebradjt iiber 
 
 {ace.) 
 provoked by gereijt burdi 
 qualified for geetgnet 311 
 ready for bereit ju 
 reckless of unbefiimmert urn 
 red with rot Dor (dat.) 
 regardless of unbeiiimmert urn 
 related to Dermanbt mit 
 relative to begiigtid) auf (ace.) 
 remarkable for merfroiirbig meg en 
 remote from entfernt Don 
 renowned for beriifymt megen 
 replete with DoH Don 
 rich in reid) an (dat.) 
 ripe for reif ju, fur 
 rude to unpfltd) gcgen 
 safe from ftdjer Dor {dat.) 
 satisfied with befrtebtgt Don, burd) 
 secure from fidjer Dor (dat.) 
 seized with ergriffen Don 
 sensible of empfcmgltd) fiir 
 separate from getrennt Don 
 severe to, on, with fireng gegen 
 shocked at entf efct iiber (ace.) 
 short of, use the verb Sftangelleiben 
 
 an {dat) 
 sick of (tired) iiberbrujftg, gen. or 
 
 ace. 
 sick with, ill with [a disease] front 
 
 an (dat.) ; [fear, etc.] franf Dor 
 
 {dat) 
 
 solicitous about, for beforgt um, 
 
 megen 
 sorry for betriibt megen 
 stiff with fteif Dor (dat.) 
 struck with betroffen iiber (ace), 
 
 Don 
 stupefied with betaubt burd), Don 
 subsequent to, use the verb folgen 
 
 auf (ace.) 
 suffocated with erfticft burdj 
 suitable for, to angemeffen fiir 
 superior to iibertegen, dat. 
 sure of ftd)er, gen. 
 surprised at iiberrafdjt iiber (ace.) 
 susceptible to empfangltd) fiir 
 suspicious of argmofynifd) auf (ace.) 
 thoughtful of beba^t auf (ace.) 
 thoughtless of unbefiimmert um 
 terrified at, by, with erfdjrocfen 
 
 fiber (ace.) 
 tired from, with miibe, ermiibet 
 
 Don 
 tired of miibe, iiberbriifjtg, gen. or 
 
 ace, 
 touched by, with geriifyrt burd), 
 
 Don 
 transported with entgittft Don 
 treacherous to Derraterifd) gegen 
 troubled about beforgt um 
 uncertain of ungetoig, gen. or iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 unconscious of unbemufjr, gen. 
 unmindful of uneingebenf, gen. 
 uneasy about unrnljig megen 
 used to getoolmt an (ace.) 
 usual with gemofyntid) hd 
 vain of ettet auf (ace.) 
 vexed at berbrtefjlid) iiber (ace.) 
 void of leer an; of)ite 
 wasteful of Derfdjmenberifdj mit 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 161 
 
 watchful of aufnterffam auf {ace*) 
 wearied, weary, see tired 
 wet with nag Don 
 
 worn with, worn out with erfdjopf 
 
 burd) 
 worthy of inert, nmrbtg, gen. 
 
 B. Verbs 
 
 abound in Uberflug Ijaben an {dat.) 
 absolve from loSfpredjen Don 
 abstain from fid) entfyatten, gen. 
 accuse of anflagen, befdjulbtgeu, 
 
 gen. 
 accustom to getDofmeu an {ace.) 
 acquit of fretfpred)en Don 
 adapt to anpaffen, dat. or an (ace.) 
 address to rid) ten an (ace.) 
 adhere to anfyangen, dat 
 adjoin to grenjen an (ace.) 
 advise raten, dat. (person), ace. 
 
 (thing) 
 agree about iiberetnfommen iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 agree to etnttrifligen in (ace.) 
 aid in fyetfen (dat.) bei 
 ail fefjlen, dat 
 aim at gielcn auf (ace.) ; = strive 
 
 for jfrebennad) 
 allude to anfpielen auf (ace.) 
 amount to ftd) belaufen auf (ace.) 
 answer (a person) antroorten, dat. ; 
 
 (a question, a letter) antlDorten 
 
 auf (ace.), beantroorten (ace.) 
 answer for einftefjen fiir 
 appeal to ftd) berufen auf (ace.) 
 apply to ftd) tnenben an (ace.) ; 
 
 bb refer to fid) bejieljen auf (ace.) 
 apply one's self to ftd) legen auf 
 
 (acc.) t ftd) befletfHgen, gen. 
 approach [ftd)] nciljern, dat. 
 approve a thing, of a thing bttUgen, 
 
 ace. 
 arise from Ijerritljren oon 
 
 ascribe to juifcfyreiben, dot. 
 
 be ashamed of ftd) fdjamen, gen. 
 
 ask after ftdj erfunbtgen nad) 
 
 ask for a thing bitten urn; for a 
 
 person fragen nadj 
 ask of erbitten Don 
 aspire to ftreben nad) 
 assent to gufitmmen, dat. 
 assign to guroetfen, dat. 
 assist in t)etfen bei 
 assure of Derftcfyern, gen. 
 atone for fuljnen, ace. 
 attend a person, on a person, auf* 
 
 marten, dat. ; = accompany, be* 
 
 gtetten, acc.\ = take care of, 
 
 pflegen, ace. or gen. 
 attend (school, etc. ) bejudjen, ace.; 
 
 (a meeting) beitnolnten, dat 
 attend to ad)ten auf, (ace.) 
 avail one's self of benufcen, ace. 
 bear [with] ertragen, ace. 
 become of roerben auS 
 beg for bitten urn 
 beg of erbitten t)on 
 behave to ftd) betragen gegen 
 believe in gtauben an (ace.) 
 bestow on oerleiljen, dat. 
 beware of ftd) Ijitten Dor (dat.) 
 bid gebieten, dat. 
 bind to binben an (ace.) 
 blame for tabetn roegen 
 blush at erroten iiber (ace.) 
 boast of ftd) riiljmen, gen. 
 border on grenjen an (ace.) 
 borrow from, of borgen Don 
 
161 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 bow to ftdj tjemetgen Dor {dat.) 
 burn with brennen Dor {dat) 
 burst with berften Dor (dat.) 
 buy from, of fattfen Don 
 call at, on Dorfpred)en bd; befudjen, 
 
 ace. 
 call for frogen nad); gu ljoten font* 
 
 men, ace. 
 call upon ait ff orb em, ace. 
 care about ftd) futnmern urn; he 
 
 cares nothing about it e8 Uegt 
 
 iljm nid)t§ baran 
 care for, = take care of | org en 
 
 fiir; = like mbgen, ace. 
 catch at greifen nad) 
 caution against roarnen Dor (dat.) 
 change for Dertcmfdjen mit 
 change into Derroanbeln in (ace.) 
 charge with anflagen (gen.) 
 cheat out of betriigen urn 
 cling to ftd) fefttjalten, fid) anflam* 
 
 mern an (ace.) ; = remain true 
 
 anfyangen (dat.) 
 come by (obtain) edentgen, ace. ; 
 
 fommen gu 
 command, see order 
 compare to, with Dergtetdjeu mit 
 complain about, of fid) betlagen 
 
 iiber {ace.) 
 comply with ftdt) fug en, dat. 
 conceal from oerbergen, dat. or 
 
 Dor [dat) 
 conclude from fdjttegen au« 
 confer on Dedeifyen, dat. 
 confide in Dertrauen auf {ace.) 
 confine to befcrjranfen auf (ace.) 
 conform to ftd) rid)ten nad) 
 congratulate on ©liicf ttmnfdjen gu 
 consent to etnnrifligen in (ace.) 
 be composed of befteijen an%, 
 
 consist in beftetjcn in (dat.) 
 consist of befteben au3 
 contend for ftreiten um 
 contrast with, intr. abftedjen Don, 
 
 gegen; tr. entgegenftellen, gegen* 
 
 iiberfteUen, dat. 
 converse about, on fid) unterfyaf ten 
 
 iiber (ace.) 
 convert into Derroanbeln in (ace.) 
 convict of iiberfiifyren, gen. 
 crave for Dedangen nad) 
 cure of t)eilen Don 
 deal in rjanbeln mit 
 debate about, on beratfdjfogen iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 decide about, on ftd) entfdjeiben 
 
 iiber {ace.) ; d. in favor of [fid)] 
 
 entferjeiben fiir 
 decrease in abneijmen an (dat) 
 defend from Derteibigen gegen 
 defy trorjeit, dat. 
 deliberate about, on beratfdjlagen 
 
 iiber (ace.) 
 delight in ftd) erfreuen an (dat) 
 deliver from befreien Don 
 demand of f orb em Don 
 depart for abreifen nadj 
 depend on abfyangen Don; = rely 
 
 on ftd) oedaffen auf (ace.) 
 deprive of berauben, gen. 
 deserve of ftd) Derbient madjen um 
 design for befttmmen gu 
 desire begefyren, gen. or ace. 
 desist from abfteljen Don 
 despair of Dergroeifetn an (dat) 
 determine on ftd) entfcrjltefjen gu 
 die of fterben an (dat) 
 differ from ftd) mtterfdjeiben Don 
 differ with ntd)t iibcreinfitmmen 
 
 ntit 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 163 
 
 dig for graben nad) 
 direct to ridjten an (ace.) 
 disagree with nid)t ubereinfttntmeu 
 
 mit 
 disapprove of nutjbitligeu, ace. 
 dispense with oergtd)ten anf {ace.) 
 dispose of oerfiigen iiber (ace.) 
 dissuade from abroten Don 
 distinguish from unterfdjeiben Don 
 divide into teilen in (ace.) 
 doubt about, of groeifeln an (dat.) 
 drink to tvinfen anf (ace.) 
 dwell on oerroeilen bei 
 echo with nneberfjaflen Don 
 embark for ftd) einfd)iffen nad) 
 encroach on (Singriffe tfjun in (ace.) 
 end in cnbigen mit 
 engage in fid) beteiligen bei 
 enjoy geniegen, gen. or ace. 
 enter a room in ein ^tnimer treten 
 enter into ftd) eiulaffen in {ace.) 
 enter on iiberndnnen 
 escape a person, or from a person 
 
 entffieljen, entfommen, dat; from 
 
 a place, au§; one's observation, 
 
 etc. entgefyen, dat. 
 examine [into] unterfucfyen, ace. 
 exceed in ubevtreffen an (dat.) 
 exchange for Dertaufd)en gegen 
 exult at, over fvotjtocfen iiber {ace.) 
 faint with otjnmadjtig toerben Dor 
 
 (dat.) 
 fasten to befeftigen an {dat. or ace.) 
 feed on fid) emaljren Don 
 find fault with tabeln, ace. 
 lire at getter geben auf (ace.) 
 fish for ftfdjen nad) 
 fit for befafyigen gn 
 fix on fid) entfdjeiben fiir 
 flatter jd)tneid)eln, dat. 
 flee from flier)en oor (dat.) 
 
 foam with [rage] fdjaumen Dor 
 
 [2But, ace] 
 follow f of gen, dat. 
 follow from folgen an8 
 forgive oergebett, dat. {person), 
 
 ace. {thing) 
 free from befreien Don 
 gaze at anftarren (ace.) 
 glory in ftolj fein auf (ace.) 
 glow with glittjen Dor (dat.) 
 grasp at greifeu nad) 
 grieve at, for fid) grfimen urn, iiber 
 
 (ace. ) 
 grumble at murren iiber (ace.) 
 guard against, from, intr. fid) fjiiten 
 
 Dor (dat); tr. = protect, be- 
 
 fdjiiken nor (dat), gegen 
 hear about, of fyoren Don, iiber {ace.) 
 hear from l)oren Don 
 heed ad) ten, gen. or auf (ace.) 
 help Ijetfen, dat. 
 hide from oerbergen, dat. or Dor 
 
 (dat) 
 hinder from Ijinbem an {dat.) 
 hint at anjpielen auf (ace.) 
 hope for fyoffen auf (ace.) 
 hunt after, for jag en nad), nadj- 
 
 jag en, dat. 
 impose on auferlegeu, dat. ; = 
 
 cheat, betriigen, ace. 
 increase in juuer^men an (dat.) 
 indulge in fid) fyingeben, nad)* 
 
 fjangen, dat 
 inflict on auferlegen, dat 
 inform of benad)rid)tigeu Don 
 ingratiate one's self with fid) be- 
 
 tiebt madden bei 
 injure fdjaben, dat 
 inquire after fid) erfunbigen nad) 
 inquire into unterfudjen, ace. 
 inquire of ftdj erfunbigen bei 
 
164 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 insist on beftetjen auf (dat.) 
 intercede with fid) Dertoenben bei 
 interfere in fief) einmifd)en in (ace.) ; 
 
 interfere with Ijinbevn, ace. 
 introduce to oorftellen, dat. 
 intrude on fief) aufbrangen, dat. 
 intrust one with a thing, to one a 
 
 thing jemembem etroaS anDer* 
 
 trauen 
 issue from, intr., entering en a it 3 
 jest at (emergen iiber (ace.) 
 join in ftd) beteiltgen bet, an (dat.) 
 judge by, from urteilen ttad) 
 judge of urteilen iiber (ace.) 
 keep from bett>at)ren Dor {dat.) 
 keep to fief) fatten an {ace.) 
 knock at flopfeu an (ace.) 
 know about,of hnffen iiber(acc.),Dou 
 labor for fid) abtuiiben urn 
 labor under letben Don, unter (dat.) 
 languish for fdnuadjten nad) 
 laugh at ladjen iiber (ace.) 
 lavish on Derfd)tt)enben auf {ace.) 
 lean against, tr. t let)iten an (dat.) ; 
 
 intr. [fid)] lefynen an (ace.) 
 leave for abreifen nad) 
 light on (descend) fid) nieberlaffen 
 
 auf (dat. or ace) ; (hit upon) 
 
 ftoften anf (ace.) 
 limit to befdjranfen anf (ace.) 
 listen to l)ord)en anf (ace), gn* 
 
 Ijoren, dat. 
 live on, by leben Don 
 live with roofmen bei 
 long for fid) fefynen nad) 
 look after fel)en nad), ad)ten anf 
 
 (ace.) 
 look at anf el) en, ace. 
 look for, look about for fid) urn* 
 
 fel)en nad); fnd)en, ace. 
 
 look over burd)fel)en (ace.) 
 look to binbticfen auf (ace), 
 look upon as anfefyen, betrad)ten 
 
 al$, ace. 
 make of mad)en au8 
 make up for erfe^en, ace. 
 marry to Derljeirateu mit 
 measure by meffen nad) 
 meddle with, in ftd) mifdjen in 
 
 (ace), ftd) befaffen mit 
 meditate on nad)ben!en iiber (ace.) 
 meet begegnen, dat. ; I met with 
 
 an accident ein Unfall begegnete 
 
 mir 
 mention ertDafynen, gebenfen, gen. 
 
 or ace. 
 mingle with, intr., ftd) mtfd)en un* 
 
 ter (ace.) 
 mock at fpotten iiber (ace.) 
 mourn for, over trauern unt, iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 murmur at, against nturren iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 muse on nad)ftnnen iiber (ace.) 
 need bebiirfen, braudjen, gen. or ace. 
 nod at, to gunicf en, dat. 
 obey gefyordjen, dat. 
 object to, against, tr., etnmenbeu 
 
 gegen; intr. ©innoenbungen mo» 
 
 d)en gegen 
 occur to (happen) begegneu, dat. ; 
 
 (of an idea, etc. ) einf alien, dat. 
 order befel)len, gebieten, dat. [per- 
 son) , ace. (thing) 
 pardon one for jemanbem ettuaS 
 
 oer$eU)en 
 part with, from ftd) trennen Don 
 partake of, participate in teilneb* 
 
 men an (dat.) 
 partake of (eat, etc.) gentefjen, ace. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 165 
 
 pay for begafyten, ace. 
 
 perish with umfommen Dor {dot.) 
 
 permit ertauben, dat. (person), ace. 
 
 (thing) 
 persevere in, persist in beljarrett 
 
 bei, fortfatjren in (dat), or inf. 
 
 with gu 
 pine for, after ftd) fetyten nad) 
 play at (cards, etc.) fptelen, ace. 
 play for fyielen urn 
 play on (an instrument) fpieleu, 
 
 ace. 
 please gefatlen, dat. 
 point at, to geigen auf (ace.) 
 ponder on nadjgrfibeht fiber (ace.) 
 praise for loben tnegen 
 prepare for [(id)] norberetten auf 
 
 (ace. ) 
 present one with something cincm 
 
 etroaS fdjenfen 
 preserve from beroatjren nor (dat.) 
 preside over, at ben SBorftfc fiitjren 
 r bei 
 prevent from abfyatten Don, oer* 
 
 fyinbem an (dat.) 
 pride one's self on ftotg fein, fid) 
 
 etinaS eutbilben auf (ace.) 
 profit by Sftufcen gier)en au8 
 protect from, against fd)fi£en gegen 
 quarrel about [fid)] ganfen, ftreiten 
 
 urn 
 rail at gotten fiber (ace.) 
 reach to, intr. retdjen bi« an (ace), 
 
 tr. reidjen, dat. 
 read to oorlefen, dat. 
 reconcile to oerfbfyneu tnit 
 efer to, tr. roeijen an (ace.) ; intr. 
 
 fid) begieljen auf (ace.) 
 reflect on nadjbenfen fiber (ace. ) 
 refrain from fid) enttjatten, gen. 
 rejoice at fid) frcueu fiber [ace. ) 
 
 relate (refer) to ftd) begier)en auf 
 
 (ace.) 
 rely on ftd) oerlaffen auf (ace.) 
 remember ftd) erinnern, gen. or an 
 
 (ace ) 
 remind of ertnnem an (ace.) 
 repent of bercueu (ace.) 
 reply (to a person) ernnbent, dat. ; 
 
 (to a question, etc.) ernnbent auf 
 
 (ace.) 
 reproach one with jentaubem ettoas 
 
 Donuerfctt 
 request a thing of one jemanb um 
 
 etroaS bitten 
 require of forberu oon 
 resolve on fid) entfdjliegeu gu 
 resound with nnebertjallen Don 
 restrict to befdjranfen auf (ace.) 
 result from folgen au§ 
 revenge on rad)en an (dat.) 
 rid from, of befreien oon 
 ring for flingefn nad) 
 ring with erfdjatten con 
 rob of berauben, gen., or jemanbem 
 
 etroa§ rattben 
 rush upon Ijerf alien fiber (ace.) 
 sail for fegeln nad) 
 save from beroafyren oor (dat.) 
 scoff at gotten fiber (ace) 
 search for, after fudjen nad) 
 secure from, against fid)ent Dor 
 
 (ace), gegen 
 seize upon ergreifen (ace.) 
 seize by ergreifen bei 
 send for fyolen laffen, ace. 
 send to fenben, fd)icfen gu, an (ace.) 
 serve(render service to)bienen,da*. 
 serve for bieuen gu 
 shake with gittern oor (dat.) 
 share in teilfyaben an (dat.) 
 shelter,shield from fdjiifcen \>ox(dat.) 
 
166 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 shiver with jittem Dor (dat.) 
 shoot at fd)ief$en nad) 
 shrink from guriitffdjreden t»or 
 • (dat.) 
 shudder at fdjaubern Dor {dat.) 
 sigh for, after feufjen nad) 
 smell of riedjen nad) 
 smile at fddjeln iiber (ace.) 
 sneer at fyotteln iiber (ace. ) 
 spare fdjonen, gen. or ace. 
 speak of, about fpredjen Don, iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 speak to, with fpredjen mit; speak 
 
 to (address) anreben, ace. 
 stand by (aid) beiftel)en, dat. 
 stare at anftarren, ace. 
 start for abreifen nad) 
 steal from fter/len, dat. 
 stick to feftrjalten an (dat), bleiben 
 
 bei 
 strive for ftrcben nad) 
 struggle for ftreiten urn 
 subsist on leben Don 
 substitute for an bie (©telle fe^eu 
 
 Don 
 succeed in (Srfofg fjaben in, ge* 
 
 Ungen; see 87, 2 a. 
 sue for roerben urn 
 suffer from leiben Don, burd); suf- 
 fer from, with (a disease) leiben 
 
 an (dat) 
 surpass in iibertreffen an (dat) 
 suspect of in $erbad)t Ijaben megen 
 swarm with hrimmetn Don 
 swear by fd)tt>oren bei 
 swear to befdjmoren, ace. 
 swell with anidjroetlen Don 
 take by faff en bei 
 take for fatten fur 
 take from roegneljmen, dat. 
 
 talk about, of reben Don, iiber (ace.) 
 talk to, with fored)en mit 
 taste of fdjmeden nad) 
 tell of, about fagen, ergatjlen Don, 
 
 iiber (ace.) 
 thank banfen, dat 
 think about, on nadjbenfen iiber 
 
 (ace.) 
 think of benfen an (ace.) 
 thirst for, after biirften nad) 
 threaten broken, dat (person) 
 throw at roerfen nad) 
 tie to btnben an (ace.) 
 touch upon beriifyren, ace. 
 trade in fjanbeln mit 
 tremble at gittem bei 
 tremble with gittern Dor [dat) 
 trouble one's self about fid) be= 
 
 fnmmern nm 
 trust in, to Dertrauen auf (ace.) 
 trust one with a thing jemanbem 
 
 etroaS anDertrauen 
 turn into oerroanbeln in (ace.) 
 turn to [fid)] roenben an (ace.) 
 unite with, to Dereinigen mit 
 upbraid one with, for jemanbem 
 
 SSornritrfe mad)en roegen 
 value for fd)d£en roegen 
 wait for marten auf (ace.), barren, 
 
 gen. 
 wait on aufmarten, dat 
 want.be in want of ermangetn, gen. 
 warn of mam en Dor, dat 
 watch for taiiern auf (ace.) 
 weep at roeinen iiber (ace.) 
 weep for beroeinen, ace. 
 wish for miinfd)en, ace. 
 wonder at fid) rounbern iiber (ace.) 
 write about, on fdrreibeu iiber (ace.) 
 write to fd)reiben, dat or an (ace.) 
 
INDEX. 
 
 The references are to paragraphs. 
 
 About, 143. 
 
 above, 144. 
 
 Accusative, as direct object, 74 ; with 
 verbs of naming , etc., 75 ; with verbs 
 of choosing, etc., 76 ; with (cfyren, 77 ; 
 with adjectives, 78 ; of measure, etc., 
 79; of time, 80; absolute, 81; with 
 impersonals, 84, 2 a ; with an infini- 
 tive, 122. 
 
 across, 145. 
 
 Address, forms of, 27. 
 
 Adjectives, 17-18; repetition of, 13. 
 
 Adverbs, from adjectives, 129; of 
 place and direction, 130-136; com- 
 pounded with t>a, l)ter, no, 136 ; al- 
 phabetical list, 143 if. 
 
 after, 146. 
 
 against, 147. 
 
 ago, 148. 
 
 Agreement of pronouns, 24-26; of 
 verbs, 82. 
 
 all, 36. 
 
 alter, strengthening a superlative, 23. 
 
 along, 149. 
 
 although, 150. 
 
 another, 49. 
 
 Antecedents of relative pronouns, 33, 
 2 a ; not to be omitted, 34, 4. 
 
 any, anybody, etc., 37. 
 
 Apposition, nouns in, 14; 59, 2; ad- 
 jectives and participles, 18, 2. 
 
 around, 151. 
 
 Arrangement, see word-order. 
 
 Articles, 1-13; see definite and indefi- 
 nite article. 
 
 as, 152. 
 
 at, 153. 
 
 Auxiliaries, 85-86; see perfect, plu- 
 perfect, etc. ; modal, 96-105; omis- 
 sion of, in dependent clauses, 239. 
 
 he=, prefix, function of, 83 c. 
 
 because [of], 154. 
 
 befef)ten, 120. 
 
 before, 155. 
 
 behind, 156. 
 
 below, 157. 
 
 beside, besides, 158-159. 
 
 beyond, 160. 
 
 bleiben, auxiliary, 87, 3; with infini- 
 tive, 121. 
 
 both [and], 38. 
 
 braudjen, 119, 4. 
 
 but, 161. 
 
 by, 162. 
 
 Causal clauses, 140. 
 
 Collective nouns, 26. 
 
 Comparative, 19-20. 
 
 Compound verbs, separable, 130 ; 226. 
 
 Concessive clauses, 140; influence on 
 word-order, 220. 
 
 Conditional, and conditional perfect, 
 formation of, 90. 
 
 Conditional clauses, 118; 140; 171; 
 235, 2. 
 
 Conjunctions, 139-141 ; alphabetical 
 list of, 143, ff. 
 
 (107) 
 
168 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Countries, names of, 3 d. 
 
 Dative, as indirect object, 63-64; as 
 sole object, 65 ; with an accusative, 
 66 ; with verbs of delivering, etc., 
 67 ; with fagen, 68 ; with verbs of 
 removal, 69 ; with compound verbs, 
 70 ; to replace an English possessive, 
 71 ; of interest, 72 ; with adjectives, 
 73 ; with impersonals, 84, 2 b. 
 
 Definite article, 2-7 ; with names of 
 seasons, etc., 2 ; with proper names, 
 3 ; in a generalizing sense, 4 ; for a 
 possessive, 5; omission before a 
 genitive, 6 ; before all, 7. 
 
 Demonstratives, 32. 
 
 Dependent order, 236-241. 
 
 ber, see definite article; as demonstra- 
 tive, or in place of a personal pro- 
 noun 32; as determinative, 33, as 
 relative 34. 
 
 berjenige, 33. 
 
 berjetbe, 50. 
 
 Determinatives, 33. 
 
 btefer, 32. 
 
 do, as auxiliary or substitute, 85. 
 
 bod), with verbs, 235, 4. 
 
 down, 163. 
 
 biirfen, 100. 
 
 each, 39 ; each othtr, 49. 
 
 etn, see indefinite article ; = one, 48. 
 
 etntge, 51, 52. 
 
 either, pron., 40 ; conj., 164. 
 
 Emphatic order, 234-235. 
 
 Emphatic pronoun, 30, 6. 
 
 e§, uses of, 29. 
 
 e§ ift, e§ gtbt, 193.2; 194. 
 
 ettt)Ct§, with following adj., 17, 2 a. 
 
 ever, 165. 
 
 every, everybody, etc., 39. 
 
 Exclamations, influence on word-order, 
 219. 
 
 Exclamatory questions, 241. 
 
 Expletives, 29, 3 ; 192, 3. 
 
 Factitive predicate, 75-76. 
 
 fallen, with inf., 121. 
 
 Feminines in -in, 15. 
 
 few, 41. 
 
 finbcn, 119, 3. 
 
 Final clauses, subjunctive in, 113, 2 
 
 and 3 ; 190, 2. 
 for, 166. 
 from, 167. 
 fii^lcn, 119,3; 120. 
 Future, and future perfect, formation 
 
 of, 89; used to express probability, 
 
 109. 
 gebteten, 120. 
 gefyen, 121. 
 
 Gender, grammatical and natural, 25. 
 Genitive, 57-62; position of, 58 ; with 
 
 nouns, 59 ; to denote time, 60 ; with 
 
 adjectives, 61 ; with verbs, 62. 
 Gerundive, 120,4 a. 
 Ijabcn, see auxiliaries. 
 hardly, 168. 
 have, with infinitive or past participle 
 
 = cause, order, 120, 1 a; have to, 
 
 103, 3. 
 fjei&en, 98 a; 119,3; 120. 
 Ijetfen, 98 a; 119,3. 
 hence, 169. 
 
 #err, inflected before a name, 16, 2 a. 
 I)8d)ft, f)6tf)ften§, 22, 2 b. 
 fjoren, 98 a; 119,3; 120. 
 Hour of the day, 153, 6. 
 however, 170. 
 
 Hypothetical clauses, 90; 171 ; 235, 2. 
 if 171. 
 
 Imperfect, see preterit. 
 Impersonals, 84; impersonal passive, 
 
 84,4. 
 in, 172. 
 Indefinite article, 8-13; with al§, 9; 
 
 with ofyne, 10; with numerals, 11. 
 Indefinites, 36-53. 
 Indirect discourse, 114-116. 
 Infinitive, 119-122; 128,26; position 
 of, 225, 231, 1. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 169 
 
 instead [of], 173. 
 
 Interrogatives, 35. 
 
 Interrogative sentences, interrogative 
 
 order, 232; 234-235. 
 into, 174. 
 Intransitives, 83 ; formation of perfect 
 
 and pluperfect, 87, 2. 
 ja, 235. 4. 
 jener, 32. 
 femten, 101, 6. 
 fonnen, 101. 
 
 (affen, 98 a; 119,3; 120. 
 tel)ren, 77; 119.3. 
 (ernen, 119, 3. 
 less, 42. 
 
 like, adv. 175; v. 186, 1 a. 
 little, 43. 
 man, 48, 3. 
 mand), 44. 
 many, 44. 
 
 met)r, 45; mebrere, 51. 
 meift, with def. art., 21,3; metftenS, 
 
 22, 2 b. 
 minbeften§, 22, 2 b. 
 tnSgen, 102. 
 more, 45. 
 much, 46; 176. 
 muffcn, 103. 
 
 Negatives, position of, 227. 
 neither, pron 40; 177. 
 utd)t§, with following adj., 17, 2 a. 
 7io, nobody, etc., 47. 
 Nominative, 56. 
 Normal order, 214, 23?. 
 Nouns, 14-16. 
 Numbers, 54-55. 
 Object, direct, 74; indirect, 63. 
 Objective predicate, 75-76. 
 of 57. 
 off, 179. 
 Omission of auxiliary in dependent 
 
 clauses, 239. 
 on, 180. 
 one, 48 ; one another, 49. 
 
 only, 181. 
 
 Optative subjunctive, 112-113. 
 
 Order, see word-order. 
 
 other, 49. 
 
 out [of], 182. 
 
 outside [of], 183. 
 
 over, 184. 
 
 Participles, 17-18; 123-126; substi- 
 tutes, 125-126; position of, 225; 
 231, 2-4. 
 
 Passive, formation of, 91-92 ; substi- 
 tutions, 93-95 ; impersonal, 84, 4. 
 
 past, 185. 
 
 Past tense, see preterit. 
 
 Perfect, formation of, 87; use of, for 
 the preterit, 110. 
 
 Periods, 242-246. 
 
 Personal pronouns, 24-29 ; substitutes, 
 28; as reflexives, 30, 2 and 4-5; 
 after relatives, 34, 6; genitives of, 
 59,9. 
 
 Pluperfect, formation of, 87. 
 
 Position, see word-order. 
 
 Possessive case, 57 ; rendered by a da- 
 tive, 71 ; " double possessive/' 59, 
 13. 
 
 Possessives, 31 ; replaced by def. art., 
 5; by a dative, 71. 
 
 Potential subjunctive, 117. 
 
 Prepositions, 137-138; alphabetical 
 list, 143, ff. 
 
 Present tense, for the perfect, 106, 1 ; 
 for the preterit, 107 ; for the future, 
 108. 
 
 Preterit tense, for the pluperfect, 106, 
 2. 
 
 Pronouns, 24-53; see personal pro 
 nouns, etc.; repetition of, 13; substi- 
 tutes, 28. 
 
 Proper names, 3. 
 
 rather, 186. 
 
 Reciprocal pronoun, 30, 5. 
 
 Reflexives, 30 ; use of, to replace Eng- 
 lish transitives, 83, b. 
 
170 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 retten, with inf., 121. 
 
 Relatives, 34 ; not to be omitted, 34, 5. 
 
 Repetition of articles, pronouns, adjec- 
 tives, 13; of to before an infinitive, 
 119,2 c. 
 
 same, 50. 
 
 scarcely, 187. 
 
 Men, 98 a; 119,3; 120. 
 
 fein, see auxiliaries. 
 
 felb, 50. 
 
 felbft 30, 6. 
 
 several, 51. 
 
 since, 188. 
 
 Singular and plural, 54-55. 
 
 fo, 189. 
 
 fotten, 104. 
 
 some, somebody, etc., 52. 
 
 Subject, position of, 222; in depend- 
 ent clauses, 238. 
 
 Subjunctive, 111-118; optative, 112- 
 113 ; in indirect discourse, 114-116 ; 
 potential, 117-118. 
 
 Subordinate clauses, word-order in, 
 236, 240. 
 
 Substantive clauses, 190; 114, ff. 
 
 such, 53. 
 
 Superlative, 19-23. 
 
 Temporal clauses, 140. 
 
 Tenses, use of, 106-110; in indirect 
 discourse, 116. 
 
 that, 190. 
 
 the, adv., 191. 
 
 there, 192-195. 
 
 though, 196. 
 
 through, throughout, 197. 
 
 tfjun, not to be used as auxiliary or 
 
 substitute, 85. 
 till, until, 198. 
 Titles, 16; 59,1. 
 to, 199; before infinitives, 119, 2. 
 toward, towards, 200. 
 Transitives and intransitives, 83. 
 Uf)r, uninfected, 55. 
 under, 201. 
 
 Verbal nouns in -ing, 127-128. 
 Verbs, 82-128. 
 toiel, 44, 46. 
 toctgen, 119, 4. 
 roa§, = etma§, 17, 2 a ; as relative, 34, 
 
 3 and a ; as interrogative, 35. 
 tua§ fur, 35, 2 b. 
 
 tueldjer, relative, 34; interrogative, 35. 
 well, 204. 
 
 roentg, 43, 2; nienioe, 41 ; tuentger, 42. 
 menigftenS, 22, 2 b. 
 toer, as relative, 34, 3 ; as interrogative, 
 
 35, 1. 
 tuerben, = be changed into, 53, 2 a; see 
 
 auxiliaries. 
 when, 205. 
 where, whither, 206. 
 whether, 208. 
 while, whilst, 207. 
 nriffen, 101. 6. 
 with, 209. 
 within, 210. 
 without, 211. 
 molten, 105. 
 Word-order, 212-246. 
 
GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., New York. 
 
 These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated. 
 
 » 
 
 Grammars and Exercise Books. 
 Blackwell's German Prefixes and Sufiixes. By J. 8. Blackwbll, 
 
 Professor in the University of Missouri. 16mo. 137 pp. 
 Huss'a Conversation in German. By H. C. O. Huss, Professor of 
 
 Modern Languages in Princeton College. 12mo. 230 pp, 
 Joynes-Otto First Book in German. For young pupils. By Emil 
 
 Otto. Revised by Edward S. Joynes, Professor in the South 
 
 Carolina College. 12mo. 116 pp. Boards. 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory German Lessons, The. New edition, with 
 
 full vocabularies By Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 252 pp, 
 Keetels's Oral Method with German. By Jean Gustave Keetels. 
 
 12mo. 371 pp. 
 Otis's Elementary German. By Charles P. Otis. 16mo. 832 pp. 
 
 p^" There are two editions of this book: I. In German type; II. In 
 Roman type, which edition will only be sent when specially ordered. 
 Otto's German Conversation Grammar. By Dr. Emil Otto, New 
 
 edition, revised, and in part re-written, by Wm. Cook. 12mo. 
 
 Half roan. 591 pp. 
 Otto's Elementary German Grammar. With a vocabulary by George 
 
 Moritz Wahl. 12mo. 315 pp. 
 Otto's Translating English into German. By Dr. Emil Otto. 
 
 Edited by Prof. Rhodes Massie and Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 
 
 12mo. 167 pp. 
 Spanhoofd's Deutsche Grammatik. By A. W. Spanhoofd, teacher in 
 
 St. Paul's School, N. H. 16mo. 187 pp. 
 Wenckebach und Schrakamp's Deutsche Grammatik flir Amerikaner. 
 
 By Carla Wenckebach, Professor in Wellesley College, and 
 
 JOSEPHA SCHRAKAMP. 12mO. 291 pp. 
 
 Whitney's Compendious German Grammar. By Wm. D. Whitney, 
 Professor in Yale University. 12mo. 472 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Whitney's Brief German Grammar, based on the author's "Compen- 
 dious German Grammar." By Wm. D. Whitney. 16mo. 143 pp. 
 
 Whitney-Klemm German by Practice. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. Edited 
 by William D. Whitney. 12mo. 805 pp. 
 
 Natural Method and Conversation Books. 
 Game of German Conversation. By Mme. F, Jeff Tensler. 
 Heness's Der neue Leitfaden. Beim Unterricht in der deutschen 
 
 Sprache. By Gottlieb Heness. 12mo. 403 pp. 
 Heness's Der Sprechlehrer unter seinen Schulern. By Gottlieb 
 
 Heness. 12mo. 187 pp. 
 Kaisers Erstes Lehrbuch. By H. C. Kaiser, Ph.D. 12mo. 128 pp. 
 Pylodet's German Conversations. By L. Pylodbt. l8mo. 278 pp. 
 
HENRY HOLT & CO.'S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Schrakamp und Van Daell's Das Deutsche Buch. By A. N. Van Paell 
 and Josepha Schrakamp. 12mo. 144 pp. 
 
 Sprechen Sie Deutsch \ 18ino. 147 pp. Boards. 
 
 Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. First Series. By Sigmon M. Stern, 
 Director of Stern's School of Languages. 12mo. 262 pp. 
 
 Stern's Studien und Plaudereien. Second Series. By Sigmon M. 
 Stern and Menco Stern. 12mo. 380 pp. 
 
 Wenckebach's Deutscher Anschauungs-TJnterricht. By Carla and 
 Helene Wenckebach. 12uio. 451 pp. 
 
 Williams's German Conversation and Composition. By Alonzo Wil- 
 liams, A.M. a Professor in Brown University. 12mo. 147 pp. 
 
 Reading Books. 
 
 Fouque's Undine. With introduction, notes, and vocabulary, by H C 
 
 G, von Jagemann, Professor in the Indiana University. 190 pp. 
 Hey's Fabeln fur Kinder. Illustrated by Otto Speckter. With 
 
 vocabulary. (In roman type.) 12mo. 52 pp. Boards. 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory German Reader. By Dr. Emil Otto. 
 
 With notes and vocabulary by Prof. Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 
 
 282 pp. 
 
 Klemm's Lese- und Sprachbuecher. In sieben Kreisen. By Dr. L. R. 
 
 Klemm. 
 Klemm's Abriss der Geschichte der deutschen Literatur. Kreis VIII. 
 
 12mo. 385 pp. 
 Meissner's Aus meiner Welt. Geschichten ftir Grosse und Kleine. 
 
 With vocabulary by Carla Wenckebach. 12mo. 127 pp. 
 Otis's Grimm's Maerchen. Selected and edited, with introduction, 
 
 notes, and vocabulary, by Charles P. Ottis. 151 pp. 
 Otto's German Reader. By Prof. E. P. Evans. 12mo. 239 pp. 
 
 Half roan. 
 Schrakamp's Erzaehlungen aus der deutschen Geschichte. By Josepha 
 
 Schrakamp. 12mo. 286 pp. 
 Simonson's German Ballad Book. Prepared by Prof. L. Simonson, of 
 
 the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 12mo. 804 pp. 
 Storme's Easy German Reading. By G. Storme. 16mo. 356 pp. 
 Wenckebach's deutsches Lesebuch. By Carla and Helene Wencke 
 
 bach. 12mo. 316 pp. 
 Wenckebach's Die schoensten deutschen Lieder. By Carla and 
 
 Helene Wenckebach. 12mo. 363 pp. 
 Whitney's German Reader. By William D. Whitney, Professor in 
 
 Yale University. 12mo. 523 pp. Half roan. 
 Whitney-Klemm Elementary German Reader. By Dr. L. R. Klemm. 
 
 Edited by Prof. W. D. Whitney. 12mo. 237 pp. 
 Dictionary. 
 Whitney's Compendious German Dictionary. (German-English and 
 
 English-German.) By William D. Whitney. 8vo. 900 pp 
 
 A complete catalogue and price-list of Henry Holt <& Co.' 8 educa- 
 tional publications will be sent on application. 
 
HENRY HOLT 6* CO.'S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Whitney's German Texts. 
 
 delected and annotated under the general editorship of Professor William D. 
 Whitnkv. 16mo. Cloth. 
 
 Goethe's Iphigenie auf Tauris. With an introduction and notes by Frank- 
 lin Carter, President of Williams College. 113 pp. 
 
 Faust. I. Theil. With an introduction and notes by William Cook, 
 
 late Professor in Harvard University. 220 pp. 
 
 Leasing' s Minna von Barnhelm. With an introduction and notes by W. 
 D. Whitney, Professor in Yale University. 138 pp. 
 
 Nathan der Weise. With an Introduction and notes by H. 0. G. 
 
 Brandt, Professor in Hamilton College. 158 pp. 
 
 Schiller's Wilhelm Tell. With an introduction and notes by A. Saohtlb- 
 ben, Professor in the College of Charleston, S. C. 199 pp. 
 
 Maria Stuart. With an introduction and notes by Edward S. Joynes, 
 
 Professor in South Carolina College. 222 pp. 
 
 Seidensticker's German Scientific Monographs. 
 
 With notes. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 No. I. Uber Goethe's Naturwissenschaftliche Arbeiten. Von H. Helmholtz. 
 53 pp. 
 
 No II. Uber Bakterien, die Kleinsten lebenden Wesen. Von Dr. Ferdinand 
 Cohn. 65 pp. 
 
 Student's Collection of Classic German Plays. 
 
 12mo. Paper. 
 
 Goethe's Hermann und Dorothea. With notes by Calvin Thomas. 104 pp. 
 
 Egmont. Edited by Professor William Steppen. 113 pp. 
 
 Koerner's Zriny. With an introduction and notes by Edward R. Rugoles, 
 
 Professor in Dartmouth College. 126 pp. 
 Lessing's Emilia Galotti. With notes. 82 pp. 
 Schiller's Der Neffe als Onkel. With notes and a vocabulary by A. 
 
 Clement. 99 pp. 
 
 Jungfrau Von Orleans. Edited by Rev A. B. Nichols, Instructor in 
 
 German in Harvard University. 203 pp. 
 
 ■- Wallenstein's Lager. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 60 pp. 
 
 — — Die Piccolomini. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 139 pp. 
 
 Wallenstein's Tod. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss. 210 pp. 
 
 Wallenstein, complete in one volume. Cloth. 
 
 College Series of German Plays. 
 
 12mo. Paper. 
 
 Einer muss heiraten, by Wilbelmi ; and Eigensinn, by Benedix. With 
 
 notes. 63 pp. 
 Three German Comedies. I. Er ist nicht eifersnechtig, by Elz; II 
 
 Der Weiberfeind, by Benedix ; III. Im Wartesalon erster Classe 
 
 by Mueller. With notes. 24 pp. 
 Der Bibliothekar. By Gustav von Moser. With notes. 162 pp. 
 Die Journalisten. By Gustav Freytag. With notes. 178 pp. 
 Zopf und Schwert. By Gutzkow. With notes. 173 pp. 
 Englisch. By Goerner. With notes by A. H. Edgren. 61 pp. 
 Badekuren. By Putlttz. With nores. 69 pp. 
 Das Herz vergessen. By Pututz. With notes 79 pp. 
 
 3 
 
HENRY HOLT & CO:S GERMAN TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Stern's Selected German Comedies. 
 
 Selected and Edited by Professor 8. M. Stern. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 Bin Knopf. By Julius Rosen. 41 pp. 
 
 Der Schimmel. By G. von Moser. 55 pp. 
 
 Sie hat ihr herz entdeckt. By]W. Mueller ton Koenig swi nter. TO pp 
 
 Simson und Delila. By Emil Claar. 55 pp. 
 
 Er sucht einen Vetter. By Jungman. 49 pp. 
 
 Er muss tanzen. ByC. A.Paul. 51 pp. 
 
 G-aenschen von Buchenau. By W. Friedrich. 60 pp 
 
 German Plays for Children. 
 
 Kinder-Comoedien. By various authors. Edited and annotated in German 
 by Professor Th. Heness. Five plays in one volume 12mo. 141 pp. 
 
 Unterhaltungs Bibliothek. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Andersen's Bilderbuch ohne Bilder. With notes and vocabulary by Pro 
 
 fessor L. Simonson of the Hartford (Ct.) High School. 104 pp. 
 Die Eisjungfrau u. andere Geschichten. With notes by E. C. F. Krauss 
 
 150 pp. 
 Auerbach's Auf Wache; Roquette's Der gefrorene Kuss. The two in 
 
 one volume. With notes. 126 pp. 
 Carove's Das Maerchen ohne Ende. With notes. 45 pp. 
 Ebers' eine Frage. With introduction and notes. 117 pp. 
 EichendorfFs Aus dem Leben eines Taugenichts. 132 pp. 
 Fouque's Undine. With a glossary of the principal words and phrases. 
 
 137 pp. See also Jagemann^s edition under Reading Books. 
 
 Sintram und seine Gefaehrten. 114 pp. 
 
 Grimm's Die Venus von Milo ; Kafael und Michel- Angel o. 189 pp. 
 Grimm's Kinder- und Hausmaerchen. With notes. 228 pp. See also 
 
 Otis's edition under Reading Books. 
 HaufTs Das kalte Herz. 61 pp. 
 
 Heine's Die Harzreise. With introduction and notes. 97 pp. 
 Heyse's Anfaung und Ende. 54 pp. 
 
 Die Einsamen. 44 pp. 
 
 Hillern's Hoeher als die Kirche. With notes and vocabulary. 46 pp. 
 Muegge's Biukan Voss. 55 pp. 
 
 Signa die Seterin. 71 pp. 
 
 Mueller's Deutsche Liebe. With English notes. 121 pp. 
 Nathusius' Tagebuch eines armen Fraeuleins. 163 pp. 
 Ploennies' Princessin Ilse. With notes by J. M. Merrick. 45 pp. 
 Putlitz's "Was sich der wald erzaehlt. 62 pp. 
 
 Vergissmeinnicht. With English notes. 44 pp. 
 
 Riehl's Der Pluch der Schoenheit. With introduction and notes by 
 
 Francis L. Kendall. 77 pp. 
 Schiller's Das Lied von der Glocke. With introduction and notes by 
 
 Charles P. Otis, Ph.D. 70 pp. 
 Storm's Immensee. With notes. 34 pp. 
 Tieck's Die Elfen ; Das Rothkaeppchen. With notes by Professor L. 
 
 Simonson. 41 pp. 
 Vilmar and Richter's German Epic Tales. Told in prose. Die Wibe- 
 
 lungen. von A. F. C. Vilmar. Walther und Hildegund, von Al- 
 bert Richter. 100 pp. 
 
 4 
 
FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., New York. 
 
 These books are bound in cloth unless otherwise indicated* 
 
 ♦ ■- 
 
 Grammars and Exercise Books. 
 
 Borel's Grammaire Frangaise. A l'usage des Anglais. Par Eugene Borel, 
 Revised by E. B. Coe. lJmo. 450 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Delilles Condensed French Instruction. By C. J. Delille. 18mo. 143 pp. 
 Eugene's Student's Comparative French Grammar. To which ar« 
 
 added French- English Exercises. Revised by L. H. Buckingham, Ph.D. 
 
 12mo. 284 pp. 
 
 Eugene's Elementary French Lessons. Revised and edited by L. H. 
 Buckingham, Ph.D. 12mo. 126 pp. 
 
 Case's The Translator.— English into French. By Professors Gasc, L. 
 Brun, and others. 12mo. 220 pp. 
 
 Gibert's French Manual. A French Pronouncing Grammar for Toting 
 Students. By M. Gibert. 12mo, 112 pp. 
 
 Julien's Petites Logons de Conversation et de Grammaire. By F. Julien. 
 Square 12mo. 222 pp. 
 
 Otto's French Conversation Grammar. Revised by Ferdinand Bocher. 
 Professor of Modern Languages in Harvard University. 12mo. 489 pp. Half 
 roan. 
 
 Pylodet's Beginning French. Exercises in Pronouncing, Spelling, and 
 
 Translating. By L. Pylodkt. 16mo. 180 pp. Boards. 
 Sadler's Translating English into French. By P. Sadler. Revised and 
 
 annotated by Prof. C. F. Gillette. 12mo. 285 pp. 
 
 The Joynes-Otto Introductory French Lessons. By Edward S. Joynes, 
 Professor in University of South Carolina. 12mo. 275 pp. 
 
 The Joynes-Otto First Book in French. By Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 
 118 pp. Boards. 
 
 Whitney's French Grammar. By William D. Whitney, Professor in Yale 
 University, l'.'mo. 442 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Whitney's Practical French. I Taken from the author's larger Grammar, 
 and supplemented by conversations and idiomatic phrases. By Professor 
 W. D. Whitney. 
 
 Whitney's Brief French Grammar. Systematically arranged, with exer 
 cises. By William D. Whitney. 16mo. 177 pp. 
 
 Natural Method and Conversation Books. 
 
 Aliiot's Contes et Nouvelles. Suivis de Conversations.d'Exercices de Gram 
 m aire. Par Madame L. Alliot. 12mo. 
 
 Aubert's Colloquial French Drill. By E. Aubert, Professor in the Normal 
 College, New York City. Part I. 16mo. 66 pp. Part H. 118 pp. 
 
 Le Jeu des Auteurs. 96 Cards in a Box. 
 
 Moutonnier's Les Premiers Pas dans l'Etud e du Frangais par If 
 m6thode naturelle. Par C. Moutonnikr. 12mo. 197 pp. Illustrated. 
 
 Pour Approndre a Parler Frangais. 12mo. 191 pp. 
 
 Parlez-vous Frangais P A pocket manual of French and English Conversa- 
 tion, with hints for pronunciation and a list of the irregular verbs. 18tno. 
 \M pp. Boards. 
 
HENRY HOLT & CO.'S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Biodu's Lucie. Familiar Conversations in French and English. By Mme. A. 
 
 Riodu. 12mo. 128 pp. 
 Stern & Meras' fetude Progressive de la Langue Frangaise. By Sigmon 
 
 M Stern and Baptiste Meras. lsJrao. 288 pp. 
 Witcomb & Bellenger's French Conversation. Dialogues on Familiar 
 
 Subjects, to which is annexed the Summary of French Grammar, by Delille. 
 
 18mo. 259 pp. 
 
 Reading Books. 
 
 -^Esop's Fables in French. With vocabulary. 16mo. 237 pp. 
 Alliot's Les Auteurs Contemporains. Extraits choisis d'ceuvres diverse^ 
 avec Notices Biographiques et Notes. By Mme. L. Aluot. 12mo. 371 pp. 
 
 Aubert's Litterature Frangaise. Premiere Annee. By E. Aubert. 16mo. 
 338 pp. 
 
 Bocher s Progressive French Beader. With notes and vocabulary by 
 F. Bocher, Professor in Harvard University. 12mo. 291 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Fisher's Easy French Beading. Historical tales and anecdotes, arranged 
 with foot-notes, containing translations of the principal words. 16mo. 253 pp. 
 
 Fleury's ITHistoire de France. Racontee a la Jeunesse. Par M. Lame 
 Fleury. 16mo. 372 pp. 
 
 De Janons Becueil de Poesies. A l'usage de la Jeunesse Americaine. Par 
 Mlle. Camille de Janon. 16mo. 186 pp. 
 
 Joynes-Otto Introductory French Beader, The. Edited, with notes and 
 vocabulary, by Edward S. Joynes. 12mo. 163 pp. 
 
 Julien's Practical and Conversational Beader in French and English. By 
 F. Julien. Square 12mo. 182 pp. 
 
 Lacombe's Petite Histoire du Peuple Frangais. By Paul Lacombe. 
 With Grammatical and Explanatory Notes by Jules Bue. 12mo. 212 pp. 
 
 La Fontaine's Fables Choisies. Edited, with notes, by Leon Delbos. 12mo. 
 119 pp. Boards. 
 
 Pylodet's Beginner French Beader. W T ith a complete vocabulary. Ar- 
 ranged by L. Pylodet. 16mo. 235 pp. Boards. 
 
 Pylodet's Second French Beader. With a complete French-EDglish vo- 
 cabulary. Compiled by L. Pylodet. Illustrated. 12mo. 277 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's La Litterature Frangaise Classique. Tirees des Matinees Litte- 
 raires d' Edouard Mennechet. 12mo. 393 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's La Litterature Frangaise Contemporaine. Recueil en prose 
 et en vers. 12mo. 310 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's Gouttes de Bosee. Petit Tresor poStique des Jeunes Personnes. 
 l8mo. 188 pp. 
 
 Pylodet's La Mere l'Oie. Poesies, Snigmes, chansons et 'rondes.enfantines. 
 Illustre. 8vo. 80 pp. 
 
 Whitney's Short French Reader. With notes and vocabulary. By W. D. 
 Whitney. 16mo. 
 
 Dictionaries. 
 
 Bellow's French and English Dictionary for the Pocket. 82mo. 600 pp. 
 
 The same. Larger print. 12mo. 600 pp. Half roan. 
 
 Gasc's New Dictionary of the French and English Languages. By 
 
 Ferdinand E. A. Gasc. 8vo. French-English part, 600 pp. Englisli-French 
 
 part, 586 pp. One volume. 
 Gasc's Improved Modern Pocket Dictionary. By F. A. E. Gasc. 18mo. 
 
 French-English part, 261 pp. English-French part, 387 pp. One volume. 
 
 A descriptive catalogue, with prices, of Henry Holt dt Co. '8 educational publi- 
 cations wdl be sent on application* 
 
HENR Y HOLT & CO:S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 Students' Collection of Classic French Plays. 
 
 The first six with full notes by Prof. E. S. Joynes. The last three with notes 
 by Leon Dklbos, M.A. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 Le Cid. Par Corneille. 110 pp. 
 
 Athalie. Par Racine. 117 pp. 
 
 Le Misanthrope. Par Moliere. 180 pp. 
 
 L'Avare. Par Moliere. 132 pp. 
 
 Esther. Par Racine. 60 pp. 
 
 Cinna. Par Corneille. 87 pp. 
 
 Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. Par Moliebb. 140 pp. 
 
 Horace. Par Corneille. 78 pp. 
 
 Les Plaideurs. Par Racine. 80 pp. 
 
 The foregoing in 3 vols., three plays in each, in the above order. 12mo. Cloth 
 
 Romantic French Drama. (12ino. Flexible covers.) 
 
 Buy Bias. By Victor Hugo. With notes by Rena A. Michaels. 117 pp. 
 
 College Series of Modern French Plays. 
 
 With English notes by Prof. Ferdinand Bocher. 12mo. Paper. 
 
 La Joie Fait Peur. Par Mme. de Girardin. 46 pp. 
 La Bataille de Dames. Par Scribe et Legouve. 81 pp. 
 La Maison de Penarvan. Par Jules Sandeau. 72 pp. 
 La Poudre aux Yeux. Par Labiche et Martin, 59 pp. 
 Jean Baudry. Par Auouste Vacquerie. 72 pp. 
 Les Petits Oiseaux. Par Labiche et Delacour. 70 pp. 
 Mademoiselle de la Seigliere. Par J. Sandeau. 99 pp. 
 Le Boman d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Par O. Feuillbt. 100 pp. 
 Les Doigts de Fee. Par E. Scribe. Ill pp. 
 Above in 2 vols. Cloth. Vol I. containing the first five, Vol. II. the last four. 
 
 Modern French Comedies. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Le Village. Par O. Feuillet. 34 pp. 
 
 La Cagnotte. Par MM. Eugene Labiche et A. Delacour. 83 pp. 
 
 Les Femmes qui Pleurent. Par MM. Siraudin et Lambert Thiboust. 28pjx 
 
 Les Petites Miseres de la Vie Humaine. Par M. Clairville. 85 pp. 
 
 Le Niaise de Saint Flour. Par Bayard et Lemoine. 38 pp. 
 
 Un Caprice. Par Alfred de Musset. 
 
 Trois Proverbes. Par Th. Leclerq. 68 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Valerie. Par Scribe. 39 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Le Collier de Perles. Par Mazeres. 56 pp. With vocabulary. 
 
 Selected French Comedies. 
 
 Original text, with a close English version on opposite pages. 
 En "Wagon. Comedie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12mo. 44 pp. 
 Cetait Gertrude. ComSdie en 1 acte. Par Eugene Verconsin. 12mo. 54 pp. 
 
 French Plays for Children. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 La Petite Maman, par Mme. de M. ; Le Bracelet, par Mme. de Gaule. 38 pp. 
 
 La Vieille Cousine, par E. Souvestre; Les Ricochets. 52 pp. 
 
 Le Testament de Madame Patural, par E. Souvestre; La Demoiselle 
 
 de St. Cyr s par Drohoyowska. 54 pp. 
 La Zjotene de Francfort, par E. Souvestre. La Jeune Savante, 
 
 par Mme. Curo. 47 pp. 
 
 French Plays for Girls. (12mo. Paper.) 
 
 Trois Comedies pour Jeunes Pilles: I. Les Cuisinieres; II. Le Petit 
 "Mm: III. La Malade Imaginaire. Par Lemercier de Neuville 184 pp. 
 
HENRY HOLT & CO.'S FRENCH TEXT-BOOKS. 
 
 Bibliotheque (^'Instruction et de Recreation. 
 
 12mo volumes. Paper or Cloth. 
 
 Achard's Clos-Pommier, et lies Prisonniers du Caucase. Par Xavxeb 
 
 de Maistre. Cloth. 144 pp. 
 Achard's Clos-Pommier. Paper. 106 pp. 
 Bedolliere's Mere Michel. With vocabulary. Cloth. 188 ppt 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Biographies des Musiciens Celebres. Cloth. 871 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Carraud et Segur's Contes (Les Petites Filles Modeles, par Mme. de Segur. 
 
 et Les Gouters de la Grand'mere, par Mme. Z. Carraud). With a list or 
 
 difficult phrases. Cloth. 193 pp. 
 
 Carraud's Les Gouters de la Grand'mere. With a list of difficult 
 phrases. Paper. 95 pp. 
 
 Choix de Contes Contemporains. With notes. By B. F. O'Connor. Cloth. 
 
 300 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Erckmann-Chatrian's Conscrit de 1813. With notes. By Prof. F. 
 
 Booher. Cloth. 236 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Le Blocus. With notes. By Prof. F. B6cher. Cloth. 258 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Madame Therese. With notes. By Prof . F. Bocher. Cloth. 216 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Pallet's Princes de l'Art. Cloth. 834 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Feuillet's Boman d'un Jeune Homme Pauvre. Cloth. 804 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 P6val's ■ Chouans et Bleus.' With notes. Cloth. 188 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Foa's Contes Biographiques. With vocabulary. Cloth. 180 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Petit Robinson de Paris. With vocabulary. Cloth. 166 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Mac6's Bouchee de Pain. (L'Homme ) With vocabulary. Cloth, 860 pn 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 De Maistre's Voyage Autour de ma Chambre. Paper. 117 pp. 
 
 Les Prisonniers du Caucase. Paper. 88 pp. 
 
 Merimee's Columba. Cloth. 179 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Porchat's Trois Mois sous la Neige. Cloth. 160 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Pressense's Rosa. With vocabulary. By L. Pylodbt. Cloth. 88&, 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Saint-Germain's Pour une ^pingle. With vocabulary. Cloth. 174 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 Sand's Petite Padette. Cloth. 205 pp. 
 
 The same. Paper. 
 
 S6gur et Carraud's Contes. (Petites Filles Modeles; Les Gouters de la 
 
 Grand'mere.) Cloth. 193 pp. 
 Segur's Les Petites Filles Modeles. Paper. 98 pp. 
 Souvestre's Philosophe sous les Toits. Cloth. 187 pp. 
 — -— — Tht same. Paper. 
 
RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
 University of California Library 
 
 or to the 
 
 NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 • 2-month loans may be renewed by calling 
 (510)642-6753 
 
 • 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing 
 books to NRLF 
 
 • Renewals and recharges may be made 
 4 days prior to due date 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AU6 28 2006 
 
SPsSKsSS* 
 
 ^ W- Ail^ 
 
 797966 
 
 m 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY